SPRING EDITION $125

].965ElECTRONIC
ciiiiiériics

:EXPERIMENTER'S
H A N DBOOK
How TO BUILD
VHF, SWL, & HAM BAND RECEIVERS HI-FI
SPEAKER SYSTEMS SCIENCE FAIR PROJECTS
PHOTOELECTRIC ALARM TEST EQUIPMENT
C -R9
AUTOMOTIVE `Jx
ELECTRONIC
PROJECTS
IMPROVING
TV RECEPTION

MAKE YOUR
OWN 0-5000
RPM TACH FROM
SIMPLIFIED PLANS
(see page 11)
 LAFAYETTE
RADIO ELECTRONICS
FREE - FAYETTE Now
1965 CATALOG
No. 650

Over 500 Pages!

Featuring Everything
G [Link] in Electronics for
Home
Industry
Laboratory
tl,P.11Men!
from the
Kr .0«
"World's Hi-Fi &
aamo,
crat

Electronics Center"

See the Largest Selection in Our 44 -Year History:

STEREO HI-FI .. there's a complete selection of
. stereo hi-fi equipment
at Lafayette. All famous brands plus Lafayette's own top-rated compo-
It's all in the new, nents. All at Lafayette's low, low prices too.
1965 Lafayette Catalog. CITIZENS BAND ...
Lafayette still leads the field in transceivers, Walkie-
Talkie and accessories. And the price is always right at Lafayette.
I Detach and Mail the Card TAPE RECORDERS .. from portable recorders to complete decks-you'll
.

for Your FREE Copy! find the right recorder at the right price at Lafayette.
for receivers, transmitters, as well as the smallest
or write- HAM GEAR .

accessory, amateurs everywhere make Lafayette their headquarters for

all their gear.
Lafayette Radio Electronics, Dept. EH -5 Want More? There's Test Equipment, Radios, Tools, Books, TV and Radio
P.O. Box 10, Syosset, L. I., N. Y. 11791 Tubes and Parts, Auto Accessories, Cabinets, Drafting Supplies, Intercoms.
AND Marine Equipment, Cameras, Optical Goods, Musical Instruments,
P.A. Equipment, TV Sets, and Much More.
BUY ON TIME
24 Months to Pay.
...
Use Lafayette's famous Easy -Pay Credit Plan-up to

CIRCLE NO. 22 ON READER SERVICE CARD

 AT SEA

ON LAND

In the Air!

Job Opportunities continue to

increase for the Electronics Technician
Electronics is a multi -billion dollar industry, growing rapidly, calling for

TRAINING prepares you at home -

well -trained technicians, offering many good -paying opportunities. DeVry
or in its well-equipped training centers
Radio, Television, Communications, Missiles, Computers, Radar, Control
for -
FILM
Systems, etc.
You also get the loan
DeVry sends the type of materials you need for learning electronics at
of a motion picture home. You build and keep (1) a modern 5 -inch oscilloscope and (2) a
projector and 16 reels
portable transistorized meter. Use these on the job or to make money as
of film to help you you learn. You work 300 construction and test procedures with our ex-
learn quickly, remem-
clusive "Electro -Lab". Modern lessons (No. 3 above) with their handy
ber more.
foldout diagrams help to speed your progress.
Let us put our more than 30 years of "know-how" behind you today
to help you prepare for a lot of brighter, more prosperous tomorrows.
Send coupon for 2 FREE booklets today.
Accredited Member of National Home Study Council
FREE! DeVRY TECHNICAL INSTITUTE
Send For 2 4141 Belmont Ave., Chicago, III. 60641 Dept. EE11-1-V
Booklets Today ! Please give me your two free booklets. "Pocket Guide to
Real Earnings." and "Electronics in Space Travel"; also
include details on how to prepare for a career in Elec-
tronics. I am interested in the following opportunity fields
EMPLOYMENT ucvR (check one or more):
Naeal Space & Missile Electronics Communications
SERVICE Earnings Television and Radio D Computers
All DeVry graduates can receive Microwaves Broadcasting
Radar D Industrial Electronics
the help of our highly effective Automation Electronics D Electronic Control
employment service without ad-
ditional cost. Name Age
PLEASE PRINT
Address Apt

DeVry Technical Institute City Zone State

Check here if you are under 16 years of age
Chicago Toronto Canadian residents: Write DeVry Tech of Canada. Ltd.
4141 BelmontTAvenue
Avenue 970 Lawrence Avenue West, Toronto 19, Ontario
2093
Chicago, Illinois 60641
6J601
CIRCLE NO. 11 ON READER SERVICE CARD
1965 Spring Edition 1
 hal/i018t,'eis qua/its
3 `is the BIG NEWS in
TEST INSTRUMENT KITS
... and hallicrafters engineered quality means outstanding
specifications and performance . . . plus simplified construction!

NEW "Fail -Proof" soldering NEW assembly ease. Mechan-

terminal strips simplify mak- ical parts are riveted to the
ing of positive connections. chassis at the factory.

CAPACITANCE DECADE RESISTOR DECADE Kit HD -2

Kit HD -1 Use to substitute known -value
Ideal for experimental and precision resistors in a cir-
service work requiring pre- cuit. Resistors are one -watt,
cision capacitors. Sixteen 10%. Twenty-eight commer-
commercial slide switches give total variability in cial slide switches give total variability in 1 -ohm
100 pf steps. Uses silve. mica capacitors and long steps. Range: 1 ohm to 10 megohms in seven
lasting stable defilm capacitors. Range .0001 to 1.0 decades. Price $14.95
mfd in four decades. Price $14.95
R.F. GENERATOR Kit HG -1
Generates frequencies from 50 kc.
CONDENSER TESTER Kit HC -1
to 55 Mc. in six steps. Calibrated
Handy service bench instrument for
harmonics in two steps from 55
checking unknown condenser and re- Mc. to 220 Mc. Low frequency
sistor values under operating condi- range exceptionally stable. Accu-
tions. Has precision tuning eye for
racy 11/2% of the reading. R.F.
easy operation. Four capacitance output .1 -volt. Bandswitch as-
ranges: 10 mmf to 2,000 mfd. sembly pre -wired and calibrated.
Three resistance ranges: 0.5 ohm
Price $29.95
to 5 megohms. Price $29.95
VACUUM TUBE VOLT MILLIAMETER
5-INCH OSCILLOSCOPE Kit HO -1 Kit HM -1
A perfect scope for servicing color Has an exclusive built-in milli-
TV sets. Has full 5 Mc. bandwidth. ameter circuit, available at the
Tube is 5 UPI. One -volt peak-to -peak turn of a switch. Illuminated meter
source attenuator permits voltage and separate front panel On -Off
measurements over range of 10,000 switch. Has seven AC, DC voltage
to 1. Retrace blanking amplifier pro- ranges, from 1.5 to 1500; seven
vided. Phasing is continuously vari- ohmeter ranges, 0 to 1,000 meg-
able from 0 to 140°. Has two axis ohms; and six milliameter ranges,
(beam) modulation. Price $84.95 1.5 to 500. Price $29.95

BATTERY ELIMINATOR Kit HP -1

Reliable source of 6- or 12 -volt DC power for servic-
ing car radios, including transistor and "hybrid." AC
ripple less than .25%; exceptionally low. Voltage
ranges 0-8 volts and 0-16 volts. Also use as battery

ji
charger. Has voltage and current panel meters.
Price $49.95

ds a y at your Authorized
iiicrafte Kt
Lovk
11
ths P
Headquarters!
ha//icrafiers AilcurtezKito
for FREE Catalog, write Dept. 5-A, 5th & Kostner Aves., Chicago 24, III.
Export: International Div., Hallicrafters. Canada: Gould Sales Company, Montreal, P. Q.
CIRCLE NO. 17 ON READER SERVICE CARD
2 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 1965 ELECTRONIC
EXPERIMENTER'S
HANDBOOK SPRING EDITION

PHILLIP T. HEFFFERNAN Publisher

OLIVER P. FERRELL Editor
JAMES A. ROTH Art Editor
MARGARET MAGNA Associate Editor
ANDRE DUZANT Technical Illustrator
NINA CHIRKO Editorial Assistant
19ôá
PATTI MORGAN Editorial Assistant
ELECTRONIC
LAWRENCE SPORN Advertising Sales Manager
ARDYS C. MORAN Advertising Service Manager EXPERIMENTER'S
ZIFF-DAVIS PUBLISHING COMPANY HANDBOOK
Editorial and Executive Offices (212 ORegon 9-72001
One Pork Avenue, New York, New York 10016
William B. Ziff, Chairman of the Board (1946-19531
William Ziff, President
W. Bradford Briggs. Executive Vice President
Hershel B. Sarbin, Vice President and General Manager
Philip Sine, Treasurer
Walter S. Mills, Jr., Circulation Director
Stanley R. Greenfield, Vice President
Phillip T. Heffernan, Vice President
New York Office (212 ORegon 9-7200)
One Park Avenue, New York, New York 10016
Eastern Advertising Manager, RICHARD J. HALPERN

Midwestern Office (312 WAbash 2-4911)

434 South Wabash Avenue, Chicago, Illinois 60605
Midwestern Advertising Manager, JAMES WEAKLEY
Western Office (213 CRestview 4-0265)
9025 Wilshire Boulevard, Beverly Hills, California 90211
Western Advertising Manager, BUD DEAN MPA

THIS is the Ninth Annual Edition of the ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK.

If you looked closely at the cover, you will have noted that we said "Spring
Edition." Yes, in response to hundreds of requests, the EXPERIMENTER'S HAND-
BOOK will be issued twice in 1965-the usual Spring Edition, and a brand-new
"Fall Edition." We are also pleased to announce that projects will appear in
both editions that are new and not reprints from POPULAR ELECTRONICS. As in
the past, your Editors have taken great pains to double-check all circuit dia-
grams and parts listings. We believe them to be as correct as possible at time
of printing. We hope you enjoy the projects described herein and that you will
look forward to the Fall Edition. THE EDITORS

1965 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK, Spring Edition, published by the Ziff -Davis
Publishing Company, One Park Avenue, New York, New York 10016. Also publishers of Popular
Electronics, Electronics World, HiFi/Stereo Review, Communications Handbook, Tape Recorder Annual,
Stereo/Hi-Fi Directory. Copyright © 1965 by Ziff -Davis Publishing Compony. All rights reserved.

1965 Spring Edition 3

Nation's most popular, most Viking Amateur Equipment opens "Messenger" Industrial Radio
complete Citizens Band line! the door to world-wide adventure! for a fully integrated system!
Priced within easy reach of any
CB -
Everything you ever wanted for
from compact, hand-held
"Personal Messengers" to the
Excellent value, solid performance,
and an unmatched reputation for
reliability-that's why novice and
business, here's the line that
offers everything from hand-held
tiny, new all transistor "Messenger experienced amateurs check units and portable field pack to a
Ill"! Information -packed, full - Johnson first! Complete, 20 -page choice of base station and mobile
color 8 -page brochure gives you amateur catalog gives you all the equipment for use in 25 to 50
all the details-see your distribu- dope on these world famous trans- megacycle range! Complete de-
tor or use the coupon below. mitters and station accessories. scriptive literature available from
your distributor, or use coupon.
SEND
E. F. JOHNSON COMPA COUPON
® 2503 10th Ave. S.W. Waseca, Minnesota 560NY93
TODAY!
Please rush me the following literature:
Indicate the
4-Color "Messenger" Citizens Radio Literature 20 -Page
Amateur Equipment Catalog 20 -Page Booklet "Al! About Two - material you wish
Way Radio" 4-Color "Messenger" Industrial Radio Literature to receive-for
detailed information,
NAME see your Johnson
ADDRESS distributor!
CITY STATE ZIP '" Manufacturers of the world's most widely
used personal communications transmitters
CIRCLE NO. 21 ON READER SERVICE CARD
4 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 1965ELECTRONIC

EXPERIMENTER'S
HANDBOOK Spring Edition

CONTENTS

1 Electronics Around the Home

Cloud Sentinel-X-Line Tachometer-Cheater Cord De Luxe
7
-X-Line Charger-Automatic Safety Flasher-Exterminate
TV Sync -Bug Interference-Pickup Pranks-Boost Box-
Telephone Beeper-TV's Best Guarded Secret-Coming or
Going-Largo to Presto Metronome-"Loud-Hailer" for the
Telephone-Car Battery Saver

2 Hi-Fi and Stereo

Reflectoflex Speaker Enclosure-Phono Fillips-Resistive
Load for Hi-Fi Test-Another Ceramic Tile Enclosure-
57

Audio Aids-Stereo Indicator

3 Communications for the Hobbyist 77

VHF Listener-SSB Product Detector-Crystal Super Cali-
brator -2 -Tube Superhet for 80 Meters-The WXCVR-
R.F. Coil Frequency Finder-Code Bander-Selected Proj-
ects from W9EGQ-The Idento-Minder-2-Meter Simple
Superhet

4 Electronics in the Workshop

Bargains by the Bagful-Handy EP Pack-The Squealer--
Meterless VTVM-Electronic Stop Watch-C Bridge-VHF
Grid -Dip Meter-Best of Tips and Techniques
121

1965 Spring Edition 5

VOLTAGE J41*1 .

IT'S EASY TO CHECK WITH INTERNATIONAL'S

AOC VMK-1 VOLTMETER

This compact test instrument will measure DC expensive equipment failure due to improper
voltages from 0 to 500 volts, AC voltages from voltages Handy as a screwdriver. It takes only a
0 to 250 volts, DC milliamperes from 0 to 100 short time to assemble the kit from easy to
milliamperes. Accuracy within i- 10 percent. understand instructions.
Dimensions: 3" x 3" x 2" Designed by International
Tests batteries High quality components
Tests generators Economically priced
Tests AC power sources Order your AOC VMK-1 Voltmeter today!
Use the VMK-1 voltmeter aboard your boat, at Kit, complete with test probes $7.95
home, in your workshop, office or car. Prevent Wired, complete with test probes 9.95

Write Today For Our Free Catalog!

MANUFACTURERS OF
PRECISION MADE CRYSTALS
AND EQUIPMENT
18 NORTH LEE OKLAHOMA CITY, OKLA.
CIRCLE NO. 19 ON READER SERVICE CARD
6 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Chapter
ELECTRONICS
AROUND the HOME
ELECTRONIC gadgets or devices that you can build for use around your
home are practically limitless. In this chapter, your Editors have offered
a sampling that is sure to attract your interest and attention. Automo-
tive electronics is represented by four projects, including a precision
tachometer with a 0-5000 or 0-6000 rpm range; a battery charger that
thinks for itself; a "Car Battery Saver"-just in case you (or someone
in the family) has a tendency to walk off and leave the headlights
burning; and a simple "Safety Flasher."
Everyone with a portable TV set should read Lew Harlow's story on
rabbit -ear antennas, and SWL's, CB'ers, or hams bugged by TV sync
interference should find Bill Orr's ideas on suppression of value.
The remaining projects include some telephone attachments, a metro-
nome, a science fair project, and a photoelectric alarm that actually tells
which way a person is moving when the light beam is broken.

The Cloud Sentinel H. E. Sanders, W4CWK 8

X -Line Tachometer Charles Caringella, W6NJV 11

Cheater Cord Deluxe James A. Fred 16

X -Line Charger Oliver P. Ferrell 21
Automatic Safety Flasher Lou Garner 26
Exterminate TV Sync -Bug Interference William I. Orr, W6SAI 28
Pickup Pranks Fred Blechman, K6UGT 30
Boost Box Art Trauffer 32
Telephone Beeper Fred Blechman, K6UGT 34
TV's Best Guarded Secret Lewis A. Harlow 39
Coming or Going Arthur J. Davison 41
Largo to Presto Metronome John F. Cleary 47
"Loud -Hailer" for the Telephone Donald L. Wilcox 50
Car Battery Saver R. C. Apperson, Jr. 53
1965 Spring Edition 7
THE
CLOUD
SENTINEL
Watch far-off flashes
of lightning, small
BOLTS OF LIGHTNING have
storm discharges, frightened, puzzled, and fasci-
and fair weather nated mankind from the begin-
currents as they ning of recorded time. These
hright, intense flashes of electricity be-
animate the meter tween clouds and earth, or between
needle concentrations of opposite polarity with-
in clouds, may pass average currents
as high as 30,000 amperes. Not so famil-
iar as visible and audible discharges,
however, are the infinite number of
unspectacular discharges which pass
varying and continuous currents so
small that even sensitive microam-
meters have difficulty detecting them.
These tiny currents, which pass
Through any conductor rising above the
earth's surface, flow during both fair
weather and foul. With a device that
shows the direction of current flow and
:he amount and rapidity of the changes
constantly taking place, it is possible to
predict the approach of a storm, and to
"see" far-off flashes of lightning as they
occur. Day-to-day observations can be
correlated with weather conditions for
a science fair project, or just to satisfy
your curiosity.
"The Cloud Sentinel" is a simple,
easy -to -build device which you can use

By H. E. SANDERS, w4CWK
 PARTS LIST to detect cloud-earth currents as low as
B1-Size dry cel.
AA several hundredths of one microampere
B2 Size D dry cell two required) as they pass through your antenna -
M1-6-`0 .a. meter (Lafayette TM -200, ground system.
$4 95) How It Works. The Cloud Sentinel is
Q1-Pxp ircrsistor (G.E. 2N508 or essentially a basic d.c. current ampli-
2N1c77) fier circuit which has been expanded to
R1 1.5- egohm, 1/2 -watt resistor
include a meter shunt to allow the oper-
R2, JR `-2270-ohm, '2 -watt resistor ator to reduce amplification as a storm
R3-10,C'CO-chm pot?ntiometer, log taper
R4-56.0-eh'n potentiometer, linear taper approaches and electrical activity in-
t.:rap-actim switch creases. Another switch permits revers-
swit--h ing the polarity of the input in the event
S.-2-po'e, :-position_ lever switch of cloud -earth polarity reversals.
1-Bettery hider for AA cell Transistor Q1, resistors R2 and R5,
(Keystone #139 or Equivalent) potentiometer R4, switch S2, and battery
1-Bcttery Adder for two D cells B2 form the d.c. current amplifier, with
(Kestore #176 or equivalent) meter Ml and shunt potentiometer R3
1-Traxs'stc r socket providing current indications. On the
1-3"x 1r x Minibox (Bud CU -3005A) author's unit, a current amplification of
Misc.-2"x 2! " component mounting 30 is obtained with R3 in "off" position.
bonrct,pll-tk pill box cap, knobs, wire, With R3 m the "on" position there is no
bracket, rubber feet, :older, hardware,
panel dec2 s noticeab:e meter movement. Various in-
between settings allow the operator to
Antenna Graund System choose any desired amplification factor.
1 3O'50'lergth of #14 insulated solid Switch S3 connects the antenna and
copper wi-c ground to the transistor's base and emit-
1-30 9T length of m'crophone cable ter with a choice of polarities. With S3
(B-ldm #846:)
1-3' lsngih cf #14 galvanized ground in its neutral position, the antenna is
or
guy [Link] connected directly to ground. Switch Si,
1-10'-417 anic na mast
1-5' length of 1/2" galranized steel pipe
.-Weed plug to f t in top of mast,
screws. solder, mast platform, guy wire,
insrlators (as n?cessary)
a
2NSOB
gp
ON-OFF

S3
POLARITY

. J

R3
SHUNT
 Ql, R2, R5, and several tie points, and
is attached to the front panel with a
A" x 1/" x 2" bracket. Battery holders
for B1 and B2 are screwed to the bottom
of the box with 14" space above them to
provide clearance for wiring the tran-
sistor. Mechanical details, parts layout,
and lead dress are not critical, and may
be altered as desired.
Although not absolutely essential, it
is a good idea to surround the transistor
with a thermal barrier. For the proto-

411. GND ANT

Completed Cloud Sen-

tinel is shown above,
the parts layout at
the right. Parts val-
ues and arrangement
are not at all criti-
cal; principal require-
ment is sensitive me-
ter. (The new Lafay-
ette catalog number
for the TM -200 spec-
ified in the Parts
List is 99 G 5060.)
At the far right is a
photo of antenna used
by the author (see
text). Use #14 bare
copper wire for spikes,
insulated wire for the
lead-in taped to mast.

resistor Rl, and battery 131 provide a type, papier-mâché was made by soak-
known current of one microampere to ing newspaper in water. A plastic pill
the amplifier for calibration purposes. box lid was filled loosely with this mix-
Construction. The prototype Cloud Sen- ture and pressed down over Q1.
tinel was built into a 3" x 4" x 5" Mini- Parts Substitutions. Resistance values
box which provided ample space for easy specified for the Cloud Sentinel may be
assembly with the miniature meter and altered within reason. The author satis-
batteries specified. The on -off switch factorily used a large surplus 50-0-50
(S2), meter M1, and potentiometers R3 microammeter in a breadboard version
and R4 are mounted on the front panel, of the Sentinel, which eliminated the
and the antenna -ground terminal board need for polarity -reversing switch S3.
and polarity -reversing switch, S3, are A multi -position switch and a series of
fitted on the top. The calibrate switch, resistors in place of R3 would permit the
S1, is a microswitch mounted behind the operator to switch from one known am-
front panel at the left top corner, and plification to another and eliminate the
is actuated through a hole in the top of need for the calibration circuit. With
the unit. minor resistance changes which can be
A small 2" x 21/2" piece of component worked out by the reader, up to 6 volts
mounting board is used as a chassis for (Continued on page 159)
10 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 ifflanionnummumuummuum
COVER STORY

-Line, àchometer
Pre-packaged low-cost seri 'mars offer opportunity to build

linear -scale, high -accuracy t,ach for autotnctive or marine use

By CHARLES CARENGELLA, VY NJV

MOUNTEDUNTED under the dashboarc' in the photo move is a tachometer that

would make any hot -rod enthusiast green vrith envy. The circuit and
seme of the semiconductors were taken front General Electric Company's
new "Experimenter Line" of control devices which come complete with sche-
niatics. These devices consist of zener Bioces, transistors, reed switches, etc.,
and the "Line" is available throughout the united states. The tach described
nere uses two of the packaged devices. The remaining tach components can
be purchased at prices ranging from about $20 to a high of $30.
How It Works. The tachometer input terminals are connected direc^ly
across the distributor breaker points. While the points are closed during the
dwell time, the base of transistor 01 is at ground potential. Since the Q1
emitter is biased positive through resistors F.'3 cnd Rb, Q1 is held cut off, with
its collector about 8 volts positive to ground. When the breaker points open,
the inductve kick from the coil primary drives the tach input sharply pcs-
X-Line Tachometer
itive. Reduced by the input network
(R1, Cl, R2, and R5) to a safe value,
this positive -going impulse turns Ql on,
dropping its collector to about ground
potential.
This negative -going pulse is coupled
through C2 to base 2 of Q2, which was
held cut off until this time by positive
bias through R7. The duration of the
negative pulse at base B2 is very short,
since it exists only while C2 is charg-
ing through R7. Transistor Q2 is turned
on by the short negative pulse, and be-
comes a short-circuit path to ground
through which C3 discharges. The dis-
charge current from C3 through base B1
holds Q2 on until the discharge is com-
pleted, regardless of the return of base
2 to a positive bias condition.
When C3 has fully discharged, Q2

No effort has been made to

draw up a new scale for the
X -Line tachometer since many
builders may not use this me-
ter. The scale is perfectly
linear, with 100 equal to 1000
rpm, 200 to 2000 rpm, etc.

again cuts off, and C3 charges through

R8 and R9. Since the voltage at the plus
end of R8 is held at 8.2 volts by zener
diode DI, the amount of current that
flows each time C3 is recharged is al-
ways the same. Since C3 is recharged
once each time the breaker points open, the next page can be followed with as-
the average current through the meter surance that everything will fit properly.
is directly proportional to engine speed, Regardless of the meter used on your
despite changes in point dwell time and tach, prepare to mount the Vectorbord
other factors. The required capacitance on the meter terminals use push -in
;

value for C3 for different types of ma- terminals to hold the components rigidly
rine and automobile engines is given in in place. Both transistors are seated in
the small table near the top of page 14. sockets and calibration potentiometer
Construction. Probably the easiest way R9 is attached to the Vectorbord in one
to construct the X -Line Tach is to mount corner. Only three wires need exit from
all components on a 3%" x 31/a" piece of the metal cabinet-or two if the metal
Vectorbord. Component layout is not frame of the cabinet is grounded to the
critical, however; the close-up view on metal of the dashboard.
12 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 All components can be
TO IGNITION TO POINTS R2 QI conveniently mounted on
SWITCH a small piece of Vector -
bord. Push -in terminals
(22 required) are used as
tie points. Vectorbord
is attached to terminal
posts of 500-µa. meter.

DI
RS
CI
C3
( R7 UNDER 03)
GROUND-
R9

Two miniature 6 -volt

bulbs-wired in series-
are cemented to the back
of the plastic meter face,
providing nighttime illu-
LEADS TO PLI â PLI mination of dial. A drop-
ping resistor (not shown)
/ cuts down on brightness.

The most expensive item in the X -Line

Tach can be the 0-500 µa. meter. To
verify the linearity and accuracy of the
circuit design, a high-quality Simpson
Model 1327C meter was used in the au-
thor's prototype. While this meter has
many admirable features, a substantial
saving can be made by shopping around
for meters costing $7-$8 less. An addi-
tional saving can be made by eliminat-
ing the special cabinet and mounting
the meter-and Vectorbord-on a solid
sheet of plain aluminum.
Meter Illumination. For convenience
while driving at night, the meter used
in this prototype has been provided with
illumination by mounting two small
lamps along the bottom edge of the me- the brilliance of the bulbs. It is not vis-
ter scale. Similar illuminating methods ible in any of the illustrations, but is
can be devised using the same parts (11, soldered to the ground lug on the Vec-
12, and R11) with different meters. torbord between D1 and R9. If you want
If the Simpson meter is used, pry off to adjust the brilliance with the car's
the meter front cover with a penknife dashboard control, there is no reason
or thin screwdriver blade. Use epoxy why the lead from IZ cannot go to the
cement to attach the lamp sockets to the dashboard rheostat.
plastic meter face (see photo) Then. Calibration. The range of the X -Line
wire the two lamps in series-they are Tach can be set between 0-4500 and
rated at 200 ma. and 6 volts-bringing 0-7000 rpm by adjustment of R9. Prac-
thin wire connecting leads out through tically all pre -1964 Detroit cars are cov-
a small hole in the rear of the meter. ered in the range of 0-5000 rpm. This
Resistor R11 is used to cut down on range has the advantage of not requir-
1965 Spring Edition 13
 0+12VDC
00- 20 VI
TO AUTO
Ri IGNITION
4.7K SWITCH

01
CALIBRATION 2N292
POINT

TO
POINTS RI
3.3K

RII
CI e2n
o.22yf. 3W

GNDO

BI B2

TO No. of Cylinders
CALIBRATION
POINT "A' 4 6 8
C3 in A. for
110
VAC 2-cycle engine 0.33 0.22 0.15
TO
C3 in A. for
GROUND 4-cycle engine 0.68 0.47 0.33

In this circuit capacitor C3 is discharged through unijunction transistor Q2. Charging up

C3 depends upon the type of engine (2- or 4 -cycle) and the number of cylinders. Select a
value for C3 from the table above to match the engine. Calibration is accomplished by con-
necting 6.3 volts a.c. between ground and point "A". Potentiometer R9 is adjusted so that a
reading of 900 rpm is obtained. The scale is linear; only one calibration point is needed.

PARTS LIST "A" at the junction of R2 and R5. Ad-

C1 -0.22-µf. Mylar capacitor 1
just R9 to read 900 rpm, and the re-
C2 -0.047-µI. Mylar capacitor mainder of the linear scale will fall into
C3-See table above
D1 -8.2 -volt, 1 -watt zener diode (General El(c- line.
tric X-11 Kit) 1 Calibration can also be done at your
11, I2-No. 328 midget bulb (G.E. or equiva-
lent) 1 local service station or garage by tying
1Í1 -500 -microampere [Link]-see text 1 the X -Line Tach in parallel with a ta-
Q1 -2N292 transistor (G.E. or equivalent) 1 chometer of known accuracy.
Q2-Unijunction transistor (G.E. X-10 Kit)
R1-3300 ohms The X -Line Tachometer was used for
R2, R5, R8-1000 ohms All resistors
¡I
1 several months in conjunction with a
R3-4700 ohms watt unless
R4-3900 ohms i
otherwise
special transistorized ignition system
R6-100 ohms
stated which appeared in the June, 1963, is-
R7-470 ohms
R9 -2500 -ohm potentiometer sue of POPULAR ELECTRONICS. It had
R10-330 ohms, 1 watt no adverse effect on the transistor sys-
R11-82 ohms, 3 watts tem. The X-Line Tach can be mounted
T1--6.3-volt filament transformer
Misc.-Cabinet (LMB "Glamor" Type 11'-2A 1 under the dash (as per the lead photo)
used), transistor sockets, Vectorbord, push -in 1 or on the steering column. Use a worm
Vector terminals, wire, solder, etc.
arararammmmm Immune mmmmm-J drive hose clamp (available at most ga-
rages) to hold the cabinet securely. -®-
ing a new meter scale-if a 0-500 /ca.
meter is employed. NOTE: The unijunction transistor is
In any case, the linearity of this cir- mainly responsible for the accuracy of
cuit is such that calibration need only be the X -Line Tach. Once turned on by the
established at one point. The circuit negative pulse at B2, conduction through
above illustrates a simple bench method the emitter to the base 1 path maintains
(provided a 12 -volt d.c. supply is avail- itself, regardless of the recovery of base
able) The output of the filament trans-
. 2, insuring a uniform time period for
former is connected to calibration point charging and discharging C3.
14 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 BONALERT
WHERE TO BUY
SONALERT
Standard Model is SC -628, 6-28
lowest powered signal in the world
VDC. $4.95. AC Models are also
available.

ALLIED ELECTRONICS
Chicago-Western Ave. only
ARROW ELECTRONIC COMPANY
Norwalk, Conn.
W. H. BINTZ COMPANY
Salt Lake City, Utah
- AND SO READILY ADAPTABLE TO A
NUMBER OF INTERESTING, USEFUL
BUSACKER ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT CO., INC.
Houston, Texas
PROJECTS YOU CAN BUILD YOURSELF.
H. L. DALIS, INC.
Long Island City, N. Y. THIS UNIQUE SOLID-STATE DEVICE
DEECO
Cedar Rapids, Iowa REPRESENTS BREAKTHROUGH IN
A
DeMAMBRO ELECTRONICS
Boston & Worcester, Mass. THE SIGNAL -WARNING FIELD. HIGHLY
Providence, R. I.
Manchester, N. H. EFFICIENT, IT NEEDS BUT 3 MILLIAMPS
ELECTRICAL SUPPLIES, INC.
Hartford, Conn. OF CURRENT TO DELIVER AN AUDIBLE
ELECTRONIC PARTS CO., INC.
Albuquerque, N. Mex. OUTPUT SIGNAL OF 65 DECIBELS.
ELECTRONIC SUPPLY, INC.
Huntington, W. Va.
ELECTRONIC WHOLESALERS, INC. SEND FOR NEW
Baltimore, Md.
Melbourne, Ha.
Winston-Salem, N.
PROJECTS BOOKLET
C.
Washington, D. C.
ELMAR ELECTRONICS Recently released, this
Oakland, Calif. highly -readable 24 -page book-
ESSEX ELECTRONICS, INC. let contains ideas, descrip-
Syracuse, N. Y. tions, schematic drawings,
GOPHER ELECTRONICS CO.
parts lists, and construction
St. Paul, Minn. ON AUNT'"
GRAHAM ELECTRONICS SUPPLY, INC.
hints for the use of Sonalert
MCP= .OW SKI.
Indianapolis, Ind. in a number of applications.
GRAYBAR ELECTRIC CO., INC. It was written especially for
New England Hams, Hobbyists, and Experi-
Newark, N. J.
HUGHES -PETERS, INC.
menters ...
as well as for
Columbus & Cincinnati, Ohio Professional Design Engineers.
M -G ELECTRONICS & Sample projects include: Sun or Battery Pow-
EQUIPMENT CO., INC.
Huntsville, Ala. ered CPO ...
Moisture Detector ... Doorway
Annunciator .. - and various Fail -Safe Alarms.
- -
NEWARK ELECTRONICS CORP.
Chicago, III.
Inglewood, Calif. Send 50 cents coins, check, or stamps with your
Denver, Colo. name and address to: Department EH -1, Electropac Inc.,
Detroit, Mich.
Peterborough, New Hampshire. You'll receive your copy
PHILA. ELECTRONICS, INC.
Philadelphia, Pa. of the 24 page Sonalert Projects Booklet by return mail.
PIONEER -STANDARD
ELECTRONICS, INC.
Cleveland, Ohio
RADIO PARTS CO., INC. Sonalert Is A Product Of
Milwaukee, Wis.
ELECTROPAC INC., PETERBOROUGH, N.N.
SREPCO, INC.
Dayton, Ohio A Subsidiary of Computer Control Company
R. V. WEATHERFORD CO.
Glendale, Calif.
CIRCLE NO. 13 ON READER SERVICE CARD
1965 Spring Edition 15
 Cheater
Cord
De luxe
2 1/8"

1_1/8 1/2'
I -T.-3/4111 H r3/8'

1/2" I
J11 J2

TV
2-3/4' CHEATER ACCESSORY
CORD SOCKETS

1-1/2'

If your junk box doesn't con-

tain the parts for the indica-
TOP tor light, buy a preassembled
unit. Extra bright neon bulbs
2 1/8" are available in most radio
3/8" stores for a few cents more.
w-I-I/16"-I I-I/IB 1/2"-4r1-1/fi 1-0-1/2'

T1
7/8" I-5/8"
T7/I8'
Chassis cutouts and drilling
notations are based on use of
Premier PMC-1000 utility box.
I
FRONT BACK

3/8"

THE FAMILIAR TV interlock, which disconnects your set from the ac. line when
you take the back off, can be a nuisance when it comes to servicing. Assuming
that you have a "cheater cord," you often have to scramble around to find a place
to plug it in. And you also have to find an outlet for, say, a soldering iron and a
VTVM. If you're tired of stringing extension cords all over the room, here's a
gadget that will make the job easier. The "Cheater Cord De Luxe" supplies the
TV set with power and has a safety pilot light to indicate when it's on. Two ac-
cessory sockets (JI and J2) not controlled by the switch (21) , take care of your
,

trouble-shooting equipment.
The Cheater Cord De Luxe can be constructed in an aluminum box measuring
23/4"x2%"x15/8" (Premier PMC-1000). You'll need two a.c. accessory sockets
(chassis mount), s.p.s.t. toggle switch, a.c. line cord, and the business end of a
TV cheater cord. The indicator lamp can either be purchased preassembled
(Dialco 95408) or made up from junk box parts using an NE -51 and a 56,000 -ohm
resistor (R1) . Keep in mind that the box will be connected to the 117 -volt a.c.
line and carefully insulate all connections. -James A. Fred
16 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Master Electronics faster with RCA Home Training
NEW, EASY WAY TO BEGIN WITH "AUTOTEXT" PROGRAMMED INSTRUCTION
HERE'S WHAT YOU GETS

40 fascinating
THEORY LESSONS.
40 complete
SERVICE PRACTICES.

Here are all the basic principles of Filled with practical, time -saving,
radio and electronics in easy-to -un- money -saving servicing tips to use
derstand language, fully illustrated! throughout your training!

PLUS ALL THIS AT NO EXTRA COST...

to Meld a Mutthweter. AM
Receiver and Signal Com m-
atar. Kits contain new parts
formperiments,integrated MULTIMETER AM RECEIVER SIGNAL
so as to demonstrate what
A sensitive precision meas-
you learn in the lessons and uring instrument you build Have the satisfaction of
GENERATOR
to help you dove*, tech. and use on the job. Big building your own AM radio A "must" for aligning and
nice! shills. Each kit is fun 41" meter with 50 micro - with this high quality ti- trouble-shooting receivers.
to put together! Compare amp meter movement. tube superheterodyne set. Build it for your own use.
20,000 ohms -per -volt sensi- Big 5" speaker, fine tone! 170 KC to 50 MC funda
what RCA gives you with
tivity d -c, 6,667 a -c. mental frequencies for all
any other school! radio and TV work.

Begin your training the faster, easier way with new "Auto- Complete selection of Home Training Courses to choose
text" programmed instruction. You learn almost automati- from: TV Servicing Color TV Transistors Communica-
cally-and go on to advanced training sooner than you ever tions Electronics FCC License Preparation Mobile Com-
thought possible! Practical work with the very first lesson. munications Automation Electronics Digital Techniques
Liberal Tuition Plan. Pay only as you learn. No long term Nuclear Instrumentation Automatic Controls Industrial
contracts to sign! No monthly installments required! Applications Drafting Computer Programming.

CLASSROOM TRAINING ALSO AVAILABLE Send postcard for freeillustrated book today!
Specify home training or classroom training!
RCA Institutes Resident School in New York City offers
training that will prepare you to work in rewarding po-
sitions in fields such as automation, communications, RCA INSTITUTES, INC., Dept. EE -15
television, computers, and other industrial and advanced 350 West 4th St., New York 14, N. Y.
electronic applications. You are eligible even if you
haven't completed high school. Check Classroom training
and information will be rushed to you. THE MOST TRUSTED NAME
IN ELECTRONICS

CIRCLE NO. 33 ON READER SERVICE CARD

1965 Spring Edition 19

FREE ! ...Send Today
World's
Largest
HEATHKIT 1955 Electronic
Kit
Catalog

Save 50% on:

Electronic Organs
Color TV
Stereo/Hi-Fi
Shortwave
Automotive
Amateur Radio
Citizen's Band
Education
over250 electronic Nits- Photography
world's largest selection
Lab & Test

Marine
Over 250 Easy -To -Build Kits
Over 250 ways to add better quality HEATH COMPANY, Dept. 110-2
and more fun to your hobby or pro- Benton Harbor, Michigan 49023
In Canada: Daystrom, Ltd., Cooksville, Ontario
fession ...
and save up to 50%! Con-
Please send Free 1965 Heathkit Catalog.
venient time -payment plan. Free help
from our technical correspondents. Name
(Please Print)
Find out why Heath is the world's Address
largest manufacturer of quality elec-
City State Zip
tronic kits. Send for your FREE 1965
Prices d specifications subject to change .sithout notice. CL -202
Heathkit Catalog now!
CIRCLE NO. 18 ON READER SERVICE CARD
20 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 )(LINE CHARGER
Advanced design using silicon -controlled
rectifiers permits automatic operation

THE DEMANDS upon the lead -acid battery in the American auto-
mobile are ever-increasing. In wintertime, the ampere -hour ca-
pacity is reduced by freezing temperatures. Summertime woes include
more frequent short trips, more use of radio equipment, and last-
but not least-the electrical requirements of air conditioning. Re-
charging the battery with a typical generator setup is usually not
enough for year-round trouble -free battery performance.
Electronics experimenters are aware of the good and bad things
about battery chargers. Low-cost, low -amperage chargers selling for
around $5 are sometimes helpful-if you want to wait five to ten
times as long as necessary for the battery to recharge. Higher -am-
perage chargers (3-6 amps) are 'better built, but must be watched

By OLIVER P. FERRELL
Ec for

1965 Spring Edition 21

 High -amperage silicon rectifiers Dl and D2
are mounted side by side on a Delco heat
sink. Steatite stand-off insulators electri-
cally isolate heat sink from metal cabinet.

Above and below open-end chassis views

show location of various components.
Chassis is assembled after heat sinks and
transformer have been attached to box.
Leave sufficient wire length for connection
to a.c. line, transformer, and heat sinks.

Charger automatically turns itself off.

No relays are used in the circuit of
closely since only the most expensive the X-Line Charger; instead, it is built
models have provisions to eliminate the around silicon -controlled rectifiers now
hazards of overcharging. Leave a high - offered at moderate prices by the Gen-
amperage charger connected to the bat- eral Electric Company. These SCR's-
tery for too long and either the electro- and other semiconductors-are sold in
lyte boils away, or the plates start to numerous radio stores as the GE "Ex-
warp. perimenter Line."
If you have been plagued with any of The basic circuit of the charger was
the above problems, you need the "X - obtained from the GE "Hobby Manual."
Line Charger." This is an all -electronic Cost of building this project will vary
gadget that is set up once for your op- between $25 and $45-depending upon
timum battery charge. It need never be refinements and whether or not the
set again. When connected to the car charging rate is metered.
battery, it senses the battery's condition. How It Works. The circuit surrounding
If it is low and needs a charge, the X - transformer T1 and rectifiers D1 and D2
Line Charger automatically goes into is that of a full -wave rectifier. Con-
operation. As the charge level comes up, nected to the primary of T1 is a fuse,
the charging rate goes down. When the switch, neon pilot light indicator, and
preset level has been reached, the X -Line Thyrector (F1, S1, I1, and D4, respec-
22 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Transformer is bolted to bottom of box.
Rectifier heat sink is at left and heat
sink for SCR1 is attached to the side.
Prior to attaching the back panel, the
completed X -Line Charger looks like this.

tively) Any one-or all-of these com-

. off-preventing further battery charg-
ponents may be eliminated from your ing.
working model-depending upon the Construction. All components can be
conditions under which your X -Line made to fit comfortably into a 6" x 9"
Charger will be operating. Thyrector D4 x 5" box. A Premier gray hammertone
is a special semiconductor consisting of Model PAC -695 suited these require-
two selenium diodes mounted back to ments. Four rubber feet were attached
back. Rated at 120 volts, D4 protects to one 6" x 5" end of the box. A metal
the solid-state rectifiers in the charger handle salvaged from the junk box was
from harmful a.c. power line surges. affixed to the opposite end. The box now
Heavy-duty SCR1 is operated as a rests so that both the front and rear
switch in series with the battery and panels (9" x 5") are removable.
rectifiers. A positive -voltage gating sig- A drawing of the cutout dimensions
nal to turn on SCR1 comes from SCR2 for a front panel is shown on the next
through R3 and D5. The gating signal to page. Sufficient room is left near the top
turn on and off light -duty SCR2 is estab- of the panel to mount any 0-10 ampere
lished by the battery voltage according meter, although the cutout shown is for
to the setting of RI and the charge held an edgewise Simpson Model 1502 meter.
by capacitor Cl. As the battery voltage Mounted in the three holes below the
rises and the charge of Cl increases, meter are Si, R1, and 11 (from left to
zener diode D3 conducts, turning on right). Near the bottom are two holes
SCR2. Since R2, R3, and SCR2 are all on W' centers for heavy-duty binding
in series, a voltage divider is formed; posts. Attached to the front panel is a
and when current flows through this cir- small open-end chassis used to mount
cuit, the gate of SCR1 cannot receive a some of the small components. Trans-
positive signal and is therefore turned former T1 is bolted to the bottom of the
1965 Spring Edition 23
 -.-I-3/18' 2 9/16" I. 1 3/16"--.-

Front panel dimen-

sions are those of a
Premier PAC -695 alu-
minum box. An oblong
cutout near top of
panel is for an edge-
wise Simpson meter.
Any round or square
meter can be mounted 5/16"-+-1 5/18 -r---I 3/16"
in this position by ad-
justing the necessary
cutout size. See text
for data on three holes
directly below meter.
DIA / DIA / I
DIA

Holes near bottom are

for heavy-duty output
lead binding posts.

1/2"/
DIA DIA

*#28 DRILL *#33 DRILL

I -I/8"
I 7/8" I I/B'-.

Small open-end chas- ---- I-3/4" 2 3/8"

I-1/16"

(1a,r
I

sis holds socket for

SCR2 and other mis-
cellaneous compo-

t
7/18'DIA 3/4"
nents. Hole in lower
right corner is grom-
meted to pass leads
3/8"DIA
above and below chas-
I-1/16"
sis deck. Two holes in
lip align with holes in
panel for rigidity when
assembly is complete. I 7/8" - I I/4' --r-
4 I/8'

-*-1-I/8'

1/12"

44 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 C1 -100-µf., 25 -volt capacitor
DI, D2 -15 -amp., 50 -volt silicon rectifier (GE
X-4 Kit)
D3 -8.2 -volt, 1 -watt zener diode (GE X-11 Kit)
D4-Transient voltage suppressor (GE Thyrec-
tor Type 6RS2OSP4B4)
D5 -100 -volt, 600 -ma. silicon rectifier (GE Type
1N1692 or equivalent)
F1 -2 -amp. fuse
11 -120 -volt neon indicator light (Calrad N.P.L.
or equivalent)
M1-0-10 amp. meter (Simpson 1502 or equiv.)
R1-500 -ohm, 2 -watt linear scale potentiometer
(Ohmite CU -5011 or equivalent)
R2, R3-27 -ohm, 3 -watt resistor
BATTERY R4 -1000 -ohm, %-watt resistor
UNDER
CHARGE R5-47 -ohm, 2 -watt resistor
S1-S.p.s.t. toggle switch
SCR1-Silicon-controlled rectifier (GE X-3 Kit)
SCR2-Silicon-controlled rectifier (GE X-5 Kit)
T1-Power transformer: primary, 117 volts a.c.;
secondary, 24 volts, CT (Triad F41X or equiv-
alent)
Misc.-Cabinet (Premier PAC -695), heat sinks.
Schematic diagram and parts handle, rubber feet, binding posts, stand-off
list for the X -Line Charger. insulators, fuse holder, line cord, etc.

at these points. The sink retaining

D1 -D2 is electrically isolated from the
box by Steatite stand-off insulators.
Cathode connection to D1 -D2 is made to
a soldering lug that also serves to hold
the sink to the insulator. An insulator
manufactured by E. F. Johnson (Type
501) works well in this application. Con-
trolled rectifier SCR1 is electrically iso-
lated from its heat sink, but it is also
held away from the aluminum box with
stand-off insulators (Type 500). A lead
is soldered to the anode before mount-
ing the sink to the box wall.
Wiring of the X -Line Charger is not
difficult as long as the polarities of the
diodes and SCR's are observed. Details
on mounting and wiring SCR1 are in-
cluded in the GE "Experimenter Line"
X-3 package.
Operation. After double-checking your
wiring, bench-test your X -Line Charger
by inserting a high -wattage, very low
ohm wire -wound resistor across the out-
put terminals. Read the output amper-
age-a 3 -ohm resistor should give a
reading of about 4 amperes.
X -Une Charger has clean-cut appearance. Although
Now make sure your car battery is
not visible in photos, two screened 3/4" holes are fully charged by measuring the specific
cut in the bottom and back panel for ventilation. gravity. Connect the charger to the bat-
tery and rotate R1 until the meter reads
zero. Turn on the bright headlights and
box with 8-32 machine screws and bolts. see if the charger operates. Turn off the
Two heat sinks are required for the headlights and the charging rate should
mounting of D1 -D2 and SCR1. Almost
any sink of reasonable size can be used
slowly taper off and gradually return
the meter to a zero reading. --
1965 Spring Edition 25
 Build This Automatic
This caution light turns itself THE HOME OWNER will find many
uses for this automatically operating
on at dusk and off at dawn safety flasher. It can warn of an open
ditch or hole, attract the attention of
a taxi driver or doctor arriving at night,
or serve as a beacon to point the way
for after -dinner guests. And you can
take it on trips as a safety accessory
in case of highway breakdowns.
The handy part about this flasher is
that it may be left unattended. As sky
lighting decreases, it is sensed by photo-
cell PC1, and the flasher automatically
goes into operation. When the photocell
is again illuminated, Q1 is biased to cut-
off by the action of PC1, causing the
flasher to stop operating.
Construction. The safety flasher is
easily assembled from inexpensive com-
ponents and housed in a standard alumi-
num box. The 6 -volt battery drain is so
low that the battery can be attached to
the flasher through plug PL1, eliminat-
ing an on -off switch. The battery plug

If other transistors are substituted for Q1 and

Q2, different values of R2 and R3 may be needed.

26 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

Safety Flasher By LOU GARNER

is affixed to the edge of a small perfo- Experiment with the value of R3

rated Bakelite subchassis. This insulated for optimum performance, or, as an al-
chassis holds all of the components. The ternative, use a 100,000 -ohm potentiom-
transistor sockets are wedged into place eter in place of this bias resistor. The
through holes cut in the Bakelite and flashing rate can be adjusted by chang-
the leads are arranged to support the ing the value of Cl; use smaller values
rest of the circuit. for a faster rate. Keep in mind that the
Neither lead dress nor layout is crit- light will not appear as bright as a
ical. The transistors could be wedged into continuously lit bulb-the flasher applies
the Bakelite chassis and the leads per- current to the bulb in short pulses and
manently soldered into place. However, the light output is accordingly some-
if you do this, be sure to use a heat sink what lower. -®-
to prevent accidental heat damage. Re-
gardless of the layout used, cut a hole
in the aluminum box to permit light to PARTS LIST
shine on PC1. C1 -30-µf., 10-volt electrolytic capacitor
Modifications. Some builders may pre- I1-#47 pilot lamp
PC1-B2111 photocell (International Rectifier)
fer to construct a larger unit with four I'Ll-Battery plug for Burgess F41'1 battery
flashlight D cells in series. This design QI -2N229 upn transistor (Sylvania)
Q2 -2N187 pup transistor (General Electric)
would require an on -off switch, since R1 -1200 -ohm, V, -watt resistor
without it the flasher would turn itself R2 -470 -ohm, ?i -watt resistor
on when stored in darkness. The unit R3-47,000 -ohm, X,, -watt resistor
Alisc.-Small aluminum box, clearance light as-
shown here can be stored just by un- sembly and bracket, transistor sockets, lantern -
plugging the battery. type battery (Burgess F4P1), Bakelite chassis
-see text, screws and nuts, wire, solder, etc.

Don't forget the hole in the chassis to let in

daylight on the B2M self-generating photocell.

1965 Spring Edition 27

 EXTERMINATE TV

/7-

Get rid of these pests that make

k.®
:
f
s
.;,;,Itedifeb.11111.

7r..

your radio reception miserable

By WILLIAM I. ORR, W6SAI

ARE YOU plagued by TV "sync -bugs ?" the dial; check to see if it's your TV set
Many amateurs and SWL's hear this you're hearing by turning it on and off.
persistent nuisance, which is threaten- TV Set Radiation. Sync -bugs can reach
ing to make a shambles of the radio your receiver in three different ways :

spectrum, as rough, unstable signals they can be radiated by the TV lead-in

found at close points across the dials and antenna system, they can travel
of their short-wave receivers. down the power cord and into the a.c.
Sync -bugs creep across the bands with line to be "piped" to your receiver, or
a slow, measured tread, uncanny in their they can be radiated directly by the
instinct for squatting directly atop the wiring of the TV set. Since you can't
signal you're trying to listen to. The eliminate the source of the radiation
broadcast listener hears them in the (without, that is, eliminating your TV
form of "birdies" and "whistles" across viewing) the answer is to prevent the
,

the dial that turn Toscanini and Fabian interference from being radiated be-
into a cacophony of howls and catcalls. yond the immediate vicinity of the set.
Where do these "insects" come from? The first step is to effectively trap
The truth of the matter is that they are the sync -bugs that are radiated by the
generated by a nearby TV set ( which antenna system of the television re-
is probably operating quite normally). ceiver. This can be accomplished by
The 15 kc. horizontal oscillator, which shunting the radiations to ground (the
possesses about as much stability as chassis) while permitting the TV signals
a hundred -foot antenna mast made to pass down the antenna to the set
of "two-by-four's," generates powerful without appreciable attenuation. A sim-
pulses of energy rich in harmonics which ple linear trap made of a length of
can be radiated for hundreds of yards. 300 -ohm TV "ribbon" lead-in affixed to
You can identify the sync -bugs by the the antenna terminals will do the job.
fact that they appear every 15 kc. across To make the trap, cut a length of
28 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
SYNC -BUG INTERFERENCE
ANT.
TERMINALS

300 -ohm line 25" long. Strip 11/2" of

insulation from each end and tin the
leads; twist the wires at one end to-
gether. Connect a .01 µf. capacitor be-
tween the twisted ends of the stub and 22" OF 3001E
TV LEAD-IN
TV chassis ground, as shown in Fig. 1.
When you're dealing with antennas and
tuned stubs, much of the work has to be .Olyf.
"cut and try." Sometimes one problem is I000V
CERAMIC DISC
solved only to have another crop up. SOLDER
LEADS
CAPACITOR
Check to see if all channels are coming TOGETHER TO TV
in properly after you have hooked up the CHASSIS GROUND

stub. If all but one or possibly two Fig. 1. Simple trap for eliminat-
channels work well, you may want to add ing sync -bugs from antenna sys-
a low -loss switch to disconnect the stub tem consists of 22" of TV lead-in
and a .01 A. bypass capacitor.
when viewing the troublesome channel.
Wiring and Power Line Problems. The
next step is to prevent unwanted sync- INTERLOCK
bugs from reaching your receiver via SOLDER
OR BOLT AC CORD
the a.c. cord of the TV set and the TO TV
CHASSIS AC TOS
house wiring. To block this exit from the 1 SET
set, two .01 µf., 1000 -volt ceramic ca- .Olp
pacitors are placed across the a.c. line to
.

l000V
CERAMIC DISC
ground at the point where the line leaves CAPACITOR (I0F 21
the TV chassis. With most TV sets, the Fig. 2. Radiation into power line
power connection is made through a can be cured by bypassing to
simple interlock mounted at the rear. ground (the chassis) both sides
It may be possible to solder the capaci- of the a.c. line with capacitors.
tor leads to the back of the plug pins
(see Fig. 2 ) , or a bit of insulation can
be removed from the power wires and WIRES TO
PICTURE
the leads soldered to them. Tape the TUBE

wires securely. Solder or bolt the other

two capacitor leads to the chassis.
Radiation is especially apt to take WRAP WIRES WITH
ELECTRICAL TAPE
place from the wires running from the AND COVER WITH
ALUMINUM FOIL
chassis to the socket of the picture tube.
The cure for this problem is a simple GROUND FOIL
TO CHASSIS
shield made from heavy aluminum foil,
such as "Reynolds Wrap." Form the Fig. 3. To stop the set's wiring
from radiating, shield the wires
wires into a bundle, and wrap them with running from the chassis to the
a covering of electrical tape. Trim the picture tube socket; see text.
foil to size and carefully wrap it over
the tape. Smooth the foil and form the
rough edges back on themselves until The results of all this ? In the author's
the wires are substantially shielded. Do case, the sync -bugs almost vanished, go-
not shield the high voltage lead going ing from S9 to S3 in strength on 80
to the bulb of the picture tube. Finally, meters. On an a.c.-d.c. receiver, the sync-
wrap several turns of wire around the bugs had almost obliterated a local sta-
foil, twist it tight, and connect the other tion; after "exterminating" them, they
end to the chassis. were unnoticeable. --{0 -

1965 Spring Edition 29

42.. PICKUP

It's a combination
recording pickup,
oscillator, and
tachometer-for
less than $2!
Two types of pickups are shown above. To couple to
a radio, simply place a pickup in the strong inductive
field of the speaker or the audio output transformer.

ONE OF THE MOST fascinating and inductive field it is in, and is quite
useful electronic gadgets in existence low when used to pick up telephone con-
consists, quite simply, of several thou- versations. However, almost any ampli-
sand turns of fine wire enclosed in a fier or tape recorder has sufficient gain
small plastic shell. Its price is low- to produce a good output. (Be sure to
under $2. What is this miracle item? check federal, state, and telephone com-
As the illustrations reveal, it's the tele- pany regulations before recording tele-
phone pickup. phone conversations; in many cases, it
This flexible pickup can be used to is illegal.)
make "clean" tape recordings from your The impedance of the pickup is several
radio or phonograph without any wiring thousand ohms, and it can be connected
changes or other alterations, to con- directly to a hi-fi amplifier or simple
struct an inexpensive meter -readout transistor amplifier for group listening
tachometer, or an audible code -practice to long-distance family calls or business
oscillator. "conference" calls. The Lafayette Radio
Two types of pickups are shown in the 99 G 9042 transistor amplifier ($4.95)
photographs-one is the flat, rectangular will provide sufficient gain with the
type which can be placed on top of a unit pickup (100 mw.) to drive a speaker. If
or under a telephone (Lafayette Radio you have a tape recorder with a "moni-
28 G 0901 at $1.95 is one of these) . The tor" function, it can also be used.
other kind of pickup is in the form of Tape Recording Techniques. Since the
a small cylinder with a suction cup at- pickup is really nothing more than an
tached to one end (Allied Radio 58R297 "inductive sensor," why not use it to
at $1.50) . "sense" the inductive field of a speaker
Basic Uses. When a pickup is mounted coil? This is very easy to do: The
on a receiver end of a telephone hand- speaker field is so strong that it's not
set (or, if its the flat type, placed even necessary for the pickup to be in
underneath) it picks up the telephone
, close proximity-the speaker grille of a
signals by induction. The output of the radio or phonograph is usually close
pickup depends on the strength of the enough.
30 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
PRANKS By Fred Blechman,

A tachometer based on a pickup is easy to construct Flat type pickups can be placed under a telephone
following the information in the text. Either the rela- as above. By connecting the pickup to an amplifier,
tive or-with calibration-actual rpm can be read. you can monitor family, business conference calls.

Just place the pickup against the MAGNET

N S
PICKUP
SHIELDED
A circuit for reading
speaker grille, plug the cable into the relative rpm is shown
microphone jack of the recorder, and ad- PICKUP
+
IN34A
RI
ESK
ISEE TESTI
at the left. A signal
just speaker and recorder volume as de- is picked up from ro-
tating magnets on the
sired. Unlike a microphone, the pickup engine or the motor.
will not record speaker distortion and
room noise; this setup also allows you
to monitor while recording. OSCILLOSCOPE
The "Induc-Tach." It is very often AUDIO GENERATOR

desirable to know the speed of a motor

or engine. "Go-Kart," quarter -midget
racer, and hot -rod competitors, for ex-
ample, need a means of determining
MAGNET
whether a given engine modification re- IN SI

sults in higher engine speed or acceler- TO METER CIRCUIT

ation. The pickup, especially with mag- CCCCCC
neto -operated engines, provides a simple, PICKUP

inexpensive way to read relative engine A pickup tachometer can be calibrated with an oscil-
rpm, and, with a little extra trouble, can loscope and audio generator. With a bit of work, a
meter scale can be drawn which shows actual rpm.
be calibrated to read actual rpm.
The photo above shows a pickup at-
tached to a lawn mower magneto engine and the value of the potentiometer (R1).
in such a position that the magnets on For slow speeds and small magnets,
the flywheel pass by the pickup on each R1 may not be needed. If required,
revolution. Relative rpm can be read by R1 should be adjusted to full scale at
connecting a diode rectifier, potenti- maximum rpm; it can be replaced with a
ometer, and 0-1 ma. meter as shown in fixed, '/-watt resistor if desired.
the schematic. The reading will depend For spark engines or motors, it is
on meter sensitivity, magnet strength, necessary to place a magnet on the shaft
pickup proximity and orientation, rpm, (Continued on page 156)
1965 Spring Edition 31
 DO you want more sound and greater
sensitivity from your pocket tran-
sistor radio ? Here is a simple and rela-
tively inexpensive way to get both.
As shown in the photos, a 6" PM
speaker is mounted in a homemade wood
and compo-board baffle box measuring
10" x 8" x 3". Approximately 80 feet
of #26 wire is close -wound around the
outside of the box and, when connected
across a 365 -pf. variable capacitor, gives
you a tunable loop.
In operation, your small transistor
radio is clamped to the outside of the box
so that the receiver's loopstick anten-
na parallels the loop on the box. First,
tune in a weak distant station and then
turn the radio and box in the direction
of the station for the loudest signal.
Next, tune the large loop for maximum
boost. And finally, plug the 6" speaker
into the radio's jack (the earphone
n...::
,:..:; jack).
If you want to use a larger box, wind

BOOST fewer loop turns; for a smaller box,

wind more. The right number of turns
for the 365 -pf. capacitor can best be
determined by experiment.

BOX The "clamp" used to hold the tran-

sistor radio to the side of the box is
easy to make and can be fastened with
tacks or staples. Some transistor radios
have their loopsticks mounted vertically ;

if this is the case with yours, design the

holder so that the radio mounts hori-
zontally on its side.
Get better tone When not being used as a booster,
your "box" can serve as a test-bench
speaker or an extension radio speaker.
and more sensitivity from Or, if you connect a 1N34A germanium
diode and a pair of high -impedance
headphones in series across the variable
your six -transistor capacitor, you'll have a crystal set for
tuning in local stations-or a hi-fi tuner
for AM. You can probably think of other
pocket radio receiver uses as well.

By ART TRAUFFER

32 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 THE WRITER USED DIME STORE
BRAIDED LEATHER FOR HANDLE.
PASSED THROUGH TWO HOLES
AND TACKED TO INSIDE OF
WOOD BOX

WOOD BOX IS 10" HIGH ,

8"WIDE, 3 DEEP 6 PM SPEAKER.

MOUNTED OVER 51/4"
HOLE IN PANEL
MINIATURE PLUG AND
75 -OHM TWIN -LEAD
CONNECTS TO 2 -TERMINAL MOUNT SPEAKER WITH
STRIP FOUR 8-32 BY I/2" FLAT-
HEAD MACHINE SCREWS,
ONE END OF ELASTIC BAND WITH NUTS TO FIT.
IS TACKED TO INSIDE COUNTERSINK HOLES ON
OF FRAME FRONT OF PANEL

ENDS OF LOOP PASS THROUGH

SMALL HOLES TO LUGS ON
VARIABLE CAPACITOR 365 FF VARIABLE 2 -TERMINAL STRIP.
CAPACITOR MOUNTED WITH TWO
SMALL METAL ANGLES
SCREW -FASTENED TO
INSIDE OF FRAME

-tom----LOOP ANTENNA IS 20 TURNS OF *26 ENAMELLED

COTTON -COVERED COPPER WIRE WOUND AROUND
OUTSIDE OF BOX AND COVERED WITH BROWN
CONTACT PLASTIC MATERIAL

GRILLE CLOTH IS BROWN LADIES HANDKERCHIEF

COVERING ENTIRE FRONT

MOUNT SMALL
RUBBER TACK BUMPER
ON EACH CORNER ON
BOTTOM OF BOX

TUNING KNOB

SMALL SCREW -EYE

HOOK BENT FROM SMALL FINISHING NAIL

STRIPS OF "NON -SKID" UNDER -THE -RUG

RUBBER MATERIAL CEMENTED TO SIDE
OF BOX

6" LENGTH OF 1/2 WIDE

ELASTIC BAND

1965 Spring Edition 33

 Build a Telephone Beeper
The law says you must put an audible tone on the line when you record

a phone call-here's an inexpensive gadget that does the trick for you

By FRED BLECHMAN, K6UGT

SINCE the introduction of inexpensive tape recorders and inductive

pickups, the practice of recording telephone conversations has
become widespread. In business or private life, it often saves the
day for people who can't take shorthand, permitting them to tran-
scribe the important facts of the conversation at their own pace
later on. But there's a catch: An FCC Order issued May 20, 1948,
directed that an audible tone signal must be sent over the line at
least once every 15 seconds on calls that cross a state or national
boundary when a conversation is being recorded. Not long there-
after, most telephone companies filed new tariff regulations with
the Public Service Commissions of the various states, imposing the
same requirement for calls within state boundaries. And when these
regulations were approved, they acquired the force of law.
You can equip yourself to comply with this requirement by build-
ing the "Telephone Beeper." The outlay is modest (around $8.00),
and the unit is small, self-contained, and requires no electrical con-
nection to the telephone. This latter point is of some importance,
since telephone companies are understandably touchy about having
unauthorized devices connected to their equipment.
Many tone signal units in commercially available equipment are
34 CIRCLE NO. 2 ON READER SERVICE CARD -Ì
Induction pickup for recorder is at-
tached to earpiece. Clip holds Tele-
phone Beeper to mouthpiece as shown.

inductively coupled to the telephone ear- level as it is heard at the other end of
piece. This usually results in a very the line.
loud BEEP on the recording, but a rath- As for forgetting to shut off the unit,
er low-level tone at the other party's end. its continued beeping after you've hung
In fact, to make the tone audible at up the phone will be an unfailing re-
the distant end, it may be necessary to minder to you to do so.
raise the beep to such a level that some The photograph on page 34 shows how
incoming words are smothered on the the Beeper is mounted and used. The
recording. device contains an oscillator, speaker,
In addition, it's easy to forget to and a timing circuit, along with two
turn off some units, since only the posi- 9 -volt transistor batteries for power. It
tion of the power switch indicates the is held in position adjacent to the mouth-
"on" or "off" condition of the tone sig- piece by a retaining clip made of piano
naler. wire. It does not interfere with normal
What the "Beeper" Does. The Telephone use of the telephone, and may be left
Beeper overcomes all of the above dis- permanently in place.
advantages neatly and simply. The tone How It Works. The simple circuit that
signal itself is an audible "beep" emitted generates and times the beeps is shown
from a miniature loudspeaker positioned in the schematic on the next page. Tran-
so that the sound enters the telephone sistor Q1 is a unijunction type, which is
transmitter (microphone) acoustically, energized by the two 9 -volt batteries in
along with the voice of the user. Thus, series. When switch S1 is closed, capaci-
there's no need for any electrical cou- tors Cl and C2 are charged through re-
pling or connection to the phone. sistor Rl. When the voltage at the emit-
The signal is also coupled to the re- ter of QI reaches a certain value, Cl and
cording pickup on the earpiece via the C2 discharge through resistors R4 and
sidetone path provided between mouth- R5, and the emitter-base 1 junction of
piece and earpiece within the telephone Ql. The resulting positive voltage at
circuit itself. It is this sidetone circuit the junction of R4 and R5 provides con-
that allows you to hear your voice in the ductive bias for oscillator transistor
earpiece when you speak, and of course Q2. Feedback for oscillation is obtained
it carries the sound of the Beeper just through the center -tapped primary of
as well. Because of this arrangement, transformer Ti, which also couples the
the Beeper is recorded at about the same oscillator output to the speaker. Variable
1965 Spring Edition 37
 resistor R2 controls the oscillation fre-
quency.
This circuit is somewhat critical, so
you must use the parts specified for
transformer T1 and transistor Ql. Tran-
sistor Q2 may be just about any in-
expensive pnp germanium transistor
(CK722, 2N107, etc.) since adjustment
of R2 will compensate for any difference
between specific transistors. Potentiom-
eter R2 is the smallest unit available.
(Continued on page 162)

Contoured block of sponge

material fits phone shape,
secures Beeper in position.

Parts placement isn't criti-

cal. Author's layout shown
here permits easy assembly.

Simplicity of basic circuit

is clear in schematic. Only
critical parts are Tl, Ql.

PARTS LIST
Bl, B2-9 -volt transistor radio battery Sl-S.p.s.t. slide switch
Cl, C2 -100-µf., 15-volt miniature electrolytic T1*-Output transformer (Lafayette 99-6123 or
Ql*-GE 2N1671 unijunction transistor Philmore ST -32)
Q2-CK722 or 2N107 pop germanium transistor 1-Induction type pickup (Lafayette 99-6197)
R1-82,000 ohms SPKR-13/2"-diameter speaker (Lafayette 99-
R2 -50,000 -ohm subminiature potentiometer (La- 6035)
fayette 99-6142) alternate, 10,000 -ohm unit Misc.-Case (author used plastic box 3x4" x
(Lafayette 99-6144) 2W" x 1,;4"), perforated circuit board, per-
R3-33 ohms all resistors forated aluminum for grille, stiff wire for clip,
R4-100 ohms fixed, foam rubber, battery terminals, etc.
R5-27 ohms %-watt carbon *Do not substitute for these parts

38 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 In the chart on the next page is the
answer to TV's best guarded secret-
\the electronically right length for rab-
bit ears. Measurements to a small
fraction of an inch may seem like
lint -picking if you're entirely
happy about the picture qualify
you are getting by adjusting your
ears "esthetically." If, however,
you're fighting to get a good picture
out of a troublesome channel, exact -
length rabbit ears will improve things.
Measure with a steel tape or that cloth
tape in the sewing basket, starting where
the ears come out of the base. Small
reference scratches can be made on each
ear with a file so that you can quickly

szer
gellAWED
WHEN you took your original rabbit
ears out of the box in which they
came to you, it's almost certain that you
!EWFT -moi

did not find adequate instructions for By LEWIS A. HARLOW

their use. All of the manufacturers of
rabbit ears, having built a very fine prod-
uct, seem to have agreed that you must retune them for best results on any
learn about it the hard way. So, they channel.
tell you nothing, or next to nothing, and Wide or Narrow Ears? There's a catch
your only recourse is to regard the ad- to the problem of adjusting rabbit ears.
justment of your ears as another of the They do not do their best when pointed
"pleasant" mysteries of television. up in a wide or tight V-they should be
Perhaps you have decided, after much extended out to the sides! Unfortunate-
experimenting, that you get best results ly, this introduces a situation which is
with a long ear pointed at Chillicothe, socially impractical, and one which has
Ohio, and a short ear pointed at the an element of danger. An unsuspecting
moon. Now this is all wrong-for several guest may back into a rabbit ear point
dull scientific reasons which can quickly and impale himself upon it.
be passed by. However, since the manip- What happens, you ask, when rabbit
ulation of rabbit ears is quite critical, ears are turned up into a V position ?
producing either (and usually unexpect- How long should they be? The arithmetic
edly) a shocking improvement or de- for this can get very complicated be-
generation in picture quality, a few cause everything changes a little every
helpful comments are in order. time you change the angle of the V.
As on the rabbit, the ears should be In general, when using rabbit ears in
the same length, and if you need utmost this unscientific position, they should be
sensitivity from your antenna, this slightly longer (maybe 10 percent) than
length should be changed every time you the exact figures given for horizontal
switch channels. ears in the chart. They should be as
1965 Spring Edition 39
 one case, 1-9 followed by A, B, and C,
the contribution of the switch is far
more subtle, and the best position can
be found only by "cut -and -try."
Guaranteed Method. Here is a three -
step experiment that will guarantee ab-
solute maximum performance with
switches. Before starting, adjust the ears
to exact length, and provide room to
swing them around. It is necessary to
carry out the steps in the order indi-
cated, since you are dealing with three
variables which are inter-related; if your
method lacks scientific orderliness, your
results will be confusing.
Step One: Set the rabbit ears selector
switch to its lowest position.
Step Two: Swing the ears in a circle
to get the best picture. You are trying
widely spread as possible, and, of course, to do two unrelated things-strengthen
they should be the same length as one the incoming signal and, secondly, elimi-
another. nate "ghosts." If the main signal is
Different Types of Ears. In addition to strong enough so that the rabbit ears
the ordinary, garden-variety rabbit ears,
other types available include exact re- Channel Inches Channel Inches
placements for those built into portable
2 507/8 8 151/2
TV sets (sold through electronics sup-
3 457/e 9 15
ply houses) , and at least a dozen models 10
that include a switching arrangement in 4 413/4 141/2
5 363/8 11 141/8
addition to the basic adjustment of the
ears. These switches, which perform a 6 3334 12 135/8
variety of matching and orienting func- 7 16 13 131/4
tions, may have as few as three posi-
tions or as many as twelve, depending, do not need to be positioned critically
seemingly, upon whim. the ears can then be set to reject ghosts
If the switch positions correspond to A compromise may be necessary.
Channels 2-13, fine. If, however, the Step Three: After obtaining the best
positions are numbered 1-12 or, as in possible results with the above steps,
adjust the TV set's fine tuning control.
Now move the selector switch on the
rabbit ears to its next position, and re-
peat Steps Two and Three. And so on,
ad nauseam.
What About UHF? The standard or do-
mestic rabbit ears (131/4" minimum to
507/s" maximum) are too long for fully
efficient signal collection from the ultra-
high -frequency stations using Channels
14 to 83. Baby rabbit ears should be
about 61/2" in repose and about 12"
fully extended. So far, this miniature
size is not available. You can experi-
ment, though, with your regular ears,
which will do a fairly efficient job at
double these lengths. Twenty-four inches
is about right for Channel 14, and fully
contracted, your rabbit ears can almost
reach the resonance of Channel 83. -31-
40 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 COMING
or
GOING

By ARTHUR J. DAVISON

This photoelectric sensing device not only tells you when

something is passing in front of it-the gadget will also
indicate whether that something is ... coming or going!

MOST "CUSTOMER -ANNOUNCING" SYSTEMS do a fine job of letting a

storekeeper know when someone has passed through his shop door. But
suppose the storekeeper's working in back when the signal sounds. Does
the clerk in front need help with another customer-or has the original
customer gone out the door ?
This interesting photoelectric device will solve the problem very nicely.
Employing twin photocell -and-relay systems, it unfailingly announces the
direction of movement of any person or object breaking an associated
light beam. You can use it to actuate separate "in" and "out" lamps, a
buzzer and bell combination, or whatever else your imagination suggests.
Construction. The components are mounted in a 6" x 6" x 6" utility box
having a built-in chassis. Parts placement is illustrated in the photos
and diagrams but (except for photocells PC1 and PC2) isn't critical and
1965 Spring Edition 41
 If the schematic diagram of the "sensor" looks a trifle
complicated, keep in mind that one side of the circuit
is simply a "mirror image" of the other side (two sep-
arate circuits are required to indicate both "coming"
and "going"). The numbers from 1 to 11 on this diagram
correspond to similar numbers on the two pictorials.

PCI
R4
3.3K
"SENSITIVITY"

SI
DI
2
++i1
R2
30K
5 ^
2 REO
C2A
100pf.
150V
2
POWER' II
CI 2 3
3 302f. PC2
2
150V

2 IOOpf.
117 RI ED
150V
VAC 56K
R5
2 3.3K J2

12

NOT USED

can be varied to suit your own taste. shield is first sawed off, and slots are cut
For the sake of clarity, most of the to clear the shield -retaining bosses on
wiring has been eliminated from the pic- the base. The opening at the other end
torials. The leads or terminals of all im- is slightly enlarged with pliers so that
portant components, however, are keyed it will fit the casing of the photocell
to the schematic diagram by means of snugly.
matching numbers. The spacing of the pin terminals on
When carrying out the wiring, no spe- the photocells specified for PC1 and PC2
cial care need be taken with the lead is such that any pair of opposite contacts
dress all leads may be routed in the most
; on a 9 -pin tube socket will slip over them.
convenient manner. Install rubber grom- This type of socket, then, is used to
mets as shown in the pictorials to pass make the connections to the photocells.
wires through the chassis. Setup and Adjustment. First provide
Photocells PC1 and PC2 are installed yourself with a suitable light source. A
on the box's front panel as shown on 6 -volt, lantern -type flashlight-among
page 44. In order to prevent stray light other things-will do the job. If you use
from affecting the photocells, they are such a flashlight, a 6 -volt filament trans-
Yet back in 21/4" "wells" made from 9 -pin former can be installed in place of the
tube shields. These wells are set far battery. But be sure that the flashlight's
e_ o-igh apart (11%") so that PC1 and reflector is made of metal rather than
PC:?, will operate independently. plastic. It's possible that transformer
Note that the shields are press -fitted heat might warp some plastics.
over shield bases ("see Parts List) which Aim the light beam so that it crosses
have been pushed through holes in the the doorway and strikes PC1 and PC2-
panel. The circular lip at the top of each making sure that the two photocells are
42 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Underside of chassis should look like this
before bulk of wiring is put in place. Lead
dress is not at all critical, and rubber grom-
mets can be used wherever necessary to pass
wires through the chassis. The number "2"
on jacks JI and J2 refers to screw heads.

PARTS LIST -
C'1 -30-µj.,
150 -volt electrolytic capacitor
C2 --Dual 100-µf., 150 -volt electrolytic capacitor
D1--400-PIV, 750-ma. silicon diode illuminated with equal intensity. Then
11-NE-51 neon lamp turn on "power" switch S1. Neon power
JI, J2-Chassis-mounting a.c. outlet
K1, K2 -5000 -ohm plate relay, s.p.d.t. contacts indicator 11 should now glow.
(Potter & Brumfield Series LB -5 or equiva- Move both "sensitivity" controls (R2
lent) and R3) to their maximum -resistance
K3, K4 -5000 -ohm plate relay, 3-p.d.t. contacts
(Guardian "Universal 200" Series; 200-5000 positions. Then turn them in the op-
D coil, 200-M5 contact assembly with one posite direction until the relays they con-
pole unused-or equivalent)
PCI, PC2-Heavy-duty cadmium photocell (La- trol (K1 and K2, respectively) pull in-
fayette 99 G 6316 or equivalent)
21 -56,000 -ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor
and continue for another quarter -turn.
R2, R3 -30,000-ohm potentiometer These settings should be about right, but
R4, R5 -3300-ohm, 2 -watt resistor in the first few hours of operation there
Sl-D.p.s.t, toggle switch may be resistance changes in the photo-
TI-Filament transformer; primary, 117 volts;
secondary, 6.3 volts @ 1.0 amp. (Knight 62 cells calling for further reduction in the
G 030 or equivalent) resistances of R2 and R3.
TS1-4-terminal, barrier -type terminal strip
(Cinch -Jones 4-140 or equivalent) Now all you have to do is connect the
1-6" .r. 6" x 6" utility case with 47/" x 5%" x signaling devices. If the photocell unit
13/4" chassis (Premier CA -1405 or equivalent)
2-Shield bases for 9 -pin miniature tube socket is placed so that people on the way in
(Cinch -Jones 9SB1 or equivalent) will darken PC1 first, connect the "in"
2-2y8" shields for 9-pin miniature tube (Cinch - signals to J1 and/or terminals 1 and 2
Jones 9SJ3-1 or equivalent)
2-9 -pin miniature tube sockets of TS1. The "out" signals are connected
Misc.-Line cord and plug, rubber grommets. to J2 and/or terminals 3 and 4 of TS1.
terminal strips, hardware, wire, etc.
L If people coming in will darken PC2 first,
1965 Spring Edition 43
 ü0 o

KI

Top of chassis is
shown above, with
much of the wir-
ing still to be
done; as in bot- =NC
tom view, num- NC =
N.C.
5
4
bers here match
the numbers on =9 =
7
3

the schematic. At
right is rear view
of the relay used J2
for K3 and K4.

I-1/4' When installing PCI and PC2, prepare identical modified

tube shields for both 1" holes. Remove and discard in-
ternal spring before cutting out slots; coat insides of
FRONT PANEL bases and shields with flat black paint to reduce glare.
MODIFIED 9 -PIN
SHIELD 11 OF 21 TUBE TUBE
BASE SHIELD PHOTOCELL SOCKET

SHIELD -RETAINING
BOSS II OF 2)
2 I/4
-/ ENLARGE DIAMETER
TO FIT PHOTOCELL

The 11/4" hole spacing can be varied slightly if necessary

to permit mounting the innermost screw of each shield
base in the same screw hole; be sure to push out tube
SLOT TO CLEAR socket from shield base so that light can shine through.
SHIELD -RETAINING
BOSS (I OF 2)

44 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 PCI PC2

HOW IT WORKS
The a.c. line voltage is rectified by diode DI
to furnish d.c. for relays KI -K4, and capacitor
Cl filters this d.c. voltage well enough to prevent
chattering. The coils of relays Kl and K2 are
each connected, across the d.c. supply, in series
with a "sensitivity control" and photocell (R2
and PCI, R3 and PC2). II
As long as a light beam strikes the photocells,
their resistances remain low, and R2 and R3
can he adjusted to pass enough current to pull in
Kl and K2, respectively. But if either PCI or
PC2 is darkened, its resistance will immediately
increase, and the current flow will decrease
enough to drop out the appropriate relay.
The photocells are so placed that a person
walking by them, depending on whether he's
coming or going, will darken PCI or PC2 first. R2 SI R3
If PCI is darkened first, Kl drops out and con-
tacts 2 and 3 of that relay close. This connects Front panel of the "sensor" is ex-
capacitor C2a and resistor R4 (through con- tremely symmetrical, with photocells,
tacts 2 and 3 of K4) in series with the coil of pilot lamp, and sensitivity controls
K3 and the d.c. supply. arranged in a neatly balanced fashion.
Current from the supply flows through K3's
coil and R4 to charge C2a, and the charging
current pulls in K3. Since contacts 4 and 5 of K3
have now closed, the 6.3 -volt secondary of trans-
former T1 is connected across terminals and 2
1
then simply reverse these connections.
of terminal strip TS1. In addition, contacts 7 and Remember that outlets JZ and J2
8 of K3 make the a.c. line voltage available
across outlet 11. are for signaling devices (such as illumi-
Though contacts and 2 of K3 also close, this
1
nated "In" and "Out" signs) which op-
accomplishes nothing until photocell PC2 is erate on 117 volts. Six -volt devices (such
darkened. Then K2 drops out, closing its con-
tacts 2 and 3. Accordingly, charging current for as bells, buzzers, etc.) should be con-
capacitor C2b flows (via contacts and 2 of K3)
1 nected to TS1.
through resistor R5 and the coil of K3-helping And there you have it! Chances are
to keep the latter relay pulled in.
If the photocells remain darkened, the charg- you'll stumble across all kinds of inter-
ing currents for C2a and C2b will keep K3 pulled esting applications for this novel alarm.
in for about 3 seconds. Therefore, any electrical For example, let's say you want to count
signaling devices connected to 11 or to terminals
1 and 2 of TSI will operate for that length of the number of objects-people, cars, or
time. Should light hit the photocells before the
three seconds are up (as is usual), Kl and K2
what have you-passing in one direction
will pull in-dropping out K3 and cutting off only; you just plug a suitable counter
the prior signals. Note that capacitors C2a and into either J1 or J2 (depending on
C2b discharge through resistors R4 and R5, re- whether you want to count them "com-
spectively-readying themselves for the next
cycle-when Kl and K2 pull in. ing" or "going") , and your problem is
Should PC2 be darkened first, the reverse situ- solved. Or you can use the gadget to
ation occurs. Relay K2 drops out and K4 is
pulled in by charging current for C2b. Then as
trigger a tape recorder, set up so that it
PC1 is darkened, KI drops out-adding the will give one greeting to people coming
charging current for C2a to that already flowing in and a different message to those going
through K4's coil. The result is that 6 volts ap-
pears across terminals 3 and 4 of TSI and 117 out. Regardless of your specific require-
ments, one thing is certain: thanks to

-
volts appears across 12. As before, these signal
voltages remain available for about 3 seconds- this little photoelectric "sensor," you'll
but will be cut off earlier if light strikes the
photocells. never again have to wonder whether
someone is coming or going!
1965 Spring Edition 45
 You probably thought
top qquality electronic
test instruments
were too expensive ...didn't you?
Well, they're not when you
build them with money-saving RCA kits
You've known right along that you can save money on electronic Specialized instruments such as an AC VTVM or an RF Signal
test instruments by building from kits. Generator, are also available as kits for far less than they would
But you may have shied away from kits because you thought cost otherwise. In every case, RCA kits, when completed, are
they involved complicated calibration or adjustment problems. identical with RCA factory assembled instruments.
Forget it!
RCA kits are inexpensive, of course, but they're also easy to
build. Build them right and they'll give you the best performance
you can buy in their price range.
What's better about RCA test instrument kits?
Ease of assembly is one thing. Parts are clearly identified. Each
assembly diagram appears on the same page as the step-by-step
instructions for that section of assembly. There's no need to refer
back constantly to other pages, which consumes time and in-
creases the chance of error.
Ease of alignment is another thing. Each kit contains complete
Instructions for accurate calibration or alignment of the instru-
ment. Where necessary, precision calibrating resistors are pro-
vided for this purpose.
What does it mean? It means that with RCA kits you can get a
professional V -O -M or VTVM for as little as $29.95*. Or you can
get a good oscilloscope (one of the most useful-but normally Each sub -assembly is described in a separate section with illustrations applying
one of the most expensive-test instruments) for only 579.50'". to that sub-assembly acailable at a glance. No cross referencing necessary.

LOOK WHAT'S AVAILABLE TO YOU IN KIT FORM:

r

RCA VOLTOHMYST®. The most RCA SENIOR VOLTOHMYST. RCA Es. RCA 3lightweight.
htweigCH [Link] RCA [Link] AC VTOM.
popular VTVM on the market. A professional VTVM. One pric instruments.
most useful instruments. pact. li Ki portable. Doubles as audio [Link].
WV.77E(K). Kit price: $29.95' WV-98C,K). Kit price: 557.95 WV38A(K). Kit price: $29.95' WO.33A(N). Kit price: $79.95 WV-76A(K). Kit price: $57.95'

See them all-and get full techni.

cal specifications for each-at your
local Authorized RCA Test Equip-
ment Distributor. Or write for in.
formation to: Commercial Engl.
veering, Section 1411V, RCA ELEC-
TRONIC COMPONENTS AND DE-
VICES, HARRISON, N. J.

RCA RF SIGNAL GENERATOR. For RCA TV BIAS SUPPLY. For RF, IF RCA TRANSISTOR -RADIO DYNAM. RCA 0-0.M DYNAMIC DEMON
audio and TV servicing. alignment in TV Sets. IC DEMONSTRATOR. For schools. STRATUS. A working V.O.M.
WR50A(K). Kit price: $39.95' WG-307B(K). Kit price: $11.95' WE93AIK). Kit price: 559.95 WE.95A(N). Kit price: $37.95'

*Optional Distributor Re- RCA ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS AND DEVICES, HARRISON,N.J.

sale Price. All prices are sub-
ject to change without notice.
Prices may be higher in Alas- The Most Trusted Name in Electronics
ka, Hawaii and the West.

CIRCLE NO. 32 ON READER SERVICE CARD

46 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Largo to
Ì Presto
Metronome

Single -transistor
metronome operates
from house current

By JOHN F. CLEARY*

AMETRONOME can be any contriv- loudspeaker can be driven directly. No

ance for marking time as an aid to output transformer is needed.
musical study and performance. The The circuit can be powered either by
metronome to be described here is one a transformerless supply as shown or by
of the simpler electronic "contrivances" a battery. Beat rate is adjustable from
in that it uses the unique unijunction below 42 beats per minute, a low largo,
transistor to generate precision timing to slightly over 208 beats per minute, a
pulses. In fact, this is the only tran- high presto. Both limits can be extended
sistor used-or for that matter needed simply by changing the emitter com-
-in order to generate a distinct "metro- ponent values.
nomic tick" at the loudspeaker. An ad- Circuit operation centers around the
vantage of using the unijunction, or 2N2160 (you can substitute a 2N2646
UJT as it is often called, is that the if you wish) in a basic unijunction tran-
sistor relaxation circuit. Applying volt-
age across R3, R4, R5, and C2 allows
C2 to charge. Since at the beginning of
*Applications Engineering, Semiconductor Prod-
ucts Dept., General Electric Company the operating cycle the unijunction emit -
1965 Spring Edition 47
METRO NOME rangements can be used. A 22V2 -volt
battery can replace the supply shown.
Lower voltages can be used with de-
creased output and increased calibration
error; in fact the UJT will continue to
ter is reverse -biased and therefore non- operate with as low as 3 volts applied
conducting, a high impedance exists in many instances.
across C2. As C2 continues to charge, Construction. The photos show how the
the emitter voltage increases exponen- unit is constructed with the exception
tially and approaches the supply voltage of the line resistors and three of the
level. At a point determined by the uni - 1N1692 rectifiers, which are all hidden
junction and called the "emitter peak behind the speaker "U" frame. Two
point voltage," the emitter becomes rectifiers are located on either side of
forward -biased and presents a low im- the perforated insulation board for ease
pedance across C2, causing it to "dump" of mounting and wiring. The back of
its charge into base 1 (Bi) through the the speaker frame, as shown, protrudes
speaker voice coil. This results in a dis- through the square hole cut from the
tinct "tick" from the speaker. board and rides on the surrounding lip
"Rate" pot R4 provides for a slow or of the speaker frame. After cutting the
fast beat rate by controlling the charg- board to size (slightly smaller than the
ing time of C2. Frequency is thus deter- over-all speaker measurement), measur-
mined by the combination of R4, C2, ing and cutting out the center opening,
and the supply voltage across the UJT. and mounting all components, the com-
Resistor R3 is selected to set the high pleted board is slipped onto the speaker
beat rate limit while R5 sets the low frame and secured in place with contact
limit. By using a log -taper potentiom- cement. The bracket -supported R4 is
eter for R4, a well-proportioned "rate" then soldered to the speaker frame for
scale can be adjusted to any range de- increased rigidity, as can be seen in the
sired. The photograph on page 47 shows photo showing the inside view of the
a typical 42-208 beats -per-minute metro- unit.
nome scale spread over almost the total A square of grille cloth and a square
270° range of R4. The number of beats of aluminum window screening are cut
for the various tempi employed as cali- about 1" larger than the speaker frame.
bration for the author's metronome are Place the grille cloth on a flat surface,
as follows: the screen on top of it, and the speaker
-cone down-on top of the screen. By
wrapping the excess material around the
BEATS/MINUTE TEMPO BEATS/MINUTE TEMPO edge of the speaker frame, the cone will
42-69 Largo 125-154 Andante be protected from damage. This method
69-98 Larghetto 154-180 Allegro of covering the speaker requires no
98-125 Adagio 180-208 Presto hardware and is self-supporting.
The cabinet shown is made from 3<4"
plywood and measures 21/2" deep x 45/ir,"
Four 1N1692 silicon rectifiers in a square. The back is cut from 1/E" hard-
bridge -rectifier configuration and a 100- board and is glued in place. A shaft hole
µf. filter capacitor make up the power sup- about 3/4" in diameter-large enough to
ply. Fed directly from the a.c. line, this accommodate the shaft and allow the
arrangement supplies the required 25 completed unit to be placed in the box
volts at 4 ma. with sufficient regulation snugly-is then carefully drilled in the
for good metronome stability. Resistors side of the box. An additional power
R1 and R2 act as voltage -dropping re- switch hole is made in the top of the
sistors and add some degree of safety cabinet and a power -line cord hole in
by limiting the total current drain to ap- the back.
proximately 5 ma. under direct short- In the photo showing the internal view
circuit conditions. By housing the cir- of the metronome, note the two thread-
cuit in an insulated box, additional pro- ed holes located on the back of the
tection is obtained against electric shock. speaker "U" frame. Two additional
Naturally, other power supply ar- holes are carefully drilled in the cabinet
48 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 SP K R

RATE
(R41 /` IN1692

PARTS LIST
C1 -100-µf., 50 -volt miniature electrolytic
capacitor
C2 -10-µf., 25 -volt miniature electrolytic
capacitor
Dl, D2, D3, D4 -1N1692 silicon diode
Q1 -2N2160 or 2N2646 unijunction
transistor
R1, R2-12,000 -ohm, V2 -watt resistor
R3-22,000 -ohm, %-watt resistor 2N2160
R4 -150,000 -ohm potentiometer OR
R5 -430,000 -ohm. V2 -watt resistor 2N2646
R6-330 -ohm, V2 -watt resistor
S1-S.p.s.t. switch
Misc.-Small speaker and cabinet-see Components of the metronome are mounted on a
text, perforated phenolic board, flea
clips, a.c. cap, wire, solder, etc. perforated circuit board. The speaker is a square -
framed 31/2" Utah SP358 3-4 ohm unit containing
a 1 -ounce magnet. Any speaker can be used, how-
ever; the higher its efficiency, the louder the tick.

25V D.C. fá14 MA.

B2 2160
2NQI
UNIJUNCTION

12K

back to match these holes which are more difficult at the faster rates. A sec-
then used to hold the speaker securely ond method is to compare the uncali-
in place. brated metronome with a calibrated
Should a battery be used to power the metronome of known accuracy. Both
unit rather than a permanent power sup- methods are sufficiently accurate for
ply, cabinet dimensions must be changed musical purposes.
accordingly. Since wiring is in no way Should a louder "tick" be desired, the
critical, any type of cabinet or compo- unijunction metronome will easily drive
nent arrangement can be employed. an audio amplifier. By replacing the
Calibration. Fairly accurate rate cali- loudspeaker with a 20- or 30 -ohm re-
bration will result by counting "ticks" sistor, positive driving pulses may be
against time. Using a stopwatch or a taken from base 1 (B1). Negative pulses
wristwatch sweep second hand, counting can be taken directly from base 2 (B2)
the number of ticks per 15 seconds and simultaneously, if needed.
multiplying by 4 to obtain the "beat Pulse rate can be changed widely sim-
rate" per minute, will result in accurate ply by replacing R4 and C2. Two to
dial calibration. This method works well three minutes, and more, are possible
for slow to medium beat rates but is between pulses. -C
1965 Spring Edition 49
 DID YOU ever miss an important tele-
phone call because you were work-
Beef up the sound of your ing outdoors or in the garage, or loung-
ing on the patio or porch, where you
phone bell and put it couldn't hear the bell? Most of us have
had this frustrating experience at least
once or twice. One way to avoid it is to
where you can hear it when have the phone company install a loud
outside bell. This is fine, if you need the
you're out at the barbecue outside bell all year round, and if it
won't disturb the neighbors, and if you're
pit or in the garage
always in an area where the bell can be
heard readily.
But that's a lot of "ifs," which for
many families just don't add up to place-
ment of an order with the phone com-
pany. Nevertheless, when the lady of
our house was heard to remark to a
friend, "We heard Radio Australia last

"LOUD -HAILER"
for the TELEPHONE
By DONALD L. WILCOX

50 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 You can duplicate the author's
layout by following the parts
placement shown here. Holes in
chassis allow bell sound to reach
bracket -mounted microphone.

night on the short-wave set, but we can't

hear the phone ring out at the barbecue
pit," it was clear that something had to
be done. It was, and the alternative so-
lution to the remote telephone signal
problem described here is the result.
It involves no monthly service charge
at any time-let alone for those months
when you don't need the bell, doesn't
require any connection to telephone com- SOI SI R8 FI
pany equipment, permits you to put the
bell where you need it, and allows you
to relocate it at any time without in- base current; and the emitter -to -collec-
convenience. Furthermore, you can build tor current is therefore no more than a
the "Loud -Hailer" in a couple of eve- few microamperes leakage. V,'hen the
nings, at a nominal cost of about $18.00, phone bell rings, the amplified micro-
even using all new parts, and you can phone signal drives the base of Q3 nega-
probably halve that by raiding the trusty tive once each cycle, causing the Q3
junk box. collector current to flow in a series of
How It Works. The Loud -Hailer is a d.c. pulses. This output, smoothed by
simple device, made up essentially of a capacitor C6, energizes relay K1, apply-
microphone, audio amplifier, and a relay, ing a.c. power to the remote bell.
energized by a small power supply that Construction. Since the circuit 's ex-
plugs into the house a.c. line. With the tremely non -critical, parts placeme-it
unit in operation, the sound of the tele- and other mechanical details cati be
phone bell is picked up by a microphone, varied to suit the constructor's prefer-
the output from which is amplified to a ence. In the author's unit, most of the
level capable of closing a relay. The re- circuit parts are mounted on a strip of
mote bell is energized by a.c. from the Vectorbord, as shown in the p loto -
line, applied through contacts of the graph. The controls are grouped at one
relay. The remote bell can be mounted end of the metal box. The microphone
outside the house at any suitable point, is mounted in the middle of the box,
or moved about from garden to garage facing a group of drilled holes which
to pool, wherever its extension cord will permit easy entry for the sound of the
reach. phone bell. Wiring is simple and straight-
A look at the schematic diagram will forward, and requires only the normal
clarify details of the circuit function. caution about use of a heat sink when
The first two transistors, Ql and Q2, soldering transistor leads.
operate as Class A amplifiers, boosting Operation. In use, the Loud -Hailer is
the microwatt output of the microphone placed under the phone with the con-
to a level great enough to drive tran- trols at the rear, so the cords to the a.c.
sistor Q3, which operates as a Class B line and the remote bell can be dressed
power detector. out of the way. This brings the micro-
With no sound at the microphone, Q3 phone of the Loud -Hailer cl:rec+ly under
is practically cut off, since there is no the bell of the usual desk -type elephone
1965 Spring Edition 51
 S01

R9
RI R3 RS I20rt
51K 10K 51K

DI
+ CI O C6+ ,z' KI IN2069
250yf.

02
9 IOOI
yf.
03
FI
IA

C2

0 MIc RB
75K 117 VAC
C3 + CS + C7
R2 100yí. R6 100yf. R7 RIO IOOyf.
6.8K 5.6K 470 1.6 K
n

Schematic diagram shows basic simplicity of the Loud -Hailer circuit.

PARTS LIST
C1-25u -µj., 1_'-a °It electrolytic capacitor R10-1600 ohms
C'2, C4- 10 -ii.. s -volt electrolytic capacitor S1-S.p.s.t. toggle switch
C3. C5-100 A.A. 6 volt electrolytic capacitor SOI-A.c. convenience outlet socket
C6, C7 -100-µf., 15 -volt electrolytic capacitor T1-Transistor driver transformer, 10,000 -ohm
D1 -1X2069 silicon diode primary, 2000 -ohm secondary (Lafayette 99 G
Kl-S.p.s.t. relay. 6 -volt, 335 -ohm coil (Potter 6126 or equivalent)
& Brumfield RS5D or equivalent) T2-Filament transformer, 6.3-volt secondary
Q1. Q2, Q3 -2X 1274 germanium transistor (Lafayette 33 G 3702 or equivalent)
R.I. R5-51,000 ohms 1-Alarm-type bell, 115 -volt a.c. (Lafayette 99
R2--6800 ohms -Ill resistors G 9023 or equivalent)
R3-10,000 o:Ims ,-watt carbon 1-5%" x 93/z" x PA" pan -type chassis
R4-1000 ohms unless other- 1 -600 -ohm dynamic microphone (Lafayette
R6 -5600 ohms wise specified 99 G 4527 or equivalent)
R7-470 ohms Alise.-Vertorbord. fuse holder, transistor sock-
R8 -7500 -ohm potentiometer, with shaft lock ets, solder, wire, hardware, etc.
R9-120 ohms

TYPICAL D.C. VOLTAGES

Ql Q2 I Q3 All voltages are measured
Ve -0.90 -0.75 to + side of C7 with high -
I I 0
impedance voltmeter, no in-
Vb -1.00 I -0.85 I 0 put signal to microphone.
Vc -1.30 -10.00 1 -9.6

where sound pickup will be strongest. If you want to use the Loud -Hailer
The extension cord leading to the re- only occasionally, and in different loca-
mote bell is plugged into a.c. outlet SO/, tions, such as the garden, attic, garage,
and gain control potentiometer R8 is or barbecue pit, you may want to keep
adjusted so that an incoming ring causes the extension cord free, to be rerouted
reliable ringing of the remote bell. This as necessary. However, if you intend to
setting can be tested by asking one of use the Loud -Hailer for just one or two
your neighbors to dial your number. remote locations, you may prefer to in-
When correct operation has been ob- stall permanent remote lines and outlets.
tained, locate the remote bell where Either way, you'll stop missing those
you'll be sure to hear it when it rings. important calls. 3{}-

52 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

CAR BATTERY SAVER
By R. C. APPERSON, JR.

Never again will your wife leave the lights on and kill the battery-
this little "computerized" gadget makes forgetting an impossibility

ONE MISERABLE RAINY MORNING, we climbed into our car and

headed to work, picking up riders along the way. In order to let
fellow drivers know we were on the highway, the headlights were
flicked on, and conversation engulfed the group. The rest of the
drive was just sufficient to let the stimulating conversation sweep
all thoughts of headlights from the driver's mind. Once in the com-
pany parking lot, the ignition switch was quickly cut off, and all
passengers made a mad, splashing dash for the front door. Two
high candle -power lamps remained on, doing no useful work, but
sapping those ampere -hours from the car's battery. The weather
was clear when quitting time rolled around. All loaded aboard the
car, and-urrr, urrr-then nothing. The language that followed was
much stronger than the battery, and a vow was made to find a way
to remedy the problem. Here is the device that has eliminated many
1965 Spring Edition 53
trips to the battery charger; it's yours
for a very few dollars and a little time.
How It Works. As in computer logic
circuitry, certain conditions must be
present before the device generates a
signal. When the stage is set properly,
the little gadget comes alive with a rau-
cous 100 -cycle squawk that won't allow
you to leave your lights on. In fact,
when this thing sounds off, you'll wish
for a second that you never heard of
headlights!
The signal is generated only when the
headlights are on and the ignition is off.
If the ignition is on, nothing happens.
Headlight and ignition voltages cause
no disturbance either, but the removal
of the ignition voltage if headlight volt-
age is applied starts the action. A look Terminal board was used for the prototype, but
at the circuit will explain why. layout is noncritical; terminal strips can be used.

have two controls that switch voltages

from the same source. Let the head-
Computer Logic: The Battery Saver light voltage be the supply, and the
The circuit used in this project follows ignition the hold -off signal. Since a ref-
computer logic to an extent. The desired erence point is required for the supply,
action does not fit either "AND" or a resistor is placed between the nor-
"OR" gate conditions. "AND" gates op- mally -grounded circuit element and the
erate with both inputs present, and ground. The ignition voltage is dropped
"OR" gates with either one input or the across it. Only one-half watt is dissi-
other. The design of the Car Battery pated as hold -off power. This is a negli-
Saver is similar to that of an "INHIBIT" gible load to a battery being charged by
gate, to use computer terminology. a generator.
When the headlights are left on, there The signal generator itself is simple.
is an output unless the ignition is
It is a unijunction relaxation oscillator
also on. The output is in the form of delivering pulsed energy to a speaker at
a raucous warning signal that emanates
a 100 -cycle rate as determined by the
from the loudspeaker. It doesn't let
R1, Cl time constant.
you forget the lights! If the ignition
Unijunction Q1 does not conduct un-
switch is on, the output is "INHIBITED." til Cl charges through Rl to a potential
determined by the unijunction character-
istics and the supply voltage. When this
potential is reached, the emitter allows
Cl to discharge into base number 1.
INHIBIT Gate, Generator. If you have This turns on the unijunction and a cur-
a resistor and capacitor in series with a rent pulse is drawn through the speaker,
car battery, the capacitor will charge producing an audible tone.
through the resistor to the full battery Protective resistance for the unijunc-
potential. If you have a resistor and tion is provided by R2, and R3 is the re-
capacitor connected in series and then sistor logic. Obviously, Cl won't charge
to sources of like potential (both to the if a voltage at the top of R3 is equal
positive terminal of the car battery, for to the voltage at the top of Rl. When
example) the capacitor cannot charge
, the voltage at the top of R3 disappears,
as no current flows from the battery. Cl charges, and the circuit emits the
This, basically, is the INHIBIT prin- warning.
ciple. The "Battery Saver" is flexible. Move
How do we apply this in the car? We the location of R3 and the battery saver
54 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 TO TO SPKF
IGNITION TO DIST.
SWITCH
CI TO
HEADLIGHTS
R2

-- AUTO
BATTERY
IF ONLY
RESISTOR
R3
I
TO CHASSIS
OF AUTO
Basic INHIBIT circuit is integrated into
TO HEADLIGHT auto electrical system as above. This
SWITCH drawing is for illustration only; actual-
ly, CI, R2, and R3 are in Battery Saver.

Parts placement is clearly shown above. Connection

TO TO
to the automobile is done as described in the text. IGNITION HEADLIGHT
SWITCH SWITCH
0+ +

system will operate on a car with either

positive or negative ground. Voltage is
not critical either. The only difference
between a 6- and 12 -volt system is a
slight volume decrease with the lower
voltage.
Building The Unit. Any small container
large enough to house the speaker will
make a suitable cabinet for the unit.
Circuit layout and wiring is not at all
critical, but the author's layout is shown
for your convenience. Three leads are
brought from inside the cabinet which
go to the ignition, headlights, and auto
chassis ground. The speaker is attached
to the case after holes are drilled in the
box to let the sound out. Small screws TO
IGNITION
mount the speaker to the cabinet. The SWITCH

speaker terminals also serve as tie points

for one base lead and the negative side
of the capacitor. The hold -off resistor
and the lead that goes to the ignition Version of the Bat-
connect to this capacitor lead. Care tery Saver above
must be exercised when soldering to the is for negative
unijunction, and a heat sink should be ground cars; the
used; remember, it's a transistor. schematic at right
should be used if
(Continued on page 153) your car has the
positive terminal
of the battery con-
.111111111111111111111111111.11111111111111M. PARTS 1111.11.1.111111.1111111111.11111111111111111111, nected to ground.
25-d.c.w.v. electrolytic capacitor
Q1 -2N2160 unijunction transistor
R1 -1500 -ohm, V2 -watt resistor 01

R2 -91 -ohm, V2 -watt resistor

R3 -270 -ohm, 2 -watt resistor B2
1-Miniature speaker, 8 ohms TO
1-Minibox or other housing HEADLIGHT
Misc.-Terminal strips or board, wire, etc. SWITCH

1965 Spring Edition 55

 SCOTT'S TOP RATED LT-110
FM STEREO TUNER KIT
NOW AT A NEW LOW PRICE ...$1139.95
"... 1.88 uy sensitivity by a home alignment procedure
without instruments ...an exceptional feat ...ff
Electronics Illustrated

Here's terrific news for you kit builders! Now, the famous Scott LT -110 tuner kit
by every audio expert ...
built by thousands of hi fi enthusiasts
top rated
...
is available in handsome new
...
styling at a truly modest price.
Look at the outstanding features of this superbly engineered tuner. It includes a heavily silver-
plated front end ... prewired and tested in Scott's engineering laboratories. The critical multiplex
section is also pre -wired and tested with the most advanced multiplex equipment available. Among
the LT -1108's many extras: Stereo Separation it excess of 30 db, Sonic Monitor stereo indicator,
60 db Signal -to -Noise ratio, sensitive tuning meter.
Here's what the technical editor of Electronics Illustrated said about the LT -110: "If you have
hesitated to go into stereo FM because of imagined complexities and highly technical skills and
knowledge that might be required, fear no more. The LT -110 shows you how to enjoy stereo FM
the easy way."

IMPORTANT
FREE OFFER
FROM SCOTT

Please send me your new 20 -page

full -color 1965 Stereo Guide and
complete catalog. Include com-
plete information on new consoles
by Scott ... component quality in
beautiful, hand -finished cabinets.
LK-72B 80 -Watt Stereo Amplifier Kit. This LK-48B 48 -Watt Complete Stereo Amplifier Name
popular amplifier kit delivers enough Kit. Here's more than enough power for
power to drive any speaker system, and most music systems, and two great new Address
at an outstanding price. Complete range features: Switched front panel headphone
of control features includes switched City Zone State
output for private listening, and powered
front panel headphone output, complete
recording facilities, and provision for
driving a third or center channel loud-
center channel output to drive extension
speakers. 13 front panel controls. Com-
plete tape facilities. Includes all -aluminum
SCOTT`
speaker system without additional ampli- chassis and DC -operated heaters for low- H. H. SCOTT, INC. 521-00
fication. Only $149.95. est hum. Only $129.95.
111 Powdermill Road, Maynard, Mass.

Export: Scott International, 111 Powdermill Road, Maynard, Mass. Canada: Atlas Radio Corp., 50 Wingold Ave., Toronto. Cable HIFI
Price slightly higher West of Rockies. Subject to change without notice.
CIRCLE NO. 35 ON READER SERVICE CARD
56 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Chapter
Hi-Fi a n ci
STEREO
HI-FI speaker enclosures remain a favorite construction
project of the died -in -the -wool audiophile. Once again, the
ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK has utilized the
services of Dave Weems to design something out of the
ordinary. This year Dave has come up with an enclosure
made from a rectangular block of ceramic tile; with the
addition of baffling and high -frequency diffusers, Dave has
constructed a low-cost stereo system capable of reproducing
surprisingly good sound. Author and designer Jim Reid has
attacked the enclosure problem from a different angle and
describes a clean-cut conventional hi-fi system.
Just in case you don't want to part with that stereo tuner
which lacks a multiplex indicator, Chuck Caringella has de-
signed a transistorized gadget to fill the bill. Hi-Fi buffs can
regale you with stories about the misadventures of FM multi-
plex-especially stereo transmissions that are not really
broadcast in stereo. An indicator is the only positive way of
knowing if an FM station has the necessary multiplex pilot
carriers in operation.

Reflectoflex Speaker Enclosure James D. Reid 58

Phono Fillips Art Trauffer 62

Resistive Load for Hi-Fi Test Walter Temcor 64

David Weems 67
Another Ceramic Tile Enclosure B.

Audio Aids 72
Charles Caringella 73
Stereo Indicator
1965 Spring Edition 57
 Build the

reflectoflex
LC1ICCO1ICX
SPEAKER ENCLOSURE
By JAMES D. REID

Fill the entire room with realistic, bright, hi-fi

sound using this practical reflected -sound system

WHEN STEREO HI-FI first became popular, the ardent audiophile

wanted to show off his gleaming new equipment and fancy
speakers would first carefully position a chair at "stereo center" and then
ask you to sit down. Needless to say, the illusion-provided by recordings
of locomotives, brass bands, and bouncing Ping-pong balls-was amazing,
and seemed too good to be true. Music lovers quickly recognized that
this extravagant separation of channels was, indeed, too good to be true,
and as the stereo hi-fi art matured, a number of solutions to the problem,
all of which eliminated the "stereo seat," came along. One method of
getting rid of the center "gap" between the two channels is, of course, to
use a center speaker. Another less expensive, simpler method, the one
recommended here, is to use two speaker systems having good dispersion-
systems that radiate the sound in all directions rather than in a narrow
beam. The "Reflectoflex" speaker enclosure which you can easily build-
one for monophonic use and two for stereo-is such a system. By aiming
the speaker upward and "spraying" the sound off the inclined lid (or ad-
jacent walls and ceiling if the lid is not used), it achieves a high degree of
dispersion. The result is hi-fi sound with an airiness, an openness that must
be heard to be appreciated. Some care should be taken in selecting a
speaker for this cabinet. Because more high -frequency energy is absorbed
when the sound is reflected rather than directed at the listener, a coaxial
speaker with a highly efficient tweeter is recommended. Even so, some
treble boost at the amplifier may be desirable. An alternative would be
to use a woofer or full -range speaker with a separate horn tweeter and the
crossover network recommended by the manufacturer. The tweeter could
58 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 be mounted between the holes shown for
the "brilliance" control and the port.
Ports and Port Sizes. Whether or not
you need a port depends on the free-air
resonance of the speaker you use. If a
low resonant frequency speaker (below
35 cps) is available, the port is not
cut, and the Reflectoflex is then a sealed
box or "infinite baffle" system. If the
resonant point is higher, the speaker is
positioned off -center on the speaker
mounting board, and a circular port cut
to match the resonance of the cabinet
to that of the speaker (the bass reflex
principle) .
If the cone resonance of the speaker
is 50 cps, the port should be 51/2 inches
in diameter; for a resonance of 45 cps,
Light, airy sound fills 41/2 inches; for 40 cps, 31/2 inches. The
the room when it's dis- manufacturer of the speaker should be
persed by reflection able to furnish information as to its
from cabinet lid (as
above). Two enclosures
free -air resonance point.
can be constructed for Building the Reflectoflex involves little
use with stereo setup. more than making a rigid box from
sheets of 3/4" plywood or Novoply as

SIDE SIDE
18 x 3d' 18"x 30 FRONT
22-I/2"X 30'

SIDE SIDE
18"x 30' 18'5 3d'

All sections for two FRONT

enclosures can be cut 22-1/2"5 30"
from two 4'x 8' sheets
of plywood as shown at
right. Ordinary, inter-
ior grade plywood can
be used instead of the
veneered type. Other 4X8' PLYWOOD HARDWOOD VENEER
12 REQ.)
materials include hard-
wood strips for inside
bracing and outside
trim, a piano hinge,
glue, and wood screws. SPKR. BD. BOTTOM TOP REAR PANEL
17-1/2'5 22-1/2" 16-I/2'X 22-I/2' 113-1/8"5 24" 22-I/2"X 30"

SPKR. BD. BOTTOM

IT -1/2'5 22-1/2" 16-I/2'X 22-1/2" TOP REAR PANEL
18-I/8"X 24" 22-I/2'X 30'

1965 Spring Edition 59

shown in the drawings below. The author
used hardwood surfaced plywood for
good appearance. Hardwood cleats
(strips) 1" x 1", are glued and screwed
,

to the side panels, and the front and

rear panels secured to them with glue
and 11/2" #8 screws countersunk from
the outside. The resulting holes are cov-
ered with 1" x 11/8" strips of hardwood.
If a port is used, staple a 2" layer of
fiberglass padding to the interior sur-
faces. If built as an infinite baffle (no
port) fill the enclosure with large (12"
,

to a side) pieces of fiberglass, leav-

ing room for the speaker magnet as-
sembly.
The enclosure lid is attached to the Interior view of Reflectoflex enclosure.
rear panel with a 22" length of brass
piano hinge, and is held open with a sim-
ple prop made from a 1/2" -square piece of "hard" finish, several coats of shellac,
hardwood rounded at one end. Shallow varnish, etc., or a thin sheet of metal
holes drilled in the underside of the lid should be attached to the underside of
provide for alternate positions so that the lid to increase its sound reflecting
the lid can be adjusted for best sound properties.
reflection. The lid shoud be given a The speaker board is beveled at front
Interior panel details for the enclosure are shown below. The control hole

II"
is for a "brilliance" control if used. The 1" x 1" cleats are hardwood strips
used for bracing, and are glued and screwed from the inside. The front and
rear panels are set in between the two side panels, and screwed from the
front and back. The screw holes can be filled or covered with hardwood strips.

8-1/4"
I

12
GRILL FRAME
WOOD TAPE_ 8-1/4' 1/2" PLYWOOD
(OPTIONAL)

PORT
(SEE TEXT)

5-1/2"

24-1/2"

1I"X ("CLEATS
3l4"
o

FRONT PANEL REAR PANEL SIDE PANEL

22-I/2"X 30" 22-1/2"X 30" 12 RE30'O.)
(8 '8

60 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 PIANO HINGE With a low -resonance speaker, the unit can be mount-
I o o
° °
° o o °o
°
o I ed in the center of the speaker board; no port is
o necessary. A small hardwood strip, which moves on
12' LOW RESONANCE
SPKR POSITION a screw axis, supports the lid in various positions.

1 TOP VIEW
(LID REMOVED)

CONTROL
/
/
WOOD
24" TAPE

SPKR
HOLE

31'

I''x I"CLEATS

0 0 0
J
FRONT VIEW SIDE
CROSS SECTION
SLIDERS

and rear, and the underside lined with pleted frame simply rests on the speaker
a strip of sponge rubber to provide an mounting board and is easily removed.
airtight joint when screwed in place. The Reflectoflex, or a pair of them,
While a grille is not needed, the speaker can be used in upright position, or on
can be attractively covered and protected the side the bottom of one unit can be
;

by stapling a grille cloth to a simple butted against the bottom of another if

frame that fits into the top (see draw- two units are used with sides down. As
ing on the preceding page). The com- previously noted, it is quite possible to
use the walls or ceiling as reflecting
Enclosure with speaker board in position. surfaces instead of the enclosure lid.
Simply position the enclosure or en-
closures for best results.
The wire from the amplifier enters the
cabinet through a hole in the bottom or
rear panel if you choose to use the
cabinet on its side. Metal "sliders" are
fastened to the bottom alternatively, a
;

simple rectangular base can be built

from left -over plywood to lift the en-
closure off the floor.
Finishing. The author used stain and
several coats of varnish over hardwood
veneer plywood to produce professional -
looking cabinets. Even ordinary plywood
can be quite pleasing to the eye, how-
ever, if care is taken in finishing it. In
any case, your Reflectoflex enclosure can
be counted on to provide a definite im-
provement in the realism of your living
room "concert hall." -»-
1965 Spring Edition 61
Got an inexpensive record player
that's gathering dust? Here
are five easy ways to cure
five common problems

1
QUICK CHECK FOR RECORD PLAYERS-
When a teen-ager's record player goes bad,
it's the cartridge or amplifier 99 per cent of
the time. Before going to the trouble of tak-
ing the player apart, simply turn it on, adjust
volume to maximum, grasp a screwdriver
blade, and touch it to the lugs of the car-
tridge. A loud a.c. hum at one lug indicates
the amplifier is working; if the hum is weak
or absent, take the player apart. Good hum
indicates a new cartridge, but you can
double-check by disconnecting the amplifier
leads and connecting a high -impedance mag-
netic earphone. A good, clear signal when
you play a record shows that the cartridge is
O.K. Note: Do NOT make these tests while
standing on a damp basement floor, or while
touching a "ground" such as a radiator.

2
SIMPLE TURNTABLE TIMING-A stroboscopic
disc and a fluorescent lamp, if you happen to
have them handy, will tell you if your turn-
table is fast or slow, but not by how much.
The photo shows a simple, exact, timing
method. Place a strip of paper between a
record and the turntable, allowing a little to
stick out so it will brush against your finger
tip. In this way, you can feel and count each
revolution for one minute while watching the
second hand of a watch or clock. An accu-
rate count gives you exact turntable rpm.
You might also be interested to find out how
much the drag of the record player pickup
arm reduces the speed of the turntable.
Count the rpm's again with the pickup arm
in place on the record, and compare.

62 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

By ART TRAUFFIER

3 NEW FELT FOR PHONOS-When the flocking on

top of low-priced phono turntables wears off, it's
a good idea to glue on a disc of felt or other
material. Such a covering improves appearance
and makes things easier on your records at the
same time. Having turntables reflocked is more
expensive, and small particles of fiber will some-
times adhere to your records. As shown in the
photo, remove the turntable (in most cases it's
held in place by a "C" washer that fits in a
groove on the shaft), lay it over the felt, and
cut around the edge with a razor blade. Before
removing the turntable, mark the center of the
felt disc by inserting a sharp, pointed instru-
ment through the center hole. Punch out a 1/4" -
diameter hole in the felt for the center shaft.
Spread glue (LePage's wood glue, Goodyear
Pliobond, or a similar adhesive) over the turn-
table and position the new felt disc.

A "SAVE" FOR CENTERING DISCS-The re-

cess in the center of some turntables is so
low that plastic 45 -rpm centering discs don't
come up high enough to engage the center
hole of 45 -rpm records. Note in the photo
that the top surface of the centering disc is
about flush with the top surface of the rec-
ord. The problem is easily solved by buying
another plastic disc (about 25 cents), and
cementing it on top of the old one, but the
method used here was to grab a 13/a"-O.D.
iron washer from the junk box (a rubber
washer can also be used) and cement it to
the bottom of the centering disc. The thick-
ness of the washer was enough to raise the
disc to the required height.

PHONO TURNTABLE

TWNNTSSLE SNCSN VASELINE

SHIFT SNOUND SHAFT
IMPROVING WORN BEARINGS-After long use, the turn- PIN SLOT- .
table shaft and bearing become worn and dry, and the

5 turntable teeters due to increased play. This situation

can be improved by disassembling (see drawing) and
cleaning the shaft and bearing with gasoline. A coating
of Vaseline on the shaft will both reduce play and
uNNINc
[Link]

YOTON/SN[

iTOTÑ1NTISLE NNG
lubricate it.
1965 Spring Edition 63
RESISTIVE LOAD
If you're tired of using
makeshift resistire loads
then testing audio ampli-
fier projects. this ad-
justable unit is for you.
The tost is lot. and it
can be built in tto hours

When testing hi-fi ampli-

fiers, a load of the rated resis-
tive impedance that will not shatter the
eardrums is a must. Such a test load should also
have a negligible reactance over the frequency range
of interest, and should be capable of dissipating a rea-
sonable amount of power, at least for short periods. Most of
us go along for years haywiring the test load with clip leads,
which short out or let go while we're setting the bias or adjusting the
feedback, with disastrous results.
The writer finally got fed up with haywire and makeshifts and built
this adjustable load unit, which you can duplicate quickly at nominal
cost. It is so simple that it can be wired merely by following the sche-
matic diagram and the pictures, without special construction data. Power -
handling ability is 15 watts on the 4 -ohm, 30 watts on the 8 -ohm, and 40
watts on the 16 -ohm switch position, if adequate ventilation is provided.
Higher -wattage resistors can be used if desired, but will require a
larger box and better ventilation.
As a bonus, use of the load permits you to read power output by
connecting your VTVM or wide -band multimeter across the load, and
choosing the appropriate a.c. scale. Just read the voltage and con-
vert it to watts by means of the graph. The dashed lines show
sample measurements of 6.0 volts across the 4 -ohm load and
9.0 volts across the 16 -ohm load. And if you're
worried by the inductance of wire -wound resistors,
forget it. Up to well above 100 kc., the
inductance of even the 16 -ohm re-
sistor is negligible.

64 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

FOR HI-FI TEST By WALTER TEMCOR

Switching connections are

easily followed in the sche-
matic diagram. Don't forget wire
lead between Slb and Slc arms.

Resistors making up the adjustable load are mounted

directly on the switch terminals for wiring ease.
Straightedge and voltmeter are all you need
to read watts output from power graph.

40
35
30
25
20

15

W=Ez/R
10
9.0
8.0
7.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
F 2.5
2.0

1.5

LO
.9 PARTS LIST
.8
.7 R1 3 -ohm, 10 -watt wire -wound resis-
.6 tor (Mallory 11113 or equivalent)
.5
R2-1-ohna, 10 -watt wire -wound resis-
tor (Mallory 111/1 or equivalent)
.4 R3 -5 -ohm, 20 -wall wire -wound resis-
.35 tor (;1lallory 2HI5 or equivalent)
.3 R4 -10 -ohm, 20 -watt wire-wound resis-
tor (Mallory 211.110 or equivalent)
.25
S1-3 -position. 4 -pole rotary switch
(Lafayette 99-6156 or equivalent)
.2

.15
1 2-Binding posts
1-51/4" x 3" x 2g" aluminum
(Premier l'.iIC 1006 or equivalent)
box
1-Pointer knob
.8.9 2.5 3.5 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 25
.11isc.-Hookup wire, solder, etc.
.6 .7 I 1.5 2 3 1 15
VOLTS

1965 Spring Edition 65

 pay... exciting, steady work... the great feeling of doing
High
something important. It's all yours with a job in electronics.
Look around. There's never been anything to match the
career opportunities you'll find in electronics. In govern- Mail Coupon TODAY For FREE Catalog
ment, in industry ...
thousands of good, high -paying jobs Cleveland Institute of E!Iectrantae
-just waiting for the right men to fill them. AND YOU 1776 E.. 17th St., Dept. EH -1
Cleveland, Ohio 44114 How to Succeed
CAN HAVE ONE OF THESE JOBS. Regardless of what you're
doing today ...
a Cleveland Institute Training Program
will give you the necessary electronics skills and knowl-
Please aendmeyourFREE catalog,
"How to Saaeed in Electronics".
in H;ectronics
I ain oaer 17 yeare of age and inter.
edge. You'll learn ail about Transistors, Communications, sated in (cheek one);
Aerospace Electronics. What's more, you'll learn quickly
and economically . . at home, in your spare time. Why DElectronics Technology D First Clare FCC Licerne
wait? There will never be a better time to get started. OIndustrial Electronics D Electronic Communications
Send the coupon for complete details. Broadcast Engineering D Advanced Engineering
There's no cost ...
no obligation. Do it now.
Your present occupation

Cleveland Institute Name

(please print)
Age

of Electronics -
Addren

City Stat.
County

Zip
1776 E. 17th St., Dent. EH -1 Cleveland, Ohio 44114 Accredited Member - J
CIRCLE NO. m ON READER SERVICE CARD
66 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 ANOTHER CERAMIC
TILE ENCLOSURE
for 8" speakers, this system
A ducted -port bass reflex
is nonvibrant, inexpensive, and exceedingly compact

By DAVID B. WEEMS

SOME speaker enclosures are small, enclosure costs only about $6.00, so two
some enormous ; some are cheap, enclosures for a stereo setup would run
some cost dearly. But all speaker en- you only about $12.00. Soundwise, al-
closures fall into one of two categories- most all the advantages of this enclosure
good or bad. Actually, it makes little stem from its tile construction.
sense to house a good speaker in a poor Tile for Density? The important argu-
enclosure, no matter whether the reason ment for the use of tile can be found in
is to save money, space, or both. On the any complete "Density of Materials"
other hand, with a quality enclosure that chart. For example, the chart published
also happens to be low in cost, the sav- in Briggs' Sound Reproduction' lists ply-
ings can be applied on a better speaker, wood, the usual material for speaker en-
or on other components. closures, at a density of 0.67. This is
In the stereo age the space problem admittedly rather good, at least when
is usually with us, so we can always hope compared with other forms of wood
for something compact. The system de-
scribed here is compact, yet it sacrifices Briggs, Third Edi-
little in quality. What's more, each basic 'Sound Reproduction, by G. A.
tion, p. 102
1965 Spring Edition 67

TR
 6

T 1'<. I
1/4- 3.I/4 I"

`)--H-( i

I T.
0-I/4' THREADED RODS -4. 11-3/4"

25 1/2'
FOAM PLASTIC

s-- PART C-.

3/0"

I TRIS COMPARTMENT
ó
TO BE FILLED WITH 8-I/2"
FIBER GLASS)

0
PART®
'
3/1

I -I/2-
FEET

17"IAPPRO%1
5-I/2'-4.
3/G'

General design of enclosure is evident in photo and draw ng above. Parts A and C form top and
bottom, respectively, and are held securely in place against tile by two threaded bolts. Gaskets
made from 1/8" foam plastic insure airtight fit between plywood parts and the ceramic tile.

(walnut, for example, is only 0.56). But held securely by two threaded rods,
tile boasts a figure of 2.0, or just about which adds considerably to their rigidity.
three times that of plywood. In addition, The bulk of the enclosure is made of
the tile used here has a thickness of a non -vibrating tile, sold by lumber yards
full inch, compared to the usual 3/4" for as "flue tile."
plywood. Port with Padding. The basic design of
To quote Mr. Briggs again, "All will this system is simply a ducted port bass
agree on the necessity of overcoming reflex, and any good 8" speaker can be
vibration and resonance at low frequen- used. The only unusual feature is the
cies, and this is achieved by adequate resonant chamber at the bottom which
density." When Mr. Briggs says "All," cancels out a tendency toward a peak
he surely means all hi-fi and stereo fans or boom at one point in the bass range.
who are conscious of what true bass Most compact enclosures show such a
sounds like. People still talk about the peak, and the elimination of this peak
beautiful "tone" of a wooden cabinet, is probably more important than precise
forgetting that the speaker system isn't matching of port and speaker.
a musical instrument, but a reproducer Best results are obtained with this
of an endless variety of instruments and chamber completely but loosely filled
tones. Any energy used up in panel vi- with fiberglass. Several materials were
brations is lost so far as true bass re- tested, and fiberglass was found to work
sponse is concerned. Even worse, it best. Cotton batting was almost as
comes back to us in the form of hang- good, but rug padding and foam plastic
over. were less effective. Interestingly enough,
The speaker system shown here uses a change of material was evident in the
some plywood, but only at the ends. Fur- impedance curve of the speaker as well
thermore, the plywood end pieces are as in the actual sound of the system.
68 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 f PART®

PORT
ZUTOUT
Top and bottom views
PART® of Part A appear at
left; drawings of Parts
D, A, and C have been
reproduced below.
0. BASKET/ Parts A and C are iden-
tical, with the excep-
tion that Part C re-
quires no port or
speaker cutouts. Gas-
SPEAKER ket surrounding speak-
CUTOUT
er cutout on top of
Part A is for speaker
flange which is on
top of (rather than un-
derneath) Part A in
the finished enclosure.

TOP VIEW BOTTOM VIEW

GASKET MATERIAL e v2

I -I 16EE TEAT)

_
r 1 DIA

4-)/2

LI PROT)
IAROXI
The kind of padding you use in the
speaker compartment is another matter.
Here personal taste is the best guide. IM -DIA
Fiberglass will probably give you the -'l'-
most level response, but the sound will ; e e e e
be "livelier" with foam plastic. However,
;

fiberglass could damage some speakers

if it is placed too close to them. If you
do choose to use it, you'll be wise to
cover it with cheesecloth.
Building the Enclosure. This is a rather
easy system to construct if you take a 6 I/2'
few precautions. The plywood parts can
be marked out by using each tile as a
pattern. Of course, you should label
each part, not only as to location, but as When the parts are sawed to fit and
to which side is "up" and which is the gasket materials are glued in place,
"down." This is necessary because some you can begin putting the enclosure to-
tiles are asymmetrical. Reverse the gether. Note that a '/a" foam plastic
speaker board, for example, and it may gasket is used to insure a tight fit be-
fit like a left shoe on a right foot. tween the top and bottom boards (Parts
1965 Spring Edition 69
 PLACE WEATHER STRIPPING 5 ROWS OF 14 HOLES
AROUND ENTIRE CIRCUMFERENCE I/4"IN DIA,
SPACED I" APART)

O O O 0 O O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0
O O 0 0 O O 0 0 O O 0 0 0
O O O O O O O 0 0 O O 0 0 0 6-I/2'

O O O O O O O 0 0 O O O 0 0
O O O O O O 0 O O O O 0 0
I -I%4 "

IS"IAPPRO%I

Partition (Part B) must be drilled as

shown here before mounting; you'll
also have to drill two holes for rods
(see photo and drawing on page 68).

A and C) and the tile, between the

speaker and Part A, and between the
sides of Part D and the tile itself. Weath-
er stripping is best for gasketing the
partition (Part B) .
Drill the holes for the threaded rod
in the top speaker board (Part A) as
shown on p. 69. Then, using the speaker
board as a pattern, drill holes for the
rods in the bottom (Part C) and middle
partition (Part B) . One way to proper-
ly locate the holes in the partition is to
BILL OF MATERIALS place it just inside the tile and lay the
top or bottom over it. The duct wall
1-24" length of 8'/z" x 17" flue or fireplace tile (Part D) can now be glued and screwed
for basic enclosure (this is called "18 -inch
tile" by some dealers) to the speaker board.
1-18" x 24" sheet of 3" fir plywood (for Parts Next, locate the partition (Part B)
A, B, and C)
1-4X" x 6%" sheet of 3" wood (for Part D) 91/2" from one end of the two rods by
2-36" lengths of 3/4" threaded steel rods running nuts down tightly on each side
10-3/4" hex nuts and using bolt -and -nut sealant or lock
4-'/4" washers
1-4' length of weather stripping, foam plastic washers. Now add a nut to each rod at
or foam rubber (for edges of Part B)
1-12" x 36" sheet of %" "Art Foam" foam the end, turning it on far enough to allow
plastic (for gaskets on Parts A, C, and D) the bottom board (Part C) to go in place.
1-36" length of ,A" to 1" foam plastic (damp- Use a washer under the nut on the bot-
ing material for top of Part B and speaker
compartment walls-see text) tom side, and tighten both nuts securely
1-8" PM hi-fi speaker on each rod, again using sealant.
Misc.--Wood and machine screws, nuts, fiber-
glass, glue, grille cloth, etc. The assembly can now be slid into the
Optional (see text)
bottom of the tile, but don't forget to
1-8%" fill the space between the bottom and
x 17" sheet of %" fir plywood (for
mask) the partition (Part B) with fiberglass.
1-Plastic egg tray Then line the top of the partition with
1-5i6" x 4" eye bolt
1-Cable strap foam plastic, and pad the walls around
lVindow screen wire (for mask) the speaker. Drop the speaker board
down over the threaded rods and add a
70 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Plastic egg -tray treble diffuser (in
photo below) aids in dispersing the
"high's" throughout listening room.

Top (Part A) and bottom (Part C)

are the two pieces of "bread" in this
flue tile "sandwich." A hacksaw can
be used to trim off protruding por-
tion of the threaded rods after the
nuts have been tightened securely.

washer and a nut from the top. Tighten

the nut as firmly as possible, but don't
overdo the job-you may strip the
threads if you use a long wrench and ap-
ply too much force.
Placement Possibilities. There are many
ways of using this system, depending
upon the space you have available. One
builder succeeded in stowing away the
flue tile enclosures in room corners and
placing small tweeter baffles on table
tops. With the tiles more or less out
of view, there was no decorating prob-
lem.
Perhaps the next best solution, with
regard to saving space, is that shown at
right. The enclosures lie on edge with
the speakers toward the upper front.
This is especially useful if you must keep If space is really at a premium, the
the enclosure as low as possible but don't enclosure can be placed between two
want to go to the woofer/tweeter ar- pieces of furniture, as it is here.
rangement.
The projections of the speaker and the
bolts on the speaker board require set- glued in place. Finally, to hide the edge
ting the grille cloth out a short distance of the speaker board, a coat of paint can
from the board. One practical way of be applied (ideally to match the color of
solving this problem is with a "mask." the tile) .
The mask is made from '4" plywood Some purists may object to having the
with cutouts for the speaker and bolts. high frequencies produced from a point
To stiffen the grille cloth and protect about a foot above the floor. If you hap-
the speakers, wire can be glued to the pen to like your highs "elevated," the
mask and the edges trimmed to fit with enclosure can be stood on end with the
old scissors. Then the grille cloth can speaker facing up and some kind of
be folded over the edge of the mask and (Continued on page 158)
1965 Spring Edition 71
Audio Aids
FILAMENT TRANSFORMER
POSITIVE BIASED HEATERS
If you're experimenting with high -gain pre -
IIrVAC 5 TO zo
amp stages, hum and noise problems can be
+ VOLTS considerably reduced by means of the "posi-
tive heater bias" trick used by audio engi-
x 40pf. neers. Don't connect the transformer heater
winding to ground. Instead, wire a 100 -ohm, 10 -watt
(Ohmite Dividohm) adjustable resistor across the
heater winding, and run a lead from the tap to a
source of 5 -to -20 volt positive bias, such as a tap on
a voltage divider from the B -plus line to ground.
Bypass the tap with a 20-40 µf. electrolytic capaci-
tor, and adjust the tap point for minimum hum.
You'll be surprised at the improvement.
-Kenneth Bohn

SPORTS CAR MIKE STAND

Do you have a friend with a taste for sports cars
as well as ham radio or tape recordings? Tell him to
make one of the mike stands shown at left. Sears-
Roebuck sells a rubber-tired wheel (recently cata-
logued as #8732 and selling for $1.49) that makes
an ideal base. A regular Atlas AD-8 extension tube
is used to support the mike. Since the AD -8 has
threads on both ends of the tube, saw off those that
will be closest to the wheel. To fit the AD -8 to the
hub of the wheel, force -fit a 4" wood dowel into the
AD -8 tube, leaving half the length to pass through
the hub. Snug the dowel into the hub and cement
in place with epoxy resin. -Art Trauff er

RECORD DUST REMOVAL

When your hi-fi stereo records get dusty (from lint,
hair, cigarette ashes, etc.), there is a simple way to
clean them. Go into the kitchen and "borrow" your
wife's box of thin -sheet Saran Wrap plastic. Tear
off sheet about 6" wide and crinkle it in your fingers
while holding it about 1" above the record. Start
the turntable and let it revolve slowly. The static
electricity generated in the Saran Wrap will attract
almost all of the loose dirt and dust. -Phil Manley

OVAL SPEAKER CUTOUT

There's no trick to accurately cutting out a circular
speaker opening using the intersecting line method
-from the mounting holes-but an oval or elliptical
speaker is something else again. The following
practice is somewhat obvious, but maybe you've
forgotten about it. Turn the speaker up and care-
fully paint the cardboard gasket-black is a good
color. Press the gasket against the bailie and you
have an outline of the speaker opening that can be
used as a sawing line. (See photo.) The paint won't
hurt the cardboard gasket, but be sure to let it dry
before mounting-it might otherwise hold the
speaker gasket permanently in place!
-Carl Dunant
72 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Build a
STEREO INDICATOR

Stereo multiplex FM programs are becoming more

and more COW anon. This indicator lets you know
when you hare tuned in a stereo transmission

By CHARLES CARINGELLA

ASTEREO INDICATOR of some sort cluding the 19-kc. signal, appears at the
(usually a panel lamp) is now a output of the FM receiver. This 19-kc.
standard feature of most commercial signal is constant in amplitude and,
multiplex adapters and FM -multiplex when present, constitutes the signal that
receivers. Such an indicator helps the turns on the stereo indicator light.
user find FM -stereo signals when tun- Multiplex signal output from the FM
ing, and eliminates any doubt as to tuner is fed into jack J1 (see Fig. 1)
whether the transmission is stereo or and then out again through jack J2 to
not. the multiplex adapter. If your FM tuner
If your equipment does not have one has a built-in multiplex circuit, then it
of these stereo indicators, don't despair; is only necessary to bring out one shield-
the low-cost unit described here can be ed line from the tuner to J1, the input
added to any multiplex adapter or FM of the indicator circuit. This will neces-
receiver. In fact, the transistorized de- sitate an internal connection in the
vice can easily be tucked away inside tuner at the detector output, or at the
most multiplex adapter or FM receiver input of the multiplex circuit in the re-
enclosures. Or, if desired, the unit can ceiver.
be built into a separate enclosure as The tuned circuit made up of coil LI
shown. and capacitor Cl resonates at 19 kc.
How It Works. The transmitted stereo This allows only the 19-kc. signal to
signal contains, along with other modu- pass, and all the other components pres-
lation components, a 19-kc. pilot sub- ent in the complete multiplex signal are
carrier. The multiplex information, in- greatly attenuated. The 19-kc. signal is
1965 Spring Edition 73
 JI
INPUT

1
J2
OUTPUT
117.

Fig. 1. Three 2N404 pnp tran-

sistors provide the gain needed
to energize K1 when a stereo
signal tops the preset threshold.

then amplified by transistor Ql, which

is a conventional Class A amplifier.
The amplified 19-kc. signal is then
rectified by diode DI, and the output is
smoothed by resistor R6 and capacitor
C5. Transistors Q2 and Q3 amplify this
d.c. signal, and the final output controls
a sensitive relay (K1) . The relay con-
trols a pilot lamp (II) which is lighted
,

whenever the 19-kc. signal is present.

The only primary power required for Fig. 2. In the self-contained unit, all connections
the unit is 6 -volt a.c. CAUTION! The are made on the rear panel. The name "Multi-
source of this 6 -volt supply must not plex" refers to a function that no longer applies.
be grounded! The voltage can be taken
from the power transformer of the tun-
er, multiplex adapter, or hi-fi amplifier R8 and capacitor C8, and provides about
only if the winding supplying the 6 -volt 12 volts d.c. negative to ground across
a.c. is known to be ungrounded. If you bleeder R9. Since the total current drain
can't be perfectly sure that it is, use a is only about 3 ma., inexpensive 1N34
separate, small, 6 -volt filament trans- (or equivalent) diodes are satisfactory
former for power. This precaution is as rectifiers.
necessary because of the voltage dou- Construction and Adjustment. The en-
bler circuit in the power supply of the tire circuit is constructed on a piece of
indicator unit. 6" x 3" Vectorbord. The placement of
The 6 -volt a.c. is applied directly to parts is not critical; however, the lay-
the voltage doubler circuit, and through out shown in Figs. 3 and 4 will provide
normally open contacts of K1 to the in- a handy guide. The relay is mounted on
dicator lamp. The output of the voltage the Vectorbord also, since the arma -
doubler circuit is smoothed by resistor (Continued on page 164)
74 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 TO RT

6VAC

PILOT
LIGHT

Fig. 3. In units meant for inclusion in the

receiver or adapter, leads are extended
to the input, indicator lamp, control, and
INPUT 6 -volt supply, which may be located on
the main receiving unit, or control panel

PARTS LIST
CI, C2, C3 -0.01-µf., 200 -volt d.c., paper capaci- R2-68,000 ohms
tor R3-15,000 ohms All resistors
C4, C5 -0.1-µJ., 200 -volt d.c., paper capacitor R4-5100 ohms % watt, -+- 10%
C6, C7 -2-µf., 15 -volt d.c., electrolytic capacitor R5-3900 ohms
C8 -200-µJ., 15 -volt d.c., electrolytic capacitor R6-100,000 ohms
DI, D2, D3 -1N34 germanium diode (or equiva- R7-5000 -ohm potentiometer, linear taper, with
lent) d.p.s.t. switch S1
11-G.E. #47 6 -volt lamp (or equivalent) R8-470 ohms
11, 12-Phono jack R9-10,000 ohms
K1-Relay, 5,000 -ohm coil (Lafayette 99-6091 S1-D.p.s.t. switch (part of R7)
or equivalent) 1-6" x 3" Vectorbord
L1-19-kc. multiplex coil (Miller 1354) 1-6%" x 3%" x 2%" aluminum box chassis
Ql, Q2, Q3-GE 2N404 transistor (or equiv.) Misc.-Pilot lamp socket assembly, knob, 2 -lug
RI -47,000 ohms terminal board

QI

Fig. 4. The layout of

parts lends itself to
ease of assembly and Li
trouble -shooting. Make
sure you do not ground
the relay while you're
mounting or wiring it.

5 --i4
JI J2 R3 RS C4 C3 DI R6 C5 TBI R9

1965 Spring Edition 75

 20 RADIO
BUILDAT HOME
CIRCUITS
only
Reg. U. S.
Pat. Off.

with the Deluxe 9

PROGRESSIVE RADIO "EDIT -KIT"®
A Practical Home Radio Course
Now Includes
** * Knowledge of Radio Necessary
No
12 RECEIVERS
* Additional Parts or Tools Needed
No
3 TRANSMITTERS

** AMPLIFIER
SQ. WAVE GENERATOR * EXCELLENT BACKGROUND FOR TV
SIGNAL TRACER
** SIGNAL INJECTOR * SCHOOL INQUIRIES INVITED Training Electronics Technicians Since 1946

* CODE OSCILLATOR * Sold Countries

in 79
FREE EXTRAS
YOU DON'T HAVE TO SPEND SET OF TOOLS
HUNDREDS OF DOLLARS FOR A RADIO COURSE
SOLDERING IRON
The Edu-kit" otters you an outstanding PRACTICAL HOME RADIO COURSE at ELECTRONICS TESTER
oek-bottom price. ur Kit is designed to train Radio & Electronics Technicians, making PLIERS-CUTTERS
use of the most modern methods of home training. You will learn radio theory, construe
tint. practice and servicing. THIS IS A COMPLETE RADIO COURSE IN EVERY DETAIL. VALUABLE DISCOUNT CARD
You will learn how to build radios, using regular schematics; how to wire and solde CERTIFICATE OF MERIT
in a professional manner; how to service radios. You will work with the standard type o TESTER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
punched metal chassis as well as the latest development of Printed Circuit chassis. HIGH FIDELITY GUIDE
You will learn the basic principles of radio. You will construct, study and Work with QUIZZES
RF and AF amplifiers and oscillators, detectors, rectifiers, test equipment. You will learn TELEVISION BOOK RADIO
and practice code, using the Progressive Code Oscillator. You will learn and practice TROUBLE -SHOOTING BOOK
trouble shooting. using the Progressive Signal Tracer, Progressive Signal Injector, Pro- MEMBERSHIP IN RADIO-TV CLUB:
gressive Dynamic Radio & Electronics Tester, Square Wave Generator and the accompany- CONSULTATION SERVICE FCC
ing instructional materia.. AMATEUR LICENSE TRAINING
You will receive training for the Novice. Technician and General Classes of F.C.C. Radio PRINTED CIRCUITRY
Amateur Licenses. You will build Receiver, Transmitter, Square Wave Generator, Code
Oscillator, Signal Tracer and Signal Injector circuits, and learn how to operate them. You
will receive an excellent background for television, HI -F1 and Electronics.
Absolutely no previous knowledge of radio or science is required. The Edu-Kit" is
the product of many years of teaching and engineering experience. The ,'Edu-Kit" will SERVICING LESSONS
Provide you with a basic education in Electronics and Radio. Worth many times the low
price you pay. The Signal Tracer alone is worth more than the price Of the kit. You will learn trouble -shooting and
servicing in a progressive manner. You
THE KIT FOR EVERYONE will practice repairs on the sets that
you construct. You will learn symptoms
You do not need the slightest background ages and backgrounds have successfully and causes of trouble In home, portable
in radio or science. Whether you are inter- used the "Edu-Nit" in more than 79 coun- and car radios. You will learn how to
ested in Radio & Electronics because you tries of the world. The "Edu-Nit" has been use the professional Signal Tracer, the
want an interesting hobby, a well paying carefully designed, step by step, so that unique Signal Infector and the dynamic
business or a job with a future, you will find you cannot make a mistake. The 'Edu-Nit" Radio & Electronics Tester. While you
the "Edu-Kit" a worth -while Investment. allows you to teach yourself at your own are learning in this practical way, you
Many thousands of Individuals Of all rate. No instructor is necessary. will be able to do many a repair job for
your friends and neighbors, and charge
fees which will far exceed the price of
PROGRESSIVE TEACHING METHOD the "Edu-Kit." Our Consultation Service
will help you with any technical prob-
The Progressive Radio "Edu-Kit" Is the foremost educational radio Kit in the world. lems you may have.
and is universally accepted as the standard in the field of electronics training. The "Edu-
Kit uses the modern educational principle of "Learn by Doing.' Therefore you construct.
learn schematics, study theory, practice trouble shooting-all in a closely integrated pro- FROM OUR MAIL BAG
gram dsigned to provide an easily -learned, thorough and interesting background in radio.
You begin by examining the various radio parts of the "Edu-Kit." You then learn the J. Stataitis, of 25 Poplar Pl., Water-
function, theory and wiring of these parts. Then you build a simple radio. With this first bury, Conn., writes: 1 have repaired
set you will enjoy listening to regular broadcast stations, learn theory, practice testing several sets for my friends, and made
and trouble shooting. Then you build a more advanced radio, learn more advanced theory money. The "Edu-Kit" paid for itself. I
and techniques. Gradually, in a progressive manner, and at your own rate, you will was ready to spend $240 for a Course,
find yourself constructing more advanced multi -tube radio circuits, and doing work like a but I found your ad and sent for your
professional Radio Technician.
Included in the "Edu-Kit" course are Receiver, Transmitter, Code Oscillator, Signal
[Link] o. P. O. Box 21, Magna,
Tracer, Square Wave Generator and Signal Injector Circuits. These are not unprofessional Utah: "The are wonderful. Here
"breadboard" experiments, but genuine radio circuits, constructed by means of professional 1 am sending you the questions and also
wiring and soldering on metal chassis. plus the newmethod of radio construction known the answers for them. I have been in
as "Printed Circuitry. These circuits operate on your regular AC or DC house current. Radio for the last seven years. but Ilke
to work with Radio Kits, and Ilke to
THE "EDU-KIT" IS COMPLETE build Radio Testing Equipment, i en-
joyed every minute I worked with the
You will receive all parts and instructions necessary to build twenty different kits; the Signal Tracer works
electronics circuits, each guaranteed to operate. Our Kits contain tubes, different radio and
tube sockets,vari- fine. Also like to let you know that I
feel proud of becoming a member of your
able, electrolytic, mica, ceramic and paper dielectric condensers, resistors, tie strips. Radio-TV Club."
hardware, tubing, punched metal Chassis, Instruction Manuals, hook-up wire, solder, Robert L. Shoff. 1534 Monroe Ave..
selenium rectifiers, coils, volume controls and switches, etc. Huntington, W. Va.: "Thought I would
In addition. you receive Printed Circuit materials. including Printed
special tube sockets, hardware and Instructions. You also receive a useful Circuit
set of
chassis,
tools,
drop you a few lines to say that I re-
professional electric soldering iron, and a self -powered Dynamic Radio and Electronicsa ceived my Edu-Kit, and was really amazed
Tester. The Edu-Kit" also includes Code Instructions and the Progressive Code Oscillator, that such a bargain can be had at such
in addition to F.C.C. Radio Amateur License training. You will also receive lessons for a low price. I have already re-
servicing with the Progressive Signal Tracer and the Progressive Signal pairingiend radios phonographs. My
Fidelity Guide and a quiz Book. You receive Membership in Radio-TV [Link], a High
Free Consulta- into
were glydsurprisedrtoo hsee me
of
tion Service, CerEverything d Discount Privileges. You receive all parts, tools. Trouet

Instructions, etc. is yours keep ble-shootingnTestert thatogcocmes with

_ the Kit is really swell, and finds the
trouble. if there is any to be found.
UNCONDITIONAL MONEY-BACK GUARANTEE
PRINTED CIRCUITRY
At no increase in price, the 'Edu-Kit" ORDER FROM AD-RECEIVE FREE BONUS
now includes Printed Circuitry. You build RADIO & TV PARTS JACKPOT WORTH $15
a Printed Circuit Signal Injector, a
unique servicing instrument that can de- Send "Edu-Kit"
postpaid. I enclose full payment of $26.95.
tect many Radio and TV troubles. This G Send "Edu-Kit'
C.O.D. I will pay $26.95 plus postage.
revolutionary new technique of radio
construction is now becoming popular D Rush me FREE descriptive literature concerning "Edu-Kit."
in commercial radio and TV sets.
A Printed Circuit is a special insulated Name
chassis on which has been deposited a
conducting material which takes the Address
place of wiring. The various parts are
merely plugged in and soldered to ter-
minals.
Printed Circuitry is the basis of mod-
ern Automation Electronics. A knowledge PROGRESSIVE "EDU-KITS" INC.
of this subject is a necessity today for (ATT: S. GOODMAN, M.S. In ED.. PRES.)
anyone interested in Electronics. L 1186 Broadway, Dept. 509RR, Hewlett, N. Y. 1

CIRCLE NO. 31 ON READER SERVICE CARD

76 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Chapter
COMMUNICATIONS
for the HOBBYIST

ONE of our ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK con-

tributors has a knack of developing very workable but simple
receivers. He is Charlie Green, and in this issue your Editors
direct your attention to his 80 -meter and 2 -meter ham band
superhets. Another receiver sure to attract its share of atten-
tion is the "VHF Listener"-a superregenerative unit in-
corporating a squelch circuit. Hams and SWL's will find the
outboard accessories (the "SSB Product Detector," "Code
Bander," weather station converter, etc.) excellent construction
projects for one of those quiet weekends. If you don't have
a 100-kc. calibrator, we urge you to seriously consider the
special printed circuit board and circuit developed by author
Scheidel; this transistorized unit produces harmonics that are
perfectly readable well into the VHF part of the spectrum.

VHF Listener Walt Henry 78

SSB Product Detector R. M. Mendelson, W20K0 84
Crystal Super Calibrator R. A. Scheidel 87
2 -Tube Superhet for 80 Meters Charles Green, W3IKH 91

The WXCVR Hartland B. Smith, W8VVD 95

R.F. Coil Frequency -Finder Leon A. Wortman 98
The Code Bander Hartland B. Smith, W8VVD 101

Selected Projects from W9EGQ Herb S. Brier, W9EGQ 105

The Idento-Minder Hartland B. Smith, W8VVD 113
2 -Meter Simple Superhet Charles Green, W3IKH 116

1965 Spring Edition 77

 THERE'S a large and growing group article for similar receivers to cover the
made up of SWL's and other radio Citizens Band and 2 -meter ham band.
enthusiasts who like to eavesdrop on the About The Circuit. Signals picked up
goings-on in the 30-54 mc. and 108-148 by the extendible whip antenna are ap-
mc. bands, but who find the receiver plied via C2 to a tap on Li, shown in
problem a tough one. A good commercial Fig. 1. Capacitor Cl resonates L1 at
receiver for a part of this region of the the center of the band covered, and once
VHF spectrum can cost from one-tenth set, does not need retuning. Coil L2 is
to one-third of a kilo -buck, a non -trivial a single turn of wire which acts as a low -
sum for most of us. impedance secondary to L1, to match
In addition, home construction of a Q1's input impedance.
good superhet, such as the "VHF Adven- Transistor Q1 is the r.f. amplifier,
turer" (POPULAR ELECTRONICS, October, operating in a grounded -base circuit.
1963) requires a rather uncommon Power is shunt -fed to the collector via
amount of test gear and experience. The L3, which has relatively high impedance
usual alternative, the very simple super- across the band covered. Resistors R1,
regen receiver, has serious shortcomings. R2, and R3 set Q1's operating bias.
It tends to be unstable, seldom gives The Q1 output is applied to the Q2
equally good results all across its tuning detector stage via C5, shown in Fig. 2.
range, causes interference in other re- Tuning capacitor C6 and coil L4 make up
ceivers, and hisses like a nest of angry the oscillator tuned circuit which is con-
copperheads when there's no signal in- nected to the Q2 collector. Capacitor C7
put. is the feedback path for superregenera-
If these obstacles have kept you from tion. The 60-kc. quench frequency is de-
the VHF listening ranks in the past, termined mainly by the values of C8,
the "VHF Listener" is the answer to C9, and resistor R7.
your prayers. For sensitivity, simplicity, This detector differs from most super-
and low cost, the superregen circuit has regens by providing, in addition to the
been retained, but with modifications audio signal, a d.c. output proportional
that cure its major ills. to the r.f. input. This d.c. component
The actual unit described here covers controls the squelch circuit, which si-
the 108-130 mc. aircraft communications lences the set when there is no input.
band, but the basic circuit can be built The audio signal and d.c. squelch con-
to cover other bands between 10 and 170 trol voltage are taken from the detector
mc. with very little change other than through a filter made up of C10, C11, and
the use of different values of inductance R8. This prevents the 60-kc. quench
and capacitance in the tuned circuits. frequency from reaching and overload-
Required departures from the values ing the audio amplifier input.
used in the unit are given later in this The squelch circuit is a d.c. amplifier
78 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
VHF LISTENER
There's exciting listening in the VHF bands. Here's a potent
transistor receiver that will let you in on it for under $30

By WALT HENRY

that controls diode D1, which acts as a

gate. The audio signal reaches DI via
L3 -R3 CI -R2 GROUND
C13, but cannot pass through when the TIE POINT TO SHIELD
diode is reverse-biased. When a signal
CIRIT
is received, the d.c. level at the junction BOARD cl
R2
(BEHIND R3)
of L4 and R4 rises. This rise is ampli-
fied through Q3 and Q4, overcoming the
reverse bias on the DI diode gate. This
permits the audio signal to pass to the R3
audio amplifier input. If the incoming
r.f. signal is cut off, DI is again reverse - STAKED
NUT
biased by the voltage at the junction of L3
R17 and R18, and the detector hiss can-
not pass through.
The audio amplifier shown in Fig. 5 L I I

SOCKET
C2
CONN.
HOLE
R12
C6 SHAFT TAP SHIELD
RIO EXTENSION ON LI 4
RH
RI9 .a DIAL
MECHANISM
C3

SI,S2
STAKED
CI4 NUT
RI
L2
Fig. 2. Follow layout of Q1 r.f.
stage closely. Ground ends of
L1 and L2 are soldered to cir-
SPEAKER cuit board tie point (hidden be-
hind coils) and C3 -R1 junction.

JI
L6

C6

BACK
Fig. 1. Placement of major parts
PLATE BATTERY is not crowded. Holes in chassis
HOLDER under speaker are optional. Back
plate of prototype is removable
but Minibox assembly is O.K.

1965 Spring Edition 79

 Q4 Q3
C15 R4 L4 C6 LEADS LEADS

R9
-áC12
R13
R14
CIO
R15

CG -CIO R16
GROUND
TO SHIELD DI

R17

111111111111 LEAD C5 C9 R7 R6 C8 L5 Q2 R5 C7
FROM Ql LEADS

Fig. 3. Signal from Ql stage left of shield is coupled to detector by wire through hole in
shield. R.f. and squelch circuit transistors mount in sockets on front face of circuit board.

was made by the author, but the manu- but is inherently slightly regenerative
factured units given in the Parts List and may tend to oscillate if leads are not
are equally good, and require less work. kept short and direct. The 2N1517 tran-
Separate batteries are used to power sistor has an internal shield which
the r.f. and audio sections. Use of a should be grounded. This may be done
single battery tends to cause some motor - by connecting the shield lead directly to
boating due to interaction between the ground, or by connecting it to the base
squelch circuit and the audio amplifier lead, which is, in turn, effectively
when the battery internal impedance in- grounded by C4. The metal shield be-
creases with age and use. tween r.f. and detector stages provides
Construction. The mechanical construc- a convenient ground for both.
tion of the author's unit includes staked The detector stage may be laid out al-
nuts for holding the circuit board and most any convenient way as long as the
shield in the case. These are not readily leads are kept reasonably short, as shown
available to most home constructors, but in Fig. 3. During construction, omit R5
the small angle brackets sold in the "five - temporarily, as its optimum value will be
and -ten -cent" stores will serve just as determined by experiment. It probably
well. Alternatively, short lengths of will be approximately 22,000 ohms. The
aluminum or brass angle bracket can be shield lead of Q2 can be wired to ground,
used with either self -tapping or machine but this step is not vital.
screws. In case you have some high -frequency
The r.f. and squelch circuits are as- transistors in the spare parts box, any
sembled on a 21/2" x 51/2" piece of insul- of the following types will work quite
ated circuit board. The author used a well in either the r.f. or the detector
non -perforated board and drilled 1/16" stage. Tested examples include Philco's
holes for small push -in terminals for 2N502, 2N1742, 2N1743, and 2N1744, the
solder connections. However, a piece of Amperex 2N2084, and Texas Instru-
pre -punched Vectorbord and the "flea - ments' 2N797. Silicon npn types 2N743
clip" terminals made for it are ideal, and and 2N744 will also give excellent per-
are called for in the Parts List. formance. If npn transistors are used in
The only part of the circuit that must your version of the "Listener," however,
be laid out with care is the r.f. amplifier the polarities of B1, C12, C14, and D1
shown in Fig. 2. Such a grounded -base must be reversed, R6 must be 3300 ohms,
amplifier stage works very well at VHF, and Q3 and Q4 must be interchanged.
80 [Link] EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 [INT.
SHIELD
11C7 1
{{//

C2 RF AMP DETECTOR
T.00191. 01 C5 02
291517/0C171 ISpI. 2N1517/0C171 EMITTER
C
BASE
SHIELD

6 COLLECTOR 28388

3
O
OLi
0OL5 2NI51T/0C171 261309

L2y O C8 O
.001y1 41EE TEXT

RI
--C3
.003391. .66 22021
3-12p1. R2 R3 27p1.
IK 6bK
R5 R6
22K IK

Ca PT4
OOI I. L7 ORG GR
PHONES
-1/4_000

-
R8
IK
52
CIS.
.Olpf. p/.
.009 p1.
CIO
=.022f. 9V
BI -B2 9V
+
r
Oa N270
LB
.4741. GR N
2141309 VVV
RIG AUDIO
5.66 AMP
03
263138
,06B
3c
P
C14
100.
BLK PK-543
10V
C SPKR

B R19
$RIS RI
3I9K :15K .2 8.2K
VOLUME

Cl2
52f.
IOU

SQUELCH

R R12
Fig. 4. Leads for connecting sig-
2.76 2.7K nal, supply voltages, and ground
paths may run on either face of
SQUELCH AMP 8 GATE
L J circuit board, but should be direct.

PARTS LIST
B1 -9
-volt manganese transistor battery (Burgess
2MN6 or equivalent)
R5-See text
R7-220 ohms
all resistors /-watt
carbon unless other-
B2 -9
-volt transistor battery (Eveready 216 or R9, R13-10,000 ohms
R10, R12-2700 ohms
wise specified
equivalent)
CI -3-12 pf. ceramic trimmer capacitor R11 -3000-ohm potentiometer (IRC Q11-112 or
C2, C4, C8 -0.001-µf., 100 -volt disc cer. cap. equivalent)
C3-O.0033-µf., 100 -volt disc cer. capacitor R14-3900 ohms
C5 -15 -pf. tubular ceramic capacitor R15-15,000 ohms
C6-2.8-17 pf. variable capacitor (Hammarlund R17-1200 ohms
APC-15B or equivalent, modified as per text) R18-8200 ohms
C 7-4-pJ. tubular ceramic capacitor R19 -10,000-ohm potentiometer, with switch
C 9-27-pf. silver mica capacitor (Mallory U-20, with US -27, or equivalent)
C10, C11 -0.02-µf., 100 -volt disc cer. capacitor Sl, S2-D.p.s.t. switch, on R19 (Mallory US -27
C12 -5-µf., 10-volt electrolytic capacitor or equivalent)
C13 -0.47-µf., 100-volt tubular paper capacitor 1-7" x 5" x 3" Minibox (Bud 80P350 or equiva-
C14 -10-µf., 10 -volt electrolytic capacitor lent)
C15 -0.01-µf., 100-volt disc cer. capacitor 1-Transistor audio amplifier (Lafayette 99-9039
D1 -1N270 germanium diode or equivalent)
11-Subminiature phone jack, shorting type 1-Vernier dial mechanism (Lafayette 99-2516 or
Ll, L2, L4-See text equivalent)
L3, LS, L6, L7, L8-4.7 µh.-see text 1-Shalt coupler (Lafayette 32-6412 or equiv.)
Q1, Q2-2N1517/0C171 Amperex transistor 1-Extension shaft (Lafayette 32-6409 or equiv.)
(available from Newark Electronics Corp., 223 1-Telescoping whip antenna (Lafayette 99-3005
W. Madison St., Chicago, Ill., stock nr. or equivalent)
21FX2612-see text) 1-2 -inch speaker (Lafayette 99-6036 or equiv.)
1-21" x 5 " preperforated Vectorbord
Q3 -2N388 germanium transistor
(14-2N 1309 germanium transistor Misc.-3-lug terminal strip, hookup and coil wind-
121, R2, R6, R8-1000 ohms ing wire, transistor sockets, knobs, screws, etc.
R3-6800 ohms Note: For CB, R7 is 680 ohms, CS is 51 pf.,
R4, R16-5600 ohms C7 is 10 pf., C9 is 62 pf., Q2 is a 2.V370

1965 Spring Edition 81

VHF LISTENER
The specified tuning capacitor (C6) to point 2. Also connect point 3 directly
should be modified for use in the 108- to point 4 and eliminate battery B1 and
132 mc. aircraft or 2 -meter amateur switch Si.
bands. Remove all but one of the rotor The color coding on the schematic is
plates, and all but two of the stator for some Lafayette 99-9039 preassem-
plates, the rotor plate meshing between bled audio amplifiers. They come with
the two remaining stator plates. two orange leads which are meant to be
Coil L1 is made by winding 61/2 turns connected to a volume control on -off
of #14 tinned copper wire on a1/2" rod, switch. Since a different arrangement is
spaced 3/4" long. After removing the form- used, cut off the orange lead running to
ing rod, solder the tap at a point 21/2 one of the (now disconnected) battery
turns from the ground end of Ll. leads and leave the other one intact. Save
Coil L2 is ei of a full turn of #18 the battery clip for connecting to the
around the ground end of Ll. It should battery leads later on. The other needed
be grounded at the same point as LI, but battery clip may be salvaged from a
should not contact L1 elsewhere. Coil L4 worn-out battery of the same type.
is 3 turns of #18 wound on a %" rod, in The phone jack is connected so that
a 1/4" length. the speaker is turned off when the phones
For the Citizens Band, LZ requires 23 are plugged in.
turns of #28 enameled copper wire on a The case shown in the photographs
J. W. Miller 20A000RBI form, tapped 8 was handmade in an effort to give the
turns from the ground end. Coil L2 is "Listener" a professional appearance.
21/2 turns of the same wire close -wound However, the Minibox specified in the
over the ground end of Li. Coil L4 is 17 Parts List is quite satisfactory, and saves
turns of the same wire on the same type much work.
of coil form. Change Q2 to a 2N370. The dial is a 2" aluminum disc cut
Chokes L3 and L5 are 23-µh. units, Mil- from sheet material, but heavy artist's
ler 9310-44 or equivalent, and L6, L7, and board or stiff sheet plastic is equally
L8 are omitted. Also, C6a must be added good. If you use metal, sand the surface
in parallel with C6, which is not modified with very fine sandpaper and put the
for the Citizens Band. calibration marks on with India ink. A
If you decide to build the unit for the light priming coat of clear Krylon spray
2 -meter band, simply use one less turn in will make the ink flow on perfectly. After
making both Li and L4, and tap LZ two the ink has dried, spray several coats on
turns from the ground end. Also reduce the dial to protect the markings.
the value of C7 from 4 pf. to 3 pf. Testing and Calibration. Temporarily
R.f. chokes L3, L5, L6, L7, and L8 may connect a 0.1-µf. capacitor between point
be commercial 4.7-µh. units, but cheaper 1 and 2 on the schematic. This will by-
ones that work just as well can be made pass the squelch circuit while the detect-
by winding 36 -gauge copper wire on one- or is being tested. Connect a 10,000 -ohm
megohm resistors. Wind the turns close- resistor in series with a 100,000 -ohm
ly and cover the full length of a half- potentiometer and temporarily substitute
watt resistor. Strip the enamel off the this combination for bias resistor R5.
ends of the wire with fine sandpaper, Attach the fixed resistor end of the com-
wind around the resistor leads, and sol- bination to the base of Q2. Turn C6 to
der. Note that different choke values are minimum capacitance and connect the
required for the Citizens Band. antenna. With the audio volume turned
Layout is not important in the squelch up full, vary the 100,000 -ohm test bias
circuitry, but the construction shown in potentiometer. At some point a loud hiss
Fig. 3 is compact and neat. If you are will indicate correct detector operation.
leaving out the squelch feature, omit all With the temporary bias potentiom-
circuitry in the dotted rectangle on the eter still in place, calibrate the dial. If
schematic, and connect point 1 directly a grid dip meter is used, keep the signal
82 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Q3

AUDIO
AMP. ASSY.

Fig. 5. Audio amplifier board is sup-

JI ported clear of chassis on four long
screws. Batteries in holder attach to
back plate when unit is assembled.

weak by keeping dipper and Listener stant voltage until the end of its long
well separated. With a generator, a short life.
antenna plugged into the output may be When the detector is working satis-
needed. When the signal source is tuned factorily, remove the temporary capaci-
to the detector frequency, the audio hiss tor between points 1 and 2. With squelch
will drop noticeably in volume. The fre- control R11 fully counterclockwise, the
quency range tuned by the detector may detector hiss should be heard. When fully
be adjusted by squeezing or stretching clockwise, the audio output should be
L4 slightly to change its inductance. You silent. Check squelch operation over the
may also need to readjust the bias on Q2 entire tuning range. If it does not operate
with the temporary bias potentiometer. properly over the full range, a slight ad-
For the Citizens Band version, set the justment in the value of R12 may be
frequency range covered by adjusting necessary.
L4 and C6a in alternate steps. For most sensitive receiver operation,
Tune near the center of the band, and the squelch control should be set as close
adjust antenna capacitor C1 for loudest as possible to the turn -on point. If the
volume (or lowest hiss level if your sig- receiver is left on for extended periods
nal source is not modulated) . It will not of time, check the squelch setting peri-
be necessary to change this setting when odically.
tuning other parts of the band. Thanks to the relatively broad tuned
Now measure the total resistance of circuits of the Listener, tuning to a
the temporary resistor -potentiometer bias given channel is not critical. Also, the
combination, and install a fixed resistor broad tuning and very low warm-up drift
(R5) of the nearest standard value. The make the set stay "put" on a selected
optimum value for R5 depends slightly channel without constant retuning.
on the voltage of battery B1, and the de- If you have built the unit for the air-
tector may fail to operate near the high craft band, here's a word of caution.
end of the band when the voltage of an Even though the r.f. stage cuts detector
aging battery begins to drop. radiation to a relatively low value, very
If this happens with a relatively fresh sensitive aircraft receivers may still
battery, lower the value of R5 slightly. pick it up and experience troublesome
The current drain on both batteries is interference when they are very close.
only about 5 ma., so they will give many For this reason you should never operate
hours of service. A manganese -alkaline the VHF Listener while in a commercial
battery such as the Burgess 2MN6 is airliner, or closer than several hundred
ideal for B1 since it holds an almost con - feet to a control tower or airport. -EN-
1965 Spring Edition 83
 tH DETECTOR
PRODUCT
By R. M. MENDELSON, W2OKO

Compact nu. isllor detector unravels SSB signals

NUVISTORS have been described in put to the detector and raise the audio
r.f. converter and preamplifier cir- gain all the way to help reduce this
cuits but little has been published about distortion. The beat-frequency-oscilla-
other uses for this component in ama- tor injection voltage must also be
teur radio, especially where small size changed from that used for continuous -
is paramount. wave reception. In lower -priced re-
An excellent application for the RCA ceivers, running the audio at full gain
6CW4 nuvistor is in a miniature prod- often introduces hum. The receiver
uct detector that can be added to any a.v.c. cannot be used, but rather the r.f.
communications receiver-commercial, gain must be continuously adjusted
home -built, or surplus. The size of con- manually according to the strength of
ventional tubes has often made it diffi- each signal received. In a multistation
cult to construct an adapter small round table, this adjustment is quite a
enough to fit into a compact chassis. chore. Many of the weaker signals may
Advantages of Product Detector. When be lost altogether.
a conventional diode detector is used The best solution to the problem of
for single-sideband reception, the beat - good single-sideband reception is the
frequency oscillator must also be used use of the product detector, so named
to supply the carrier. Under these con- because the output voltage equals the
ditions, distortion usually results. It is algebraic product of the input signal
necessary to reduce the r.f. signal in- and the local oscillator voltages. It al -

V3 R4 C4 R6 BEHIND R7

A small piece of fiberboard drilled

at appropriate spots for Alden sol-
dering lugs was used to mount the
R8 detector components. Ten -watt resis-
tor R7 can be a fixed or a slider type
to obtain the 110 volts maximum
allowed for proper 6CW4 operation.
84 ELECTRC'rt'C EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 A.P. OUT o

IS. INO

NOTE 2C

NOTEI
R7
f+o WM.4,

Of r SI
C9 +76V.

)(TAL
I
L!
I
®®
USI
XTAL
2
6cw4 -1=
V4
CII

CIO
SOCKET PINS
(BOTTOM VIEW)

NOTE I -ADJUST B SUPPLY TO GIVE APPROX. 110 VOLTS MAX.

6.3V.0 TO THE 6CW4 PLATES
t0 2 @ 12I\
2 -ADJUST VALUE TO GIVE SIGNAL INPUT APPROX.
VI V2 V3 V4 .2 TO .4 VOLT
Ix 10 10 10
GNDO

PARTS LIST
A product detector is an absolute
necessity for good SSB reception. Cl, CIO--10-pf. disc ceramic capacitor
This uncomplicated circuit fea- ('2-82-p). disc ceramic capacitor
tures a crystal -controlled BFO. ('3, C9 -0.01-µJ. disc ceramic capacitor
C4, C7 -0.02-µf. plastic tubular capacitor
('5 -100 -pf. disc ceramic capacitor
C6 -1000 -pf. disc ceramic capacitor
C8 -20-u J.. 250-voll electrolytic capacitor
C'11-250-pJ. disc ceramic capacitor
R1 -500,000 -ohm, V., -watt resistor
R2--820-ohm, ,Z., -watt resistor
R3 -82,000 -ohm, h -watt resistor
V2 V3 C7
R4 -680 -ohm. Y2. -watt resistor
R5-47,000 -ohm, 5/2 -watt resistor
R6 -1000 -ohm, V -watt resistor
R7-10,000 -ohm, 10 -watt wire -wound resistor
R8 -10,000-ohm, %-watt resistor
R9--120,000-ohm, %-watt resistor
51 -3
-position selector switch
V1, V2. V3, V4-6CW4 nuvistor triode (RCA)
Xtal 1, Xtal 2-See accompanying table

lows operation of the r.f. control at full

gain with use of the receiver a.v.c., dis-
tortion -free reception, and a low value
of beat -frequency-oscillator insertion
voltage for good reception. The product
detector will also greatly improve con-
ventional code reception.
The circuit itself consists of three
VI triodes (V1, V2, and VS). The first tri-
V4 ode is a cathode -follower for coupling
Bottom view of the circuit board the signal from the i.f. stage of the re-
shows the various interconnections. ceiver to VS, which serves as a mixer
1965 Spring Edition 85
 SSB PRODUCT DETECTOR
stage. Triode V2 is a cathode coupler resort, conventional solder lugs can be
between the local oscillator (V4) and screwed to the board the particular
;
mixer tube V3. In the mixer, the re- type of lug is not important, nor is the
ceived signal and the local oscillator exact layout.
heterodyne to produce the audio out- Mounting of the nuvistor sockets re-
put. The undesired heterodynes are quires a little care because the sockets
filtered out of this stage, leaving a clean are too small to be bolted on and must
audio signal not dependent on the be held to the mounting board by two
strength of the input signal. bent lugs. It is best to drill a 31/61" -
In the unit described here, the local diameter hole and then hand -file two
oscillator is crystal -controlled to over- notches for the lugs. At least one lug
come the problems of stability that on each socket must be soldered to the
would be encountered from the beat - ground lead to insure a ground for the
frequency -oscillator stage of the many nuvistor shell when it is plugged in.
different ham receivers. It also provides The switch used to select the desired
the proper injection voltage; thus, even crystal is best mounted on the receiver
low-priced receivers can be used for panel, but should not be too far from
single-sideband reception without trou- the terminals. The choice of crystal
ble in keeping tuned to a station. frequencies is set by the receiver's i.f.
The nuvistor product detector shown One crystal should be above and one
in the photos uses four 6CW4 nuvistors below the center frequency of the i.f.
and yet is only 31/2" square by 21,.1" by about 1.5 kc. For the common 455-
high. If it were not for the crystals, kc. i.f., surplus crystals for channel 45
the total height would be only half as and channel 329 are suitable. Other
much. The nuvistor model works as i.f. frequencies and their proper surplus
well as the older models using conven- crystals are shown in the accompany-
tional tubes, but is less than one - ing table.
quarter the size. All power is obtained Operation. With no tuned circuits,
from the receiver; only 0.52 ampere at potentiometers, or other adjustable com-
6.3 volts and approximately 15 ma. at ponents, this product detector is ready
around 100 volts are required. to operate as soon as it is wined up. The
Construction. In constructing the cir- only precaution necessary is not to ex-
cuit, a piece of fiberboard is used with ceed the 6CW4's maximum plate -voltage
mounting lugs for all components. To rating of 110 volts. Actually, the de-
eliminate wiring errors, Alden No. 651T tector works best at about 90 volts, and
various values of R7 can be tried after
the unit is in operation.
CRYSTALS REQUIRED FOR VARIOUS I.F.'S
In some receivers, the value of ca-
pacitor C2 may have to be changed to
Receiver Upper Sideband Lower Sideband
I.F. (kc.) Crystal (kc.) Crystal (kc.)
prevent application of too strong an
455 453.7 (Ch. 45) 456.9 (Ch. 329)
input signal. The value should be ad-
915 913.5 (Ch. 87.7) 916.7 (Ch. 88)
justed to provide an input signal of
500 498.1 (Ch. 69)
between 0.2 and 0.4 volt at the grid of
501.8 (Ch. 71)
V1. With the oscillator disabled by re-
456 451.166 (Ch. 327) 457.4 (Ch. 47)
1600 1598.5
moval of V4, no audio signal should be
1601.5
heard leaking through the cathode -
followers.
Sideband is here to stay. Let's con-
lugs have been used in the model, but vert those receivers over to receive it
in their absence several preperforated properly and at the same time get bet-
boards and lugs are available in the ter continuous -wave and radioteletype-
ham market as substitutes. As a last writer reception. -®-
86 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 CRYSTAL
SUPER
CALIBRATOR
By R. A. SCHEIDEL

Like port and starboard channel buoys for

the navigator, crystal calibrator harmonics
mark the band edges for hams and others

NEXT TO MONEY, hardly anything serves certain needs of the

ham, the SWL, and the set builder better than a good crystal
calibrator. For the ham, those stable signals precisely 100 kc.
apart mark the band edges of most of the amateur bands with
an accuracy that removes the gnawing fear of an unwanted FCC
QSL for out -of -band operation. For the SWL, the rather sketchy
calibration of many short-wave receiver dials no longer causes
such exasperating difficulties when trying to identify an un-
known station. And the set builder and experimenter can cali-
brate the dial of the new receiver, oscillator, or other tunable
device with some assurance that the figures they put down on
the scale mean something definite.
Crystal calibrator kits are available from several companies,
and many receivers feature a plug-in socket for a calibrator, or
have a calibrator built in at the factory. Even so, the unit de-
scribed here has several solid advantages that more than justify
its moderate cost and the time required to build it.
First of all, the "super" calibrator is small, rugged, and can
be constructed as ci completely self-contained unit if you wish.
This makes it a natural choice for field day, portable, or mo-
bile use. it also means you don't need to cut into other equip-
ment to steal power, although of course you can power the unit
 cc:),:r(7:,:.(i
this way if you choose, and a circuit for
this construction scheme is provided.
Next, crystal current is very loW, even
if you elect to use the highest battery
voltage the design permits, and all other
sources of thermal frequency drift are
weak. For these reasons, stability is sig-
nificantly better than is usual for units
not operating in a temperature -controlled
oven.
Third, the super calibrator is so easy
to build, thanks to a high -quality
printed-circuit board, that you can
choose just about any final assembly
form that suits your own needs. This Where accurate frequency check points are a must,
as when checking a BC-221 at 100-kc. points, the
can range from building the unit into super calibrator speeds and eases the operation.
an existing receiver to making it the
basis for an elaborate home lab signal
source, with additional multivibrators to it presents a relatively low series im-
provide outputs at multiples and sub- pedance at 100 kc., and a relatively high
multiples of the basic 100-kc. frequency. impedance at all other frequencies near
Because of the "foolproofness" of the 100 kc. As a result, the circuit made up
design, constructors are encouraged to of Q1, Q2, and associated resistors and
adapt the unit to their own require- capacitors oscillates at 100 kc., since this
ments, although the version described is the only frequency at which there can
here can be duplicated exactly if desired. be enough positive feedback to sustain
And even for this completely self-con- oscillation. The exact frequency of oscil-
tained model, certain optional choices lation can be adjusted over a small range
are given in the Parts List. by means of padder capacitor C4, mak-
And as the final clincher, the super ing it possible to adjust the calibrator
calibrator provides usable harmonic out- to zero beat (of a harmonic) with WW V,
put to well beyond 100 mc., thanks to or another standard frequency signal
an output amplifier stage of optimum source.
design. This last feature alone should The base of output transistor Q3 is
perk up the interest of 6 -meter hams, coupled to the collector of Q2 by ca-
and DX'ers who comb the mobile bands pacitor Cl. Transistor Q3 is an npn
above 30 mc., for this is where many type (2N835) , and is capable of being
calibrators get feeble, and receiver gain switched from cutoff to fully conducting
also begins to droop. condition in about 10 nanoseconds. This
How It Works. The oscillating circuit high switching speed is just another way
of the super calibrator is essentially a of saying that it can handle very high
multivibrator, with the crystal connected frequencies.
in the feedback path from the collector Since the input waveform from the
of transistor Q2 to the base of transistor oscillator circuit is substantially a 100-
Ql. The crystal operates in this circuit kc. square wave, Q3 amplifies this wave
at its series -resonant frequency ; that is, and all harmonics to at least 100 mc.,
88 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 DI RII
IN663 100n All parts shown in the main schematic di-
TO 6.3VAC - WNW.* o+
FILAMENT agram mount on the circuit board, except
wINOIN6 the crystal (X1) and padder capacitor (C4)
rf. which mount separately on the box cover.
T
rr.
Six -volt power supply circuit is optional.
o
PARTS LIST.
B1*-1.5 -volt to 10 -volt battery to supply 4- to RS-- 27,000 ohms f all resistors
12 -ma. drain-see text Rh, R7-100,000 ohms l carbon, % watt
C1 -330 -pf. silver mica capacitor, voltage rat- R8-18,000 ohms
ing not important R9-16,000 ohms
C2, C3 -200 -pf. silver mica capacitor, voltage R10-6200 ohms
rating not important S1*-Any small on -off switch-see text
C4-7 -to -100 pf. air dielectric variable capaci-
tor, ceramic insulation (alternate for easier fine
X1-100-kc. standard type crystal (Petersen
Z -6A or equivalent)
adjustment; 7-to -24 pf. size) 1-Printed circuit board (available from R. A.
C5-10 -pf. silver mica capacitor, voltage rating Scheidel, 22 W. Elm, Fremont, Mich., $3.00,
not important three-week delivery)
.11 *-Crystal jack, to suit 100-kc. crystal used- 1-Small aluminum box (4" x 4" x 2" used here)
see text Misc.-Binding post (BPI) or pin jack for out-
Ql, Q2 -2N404 pnp transistor puts, screws and spacers for mounting board,
Q3 -2N835 npn transistor hookup wire, solder, rubber feet for box, etc.
Rl, R4-620 ohms
R2, R3-56,000 ohms *.,Vot shown in schematic, constructor's option

01 POWER CONNECTION (-)

02 PADDER CONNECTION

POWER CONNECTION (+1

04 OUTPUT CONNECTION

OCRYSTAL CONNECTION

Parts placement is set

by circuit board layout.
Note orientation of the
transistor locating lugs
when inserting leads in
R7 C3 R3 R4 111 RI R2 R6 C2 121 CI R5 circuit board openings.
1965 Spring Edition 89
 Physical location of components in final
assembly of version shown is not critical.

TO CRYSTAL JACK

TO PADDER

BI

and delivers the amplified version to the pacitor, C4, and the crystal jack (if one
output terminal through C5. The output is used) on the other box cover, as
stage is of relatively low impedance, so shown in the illustration. The crystal
that moderate loading such as by the in- can be soldered into the circuit if de-
put circuit of a receiver under test will sired, but most constructors may prefer
not seriously reduce the output or alter to mount a ceramic crystal jack as
the unit's frequency stability. shown, and insure the crystal against
Construction. The type of box chosen accidental removal due to jarring by
to enclose the unit does not affect the securing a rubber band around the hold-
construction greatly, since almost all of er and crystal can.
the parts are mounted on the printed - Mount the output binding post and
circuit board. However, the type of the on -off switch on one side of the box
switch chosen, and the type and size of frame, and the battery holder on the op-
the battery used to power the unit do posite side.
affect the choice of the box, so it is well Wire the circuit parts on the printed -
to select these components before you circuit board in the positions shown. Use
buy the box. normal care in soldering, and be sure to
If you choose to duplicate the con- use a heat sink (such as a copper alli-
struction illustrated, begin by drilling gator clip or pair of long -nose pliers)
holes for 4 x 32 machine screws in the when soldering the transistor leads.
three corners of the printed -circuit board When all parts have been soldered in
that are clear of printed conductors. By place and the ends of the leads have
drilling before the parts are mounted on been trimmed close to the solder surface,
the board, the chance of damaging any- connect five pieces of insulated hookup
thing is greatly reduced. With the holes wire to the points on the board num-
in the board drilled, use the board as a bered 1 through 5 in the photograph
template to locate the mounting holes showing the mounted parts. If you use
to be drilled in one of the box covers. a different color for each wire, it will
In doing this, be sure to spot the holes help prevent errors when you make the
so the board will clear the lip of the box final hookup. Leave these wires long
when it is mounted on the cover, noting enough to permit completion of the wir-
that the board will be supported far ing when the board and other compo-
enough from the cover to allow ample nents are mounted in their final positions.
clearance for the solder side. At this point you can either "go for
With this done, mount the padder ca- (Continued on page 151)
90 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 2 -TUBE SUPERHET
FOR 80 METERS

The 80 -meter band remains a perennial favorite. Here's a receiver

that will let you in on the fun with little outlay of hours and dollars

By CHARLES GREEN, W3IKH

HERE'S a simple, easy -to -build receiver for the 80 -meter band that can do a
real job for the novice, or as a standby receiver for the experienced old-
timer. Costing less than $30 to build, even with all -new parts, it uses only two
tubes in a superhet circuit, yet provides remarkable sensitivity and fully
adequate headphone output, thanks to a regenerative second detector.
Use of regeneration with panel control also makes the receiver usable on
either phone or c.w. signals, and the built-in power supply makes it unnecessary
to "steal" power from other sets in the shack. Sharp-eyed EEH readers will note
a family resemblance to the 6 -meter superhet which appeared in the 1964
HANDBOOK and the 2 -meter superhet in this edition. This is far from accidental,
for the basic circuit is sound, and lends itself to construction by experimenters
not blessed with a shop full of test equipment.
ABOUT THE CIRCUIT. Eighty -meter signals from the antenna enter via jack 12,
and are fed to the fixed -tuned circuit made up of 11 and Cl, and to the grid
1965 Spring Edition 91
 CII
330pí.

C9
IgT2
3 CIS
VIA V24 V2B
I/2 -6U8 1/2-12ATT 6 I/2-12AT7
f/
Cl2 #
330pí i-005pf. C14

JI
iO .001
yl.

ANT.
.0051T O
_ R2
R3
100
O
O IOOKt
R9 RI3
IOOK
J2
PHONES
470N K
C13 .`
I 1 eyr.
C21
.00Spf.
6V

RIO
GIMMICK
(SEE TESTI - GAIN
IN
REGEN.
VIB NMhN
1/2-61)8 11
4.76
C7 R5 R14 DI
330pf. 6811 1.8K
1tu C16
TI
005 JJOSyf.
C5 Pf.
220pí. SI(ON 641

.005y f.
20yf.
150V
.0050. VAC
GRN
L AND L2 BASE T2 BASE -_ 4 V VI
9
12ÁT7 6Ú8
S
I 2 4 GRN
0
4 3
s TD.

INDEX HOLE GREEN DOT

Values of capacitors C5 and C6 affect the bandspread. Reducing the value of C5 increases
the arc of the dial occupied by the 80 -meter band; increasing C5 reduces the bandspread.

Point-to-point wiring permits mounting most small parts on lugs of major parts as shown.

92 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 of mixer tube V1a. Main tuning capaci-
PARTS LIST tor C4 is connected in parallel with C6,
and the combination is in series with C5
C1--100-pf., 500 -volt silver mica capacitor to make up the total capacity that tunes
C2, C7, CO, CIO, C11 -330 -pf., 600 -volt ce-
ramic tubular capacitor oscillator coil L2. This arrangement
C3, C8, C12, C15, C16, C18, C19, C20, C21- gives a good spread of the 80 -meter
0.005-µf., 600 -volt ceramic disc capacitor
C4 -365 -pl. variable tuning capacitor (Lafay- band over practically the whole dial arc.
ette 32-1103 or equivalent) The "gimmick" capacitor made of two
C5 -220 -pf., 500 -volt silver mica capacitor
C6 -270 -pf., 500 -volt silver mica capacitor twisted insulated wires couples the out-
C13 -8-µf., 6 -volt miniature electrolytic capaci- put of oscillator V lb to the grid of V 1a,
tor and the resultant 455-kc. difference -
C14 -0.001-µf., 600 -volt ceramic disc capacitor
C17-Dual 20-µf., 150-volt electrolytic capaci- frequency signals are connected by C9
tor from the plate of Via to T2. GAIN con-
D1-400-PIV, 450 -ma. silicon rectifier (Interna-
tional Rectifier Type 5E4 or equivalent) trol R4 varies the conversion gain of
11-Phono jack, chassis type the mixer stage so the signal will not
!2-Earphone jack (to match your phones) overload V2a, the detector stage. Coil
L1-Antenna coil (Stancor RTC -8762 or equiva-
lent) T2 is fixed -tuned by its adjustable core
L2-Oscillator coil (Stancor RTC-8764 or equiv- to 455 kc., and REGEN control R10
alent)
Rl, R11-1 megohns All fixed resistors varies the regenerative action of the
R2-470,000 ohms /z watt, 10%, car - detector stage.
R3, R9, R13-100,000 ohms bon unless other- The detected audio signals are fed
wise noted
R4-1-megohm linear taper potentiometer (with through capacitor C12 to V2b and ampli-
switch S1) fied. Capacitor C15 couples the ampli-
R5-68 ohms
R6-47,000 ohms fied signals to phone jack J2. Power
R7-4700 ohms transformer Ti, rectifier Di, and the
R10-50,000 -ohm linear taper potentiometer
R12-1000 ohms filter circuit made up of resistor R14 and
R14 -1800 -ohm, 2 -watt, 10% carbon resistor capacitor C17 provide the operating volt-
S1-S.p.s.t. switch (part of R4) ages for the receiver.
T1-Power transformer: primary, 117 volts, a.c.;
secondary 1, 125 volts, 15 ma.; secondary 2, Construction. A metal 8" x 6" x 41A"
6.3 volts, 0.6 ampere (Knight 61G410 or
equivalent)
utility box and a 8" x 4%" chassis shelf
T2-455-kc. slug -tuned
i.f. amplifier input trans- of aluminum sheet are used to house
former (Meissner 16-6758 or equivalent) the components. The chassis shelf is
V1-6U8A tube mounted by a pair of angle brackets
V2-12AT7 tube
1-Dial (Eddystone #598) 10%" from the base of the utility box.
1-Shaft coupling (National TX -10) The parts placement shown in the
1-8" x 6" x 4%" aluminum utility box (LMB photographs is fairly critical, especially
146 or equivalent)
1-8" x 4A" aluminum sheet (for chassis shelf) in the mixer -oscillator circuits of V I.
Mist."K Tran" mounting plates (Miller 181 Begin construction by mounting the
or equivalent), tube sockets, angle brackets.
grommets, terminal strips, knobs, A" metal chassis shelf and components as indi-
spacers, line cord and plug, wire, etc.) cated.
Coils Li and L2 are supplied with

Position of tuning capacitor C4 is shown above.

Other major parts placement is given at right.

1965 Spring Edition 93

 J2 RIO ANGLE BRACKET
Si (10F2)

JI

Dimensions and orienta-

LINE tion of parts should be fol-
3/4
CORD lowed closely to duplicate
GROMMET
the author's results. All
holes should be deburred
before final assembly.
11/4

13/4 ALL MEASUREMENTS

8'X43/8'
ALUMINUM PLATE IN INCHES

mounting clips only. The author used tubes and connect the receiver to the
"K Tran" mounting plates, similar to a.c. line. Insert a pair of high -impedance
the plate supplied with T2. If these earphones into J2, and warm up the re-
mounting plates cannot be procured, ceiver for a while.
duplicates of the T2 plate can be made Then turn up the REGEN control un-
or spaced holes can be drilled in the til you hear the typical regenerative
chassis to mount the coils by their clips. hiss. Set the TUNING control to full
Short pieces of insulated sleeving capacity and the GAIN about midway.
should be placed over the coil terminals Connect a signal generator or other
of L1 and T2 to prevent accidental source with an output of 3.5 mc. to Ji.
shorting to the chassis, since the plates Loosen the locking nut on the slug of
are not an exact fit and also may move coil L2 and rotate the tuning slug down-
a bit. The author enlarged the shield wards until it is almost flush with the
can clip holes to fit "K Tran" type nut; then adjust the slug upwards until
mounting clips, but the clips supplied you hear the test signal, and tighten
with the coils can be used as well. the locking nut. In a pinch, you can use
Two 6-32 machine screws with spacers a signal you know is at the low end of
made of seven metal washers for each the 80 -meter band for this adjustment.
were used to mount tuning capacitor C4 Disconnect the signal generator and
to the chassis. The spacing of the tun- connect a 15' insulated wire to Ji. Loose-
ing capacitor, the shaft coupling, and ly couple the signal generator to the
the vernier dial must be fairly accurate, wire by twisting a small piece of insu-
so use care in mounting these parts. lated wire around it and connecting the
After wiring the mixer -oscillator end to the signal generator. Reset the
stages of V1, form the "gimmick" ca- signal generator to 3.75 mc., and rotate
pacitor by soldering two short pieces of the TUNING control until the signal is
insulated wire to pins 2 and 7 of V1 and heard. Loosen the locking nut on the
twisting the ends together two turns. slug of coil LZ and adjust the slug for
Make sure that you drill a series of maximum signal, decreasing the GAIN
holes in the back of the rear box cover, control as necessary to prevent over-
to provide a means of ventilation for loading the detector. Now reset the gen-
the receiver. erator to 3.5 mc., and proceed with the
Testing and Calibration. After the con- calibration of the dial. The author cali-
struction is finished, adjust the bottom brated the dial every 10 kc. to 4 mc.
iron core of coil T2 all the way out, as A transmitter VFO or GDO can also
far as it will go. This is necessary to be used for alignment and calibration.
limit the maximum regenerative feed- If no equipment is available, set the tun -
back of the circuit of V2a. Install the (Continued on page 161)
94 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 MODEL 66-38
i'ERHETEKfilDYNE

WXCV R
FROM ANTENNA

THE
If weather is important to you in your work or leisure, get

the best information Uncle Sam can provide by tuning in the

airline forecasts. The WXCVR lets you do it the easy way.

By HARTLAND B. SMITH, WBVVD

TIRED of being rained out at ball the state of the weather in surrounding
games, drowned out at picnics, and areas and neighboring states. Armed
snowed in on trips ? Thanks to the Fed- with this data, you'll be able to do a
eral Aviation Authority's continuously better job of planning both recreational
repeated weathercasts, you can now usu- and business activities.
ally avoid disappointing and inconven- These aeronautical weathercasts are
ient happenings of this kind. transmitted in the low -frequency avia-
Twenty-four hours a day, seven days tion band between 200 and 400 kc., and
a week, the stations listed in the accom- therefore cannot be picked up by ordi-
panying table transmit up-to-the-minute nary broadcast -band or short-wave re-
taped forecasts, and report the current ceivers. However, the WXCVR (radioese
temperature, humidity, barometric pres- for "weather -receiver") described here
sure, wind velocity and direction for provides an inexpensive answer to this
major cities within a radius of several reception problem. It converts low -fre-
hundred miles. A few moments of eaves- quency weather signals to an unused
dropping on these transmissions will not channel near the middle of the broadcast
only inform you of what to expect, lo- band for easy detection by any home or
cally, within the next twelve hours, but portable radio. Costing less than $7, the
will also give you an excellent idea of device can be assembled in a single eve-
1965 Spring Edition 95
ping and will receive FAA stations
as far as 250 miles away.
How It Works. As an example,
suppose you want to hear the Den-
ver forecast transmitted on 379 kc. Completed WXCVR is neat and compact.
Radio energy at this frequency in-
tercepted by the antenna causes r.f.
current to flow through coil L1 and
the primary of transformer Ti.
Inductive coupling between the
transformer windings induces a
signal in the secondary of Ti
which, together with the combined ca-
pacities of CA and C2, forms a parallel
circuit resonant at 379 kc. From the
tap on Ti, the signal flows through
the feedback winding of L2 and is
then applied, via Cl, to the base of
transistor Ql.
When switch 21 is closed, Q1 operates
as an oscillating detector, due to posi- cies above 1 mc. minimizes such unwant-
tive feedback through oscillator coil L2. ed signals before they reach the base of
The exact frequency of oscillation is de- Q1, where they might cause interference
termined by the capacity of C4 and the to a desired weathercast.
setting of L2's variable slug. In this Construction. All parts, with the ex-
case, oscillation at 1529 kc. is desired. ception of C3, L3 and B2 are housed in-
The 379-kc. and 1529-kc. signals pres- side the cover of a 3%" x 2%" x 15/8"
ent at Ql's base are mixed in the tran- Minibox. Miniature components and a
sistor to produce additional signals at simple circuit result in plenty of working
the sum of the two frequencies, 1908 kc., space inside the box, despite the small
and the difference frequency, 1150 kc. size. Parts layout is not critical al-
Loopstick L3 and capacitor C3 are reso- though it is best to follow, in a general
nated at 1150 kc. Direct connection be- way, the arrangement shown.
tween converter and broadcast receiver Most capacitor and resistor leads go
is normally unnecessary, since the strong either to the coil and switch terminals,
1150-kc. field surrounding L3 can be or to ground lugs. A three -terminal
readily picked up by the receiver's loop miniature insulated tie strip mounted
antenna. near the center of the cover supports
The high impedance of Li to frequen- QI and its associated components. When

FAA AUTOMATIC RADIO WEATHER BROADCASTS

Locality Kc. Locality Kc. Locality Kc. Locality Kc.
Albuquerque, N. M. 230 Duluth, Minn. 379 Millinocket, Me. 344 Redmond, Ore. 368
Amarillo, Tex. 251 Elmira, N. Y. 375 Milwaukee, Wis. 242 Roanoke, Va. 371
Atlanta, Ga. 266 El Paso, Tex. 242 Minneapolis, Minn. 266 Rock Springs, Wyo. 290
Big Spring, Tex. 326 Elko, Nev. 391 Missoula, Mont. 308 St. Louis, Mo. 338
Billings, Mont. 400 Ft. Worth, Tex. 365 Newark, N. J. 379 San Antonio, Tex. 254
Birmingham, Ala. 224 Fresno, Calif. 344 New Orleans, La. 338 S. Ste. Marie, Mich. 400
Blythe, Calif. 251 Garden City, Kans. 257 North Platte, Nebr. 224 Seattle, Wash. 260
Boise, Idaho 359 Great Falls, Mont. 371 Oakland, Calif. 362 Spartanburg, S. C. 248
Boston, Mass. 382 Houghton, Mich. 227 Oklahoma City, Spokane, Wash. 365
Bozeman, Mont. 329 Houston, Tex. 332 Okla. 350 Tampa, Fla. 388
Burlington, Vt. 323 Idaho Falls, Idaho 350 Ogden, Utah 263 Texarkana, Ark. 329
Casper, Wyo. 269 Indianapolis, Ind. 266 Omaha, Nebr. 320 Tonopah, Nev. 221
Charleston, S. C. 329 Jacksonville, Fla. 344 Pendleton, Ore. 341 Traverse City, Mich. 365
Chicago, III. 350 Kansas City, Mo. 359 Pensacola, Fla. 326 Trinidad, Colo. 329
Cincinnati, Ohio 335 Knoxville, Tenn. 257 Pittsburgh, Pa. 254 Tucson, Ariz. 338
Cleveland, Ohio 344 Las Vegas, Nev. 206 Portland, Ore. 332 Tulsa, Okla. 245
Delta, Utah 212 Los Angeles, Calif. 332 Raleigh, N. C. 350 Washington, D. C. 332
Denver, Colo. 379 Miami, Fla. 365 Rapid City, S. D. 254 Wichita, Kans. 332
Detroit, Mich. 388 Miles City, Mont. 320 Red Bluff, Calif. 338 Winslow, Ariz. 266

96 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 2 5 3

TI 01
2N1526
PARTS LIST
BOTTOM VIEW
B1 -9 -voit transistor battery
Cl, C5, C6 -0.01-µf. ceramic disc capar-
itor
C2 -470 -pf. ceramic capacitor
C3-680-pj. ceramic capacitor
C4 -68 -pf. ceramic capacitor
L1-1-mh. r.f. choke (National R-50 (r
equivalent)
L2-455-kc. transistor oscillator coil
(Miller 2020)
L3-Superex Vari-Loopstick (or Meissner
14-9015 coil)
Q1 -2N1526 transistor
R1-8200 ohms All resistors
R2-1000 ohms V2 -watt,
R3-100,000 ohms 10% carbon
S1-S.p.s.t. slide switch
T1*-455-kc. transistor input i.f. trans-
former (Miller 2041)
TS1-Antenna-ground terminal strip
1-3%" x 2/" x 1/" aluminum box
(Bud CU -2101-A or equivalent)
Misc.-3-terminal miniature tie strip, bat-
tery connector, 4-36 machine screws
L2 and nuts, wire, solder, etc.
BOTTOM
VIEW
*Capacitor CA shown on the schematic
diagram inside the shield can of TI is
part of the manufactured Ti assembly

One -transistor converter cir-

cuit of WXCVR is simple and
easy to get into operation.
C2 L2

Parts placement is uncritical,

but layout shown leaves room
for easy assembly and wiring.

TI CI

R3
C6

SI

Find optimum position for L3

before mounting WXCVR per-
manently on back of BC set. TS' C5 R2 TO BI

soldering the transistor in place, be sure

to use a heat sink between the iron and
the transistor body. A copper alligator
clip or long -nosed pliers will do the job.
Carefully remove and discard the
square aluminum can surrounding Ti.
Position the transformer as shown.
Make certain that the slot in its tuning
slug is directly behind the :%c" "RF"
tuning hole. Solder terminal 3 to a
(Continued on page 154)
1965 Spring Edition 97
*Mg WHILE there's nothing wrong with
the time-honored cut -and -try tech-
IF. C®iÎll
No more hit-or-miss coil

Drill a hole to mount C2 close to the

other end of the box. Locate holes for
nique of winding coils for a receiver or the coil jacks, J2 and J3, in the end of
transmitter, you can save yourself a lot the box near C2. Terminal J1 is mounted
of time and trouble by building this sim- at the opposite end near the meter. Both
ple "R.F. Coil Frequency -Finder" for use J1 and J2 must be insulated from the
with an external signal source such as an metal box. Wiring is done point-to-point,
r.f. signal generator, a VFO, or a grid keeping leads as short as possible; use
dipper. a heat sink when soldering Di.
The design of the unit is straight- Although a 100-µa. meter was used in
forward. The unknown coil is connected the author's model, a 50-µa. movement
in parallel with C2, a midget 140 -pf. will give better sensitivity (although
variable capacitor, through J2 and J3. possibly at greater cost) . In any case,
The only power required is the r.f. fur- a miniature meter of the relatively in-
nished by the signal source through expensive imported variety should prove
J1 -C1. When the coil and C2 resonate perfectly satisfactory.
with the external r.f. source, energy is Install a knob with a pointer on C2's
absorbed by the circuit and rectified by shaft, and calibrate C2, marking the
D1, giving a reading on the 50- or 100 - minimum point (C2 fully open) 10 pf.
meter, M1. and the maximum point 150 pf. (C2
Construction. Cut a hole for M1 near fully closed) . From these two points,
one end of the 214" x 214" x 4" Minibox. estimate the 75- and 100 -pf. points

External r.f. source-signal generator or VFO-is the only power required to operate the unit.

98 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

Frqun©y= Fónaer
winding-all it takes is a meter, a few parts, and r.f. source
By LEON A. WORTMAN

and mark them on the panel. Decals, if be read directly on the dial of the r.f.
available, will make a professional -look- generator. Keep the output low, consist-
ing scale. The markings (slightly greater ent with a readable indication on M1.
than C2's maximum and minimum ca- A VFO can be used in the same manner.
pacities to compensate for the unit's If the r.f. source is poorly calibrated,
internal capacity) will be only roughly you can double-check by tuning its sig-
accurate, but quite adequate in this ap- nal in on an accurate receiver.
plication. To use the Frequency -Finder with a
Operation. To use the Frequency - grid -dip oscillator, plug the appropriate
Finder with an r.f. generator, simply coil into the dipper, set it in the oscil-
connect the center conductor of the out- lating mode, and bring it to within a
put cable to Ji, leaving the shield un- few inches of the unknown coil. Adjust
connected. Connect the unknown coil to the tuning dial of the grid dipper for
J2 -J3, keeping leads as short as possible. peak indication on Ml. Read the resonant
If the coil is to be used with a capacitor frequency from the dial of the grid dip-
of any type, set C2 to that value ; other- per, ignoring, for this test, the dipper's
wise, at minimum. own meter and sensitivity control.
Sweep across the desired frequency Other Uses. Another method of using
range with the r.f. signal generator until the Frequency -Finder is to set the ri.
you find the resonant point indicated by source at a predetermined frequency,
a maximum reading on Mi. The resonant and adjust C2 to determine how much
frequency of the coil and C2 can then capacitance is required to make the un-
known coil resonate.
The value of a small capacitor can be
estimated with the unit. Connect a coil
to J2 -J3, set C2 at 150 pf., and tune
the r.f. source for maximum indication.
Connect the unknown capacitor in paral-
lel with the coil at J2 -J3, and reset C2
for maximum indication. The value of
the unknown capacitor is approximately
equal to the maximum value of C2
(150 pf.) minus the new setting of C2
that restores M1 to maximum reading.
Coils are easy to add to, or subtract

Frequency -Finder is mounted in small Minibox; all

from, if you use the Frequency -Finder
first-try it. --
wiring is done point-to-point to keep leads short.
,,.,,1111,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,1,1,.,,11,,,,., PARTS LIST ,,,,,,,11,111,1,11,,,,,,,,,,,111111,,,,,,,,,w
C1 -10
-pf. mica or ceramic capacitor
C2 -140 -pf. midget variable capacitor
C3 -0.001-µf. ceramic disc capacitor
Dl-1N34A diode or equivalent
11, 12, 13-Insulated binding posts or jacks
M1-50 or 100 µa. d.c. microammeter
1-2%" x 2%" x 4" aluminum box
1-Knob with pointer
1

1965 Spring Edition 99

Electronics
Enthusiasts!
Take a great big discount
on a subscription to

POPULAR ELECTRO
85
18 moni tn;on,3 EXCLUSIVE HAM, SW & CB
At the regular subscription rate these same 18 ARTICLES IN POPULAR ELECTRONICS
issues would cost all of $6.00! BUT NOT FOR Amateur Radio and SWL
YOU. Your low price is $3.85-a saving of $2.15. Make Your Signal Reports More Accurate
Safety in the Ham Station
Every month, POPULAR ELECTRONICS brings you a Amateur License Fees and ARRL Petitions
Take Advantage of Changing Propagation
wealth of fascinating features aimed especially at
Conditions
experimenters and do-it-yourselfers like yourself. Operating Another Ham's Station
(Just glance to the right for a sample!) Calling All SWL DX'ers
DX Awards
You'll enjoy being right on top of the fast-growing English -Language Newscasts to North
world of electronics with up-to-the-minute new prod- America
uct reports, lab tests, buying guides, and electronics Radio Marathon Broadcasts Truth
breakthroughs you want to know about. Plenty of To Cuba
Satelliteson the Air
articles on hi-fi, money-saving test equipment, tape Short -Wave Broadcast Predictions
recorders, electronic games, computers, photo -aids, Short -Wave Report
short wave receivers, antenna systems, solar pow- North American Alliance of SWL Clubs
ered and transistorized equipment-and much more. Welcome to the SWL Newcomer
Sure Cure for Ham/CB Mobile Noise
Construction projects galore! Clear -as -crystal dia- Citizens Band Radio
grams guide you each step of the way through fun- "DSRC," New CB Features
to -build projects you can put together in just a few Equipment Buyer's Guide
hours...for pennies! Turn friends green with envy by Transmitters and Transceivers
Station Accessories
building a super hi-fi rig they couldn't match in the Antennas
stores for hundreds of dollars! Or throw together a Microphones
fool -proof photoelectric burglar alarm to protect your Hand -Held Transceivers
home and loved ones...or a remote control switch FCC Report
On the Citizens Band
that actually turns lights on and off when you whistle Sure Cure for Ham/CB Mobile Noise
a bar of your favorite tune! Vibrator Hash, Wipe Out
Pit yourself against the experts in monthly Electronics Build -It-Yourself
Quizzes. And see if you're enough of a Sherlock to Antenna, 40 -Meter, for Small Roof
Antenna Aadapter, Power Line
beat Carl and Jerry to the solution of crimes it takes Code Bander
electronics know-how to solve! Crystal Super Calibrator
Double -Duty EICO 772
POPULAR ELECTRONICS is definitely for men like Hula -Hoop --a Ham or CB Antenna
YOU. Take advantage of this special Discount Offer Idento-Minder
to readers of the Experimenter's Handbook. Just Q -Multiplier, Nuvistor
Screen Modulator, One -Tube
complete and mail the card facing this page. Or, if Transmitter Crystal Switch, Plug-in
someone has already used the card, write to: 2 -Meter Simple Superhet
POPULAR ELECTRONICS, Dept. 4066,
Portland Place, Boulder, Colorado 80301
 Titis stable -front-end*" UFO makes CR'
and SSIt sets uat tif marginal reeeirerS

By HARTLAND B. SMITH, W8VVÜ

Despite the well -deserved popularity of c.w. and single-

sideband among radio amateurs, both modes of
operation-and especially sideband (SSB) -can create
some annoying problems on the receiving end. They can't
be copied on a receiver which lacks a beat frequency
oscillator (BFO). Without some means for generating
a stable local carrier (the function of a BFO) , the
prospective Novice finds it impossible to practice code
reception, and the curious SWL has a hard time decipher-
ing sideband QSO's. Furthermore, many inexpensive or
elderly ham receivers, even when equipped with BFO's,
drift so badly that the operator must constantly retune
to keep from losing the desired signal.
Luckily, there is now a simple answer to these prob-
lems-an amazingly stable, simple gadget called the
"Code Bander." This easily constructed receiver accessory
will enable you to copy code and sideband on any receiver
1965 Spring Edition 101
 that covers the amateur also supply a beat note for effective
frequencies. If you're pres- code reception. Designed for connection
ently DX'ing with a broad- to the set's antenna terminals, it can
cast/short-wave combina- be installed without tearing into your
tion that lacks a BFO, or receiver's vitals.
if you're struggling along The Code Bander contains two inex-
with a simple regenera- pensive transistors: QZ, which serves as
tive set or a communica- a highly stable oscillator, and Q2, which
tions receiver that drifts acts as an r.f. amplifier. The oscillator
badly, this useful little can be tuned to any frequency in the 3.5
device will greatly im- to 4 mc. amateur band by adjusting the
prove your receiving capabilities. coarse tuning capacitor, C2. Vernier
How It Works. Unlike ordinary BFO's, capacitor Cl provides the extreme band -
the Code Bander does not operate at the spread required to accurately zero on a
receiver's intermediate frequency. In- specific signal.
stead, it produces r.f. energy on or near Both the fundamental and harmonics
the frequency of the desired station. It of the oscillator frequency are present at
will turn a quacking sideband signal in- jack Ji. Thus, the Code Bander can be
to easily understood AM phone, and will used not only on 80 meters, but on 40,

PARTS LIST
BI -9 -volt transistor battery (Burgess 2U6 or Q1, Q2 -2N1180 transistor
equivalent) R1-1500 ohms
C1-15 -pi. variable capacitor (Hammarlund HF - R2-47,000 ohms
15 -X or equivalent) R3-270,000 ohms
C2-140-pJ. variable capacitor (Hammarlund R4-6800 ohms All resistors
MC -140-S or equivalent) R5-560 ohms /-watt, 10%
C3-39-pJ. NPO ceramic capacitor (Centralab R6-100,000 ohms
TCZ-39 or equivalent) R7-10,000 ohms
C4, C5 -560 -pf. silver mica capacitor (Elmenco R8-470 ohms
CM -20-D-5611 or equivalent) R9-5000 -ohm potentiometer with switch SI
C6, C7, C9-.0047 -µf. disc capacitor RFC-2.5-mh. r.f, choke
C8 -2 -pf. tubular ceramic capacitor (Erie CC20- S1-S.p.d.t. switch (part of R9)
CK-020C or equivalent) 2-Transistor sockets
C10 -30 -pf. disc ceramic capacitor (Centralab 1-3" x 5" x 4" aluminuo: utility cabinet (Bud
DD -300 or equivalent) AU-1028-H.G. or equivalent)
I 1-Shielded phono jack
L1-22 turns of Barker and Williamson 3011
1-3" x 3%" x 1 /"
(approx.) aluminum chassis
1-Transistor battery connector-see text
coil stock tapped 2 turns and 15 turns from the Misc.-One- and two-terminal tie strips, solder
ground end lugs, wire, hardware, knobs, etc.

R5
Transistor Q1 is a highly stable 560f1
oscillator, and Q2 acts as an r.f. rr5erWe
amplifier. The unit's fundamental
frequency range is 3.5 to 4 mc. R3
270n
.004>
VI -

C10
01
2N1180
30 p f.

C6
IS TURNS .0047y1.í
C>
IO R9
IO R2 500011
OLI C4
b 56opf.
UOOn
RI
47M CARRIER
INSERTION
VtiWA

/I
15p:.
/CO
140pf.
3
39pí.
T5560 pt. 6eoon
R4 R7
ION
88
470f1
6l
9V
VERNIER COARSE
TUNING

2N1180

102 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 BI

This top and front

view of the Code
Bander shows the
general mechanical
arrangement with
the small chassis
mounted to the front
panel. Note that the
O2 transistors and bat-
tery are mounted on
top of the chassis.

CI

R9

The small parts are

mounted under the
chassis, and tun-
ing capacitors and
insertion control
to the front panel.
Solid support for
Ll is provided by
cementing pieces of
polystyrene rod in
the places shown.

1965 Spring Edition 103

20, and 15 as well. Control R9 adjusts ruggedness. Beef up the 3" x 5" x 4"
the output so that optimum balance be- aluminum utility cabinet by installing
tween the received signal and locally extra sheet metal screws around the
generated carrier can be achieved. edges of both front and rear panels.
Oscillator stability is enhanced by Most components are mounted on a
tapping the base connection of QI down small aluminum chassis which is bolted
from the top of L1, and by using high to the front panel and, after installation
capacity at C4 and C5 to swamp out in the cabinet, fastened to the rear panel
capacitance changes in Q1. A very low with two sheet metal screws.
value coupling capacitor, C8, minimizes Solid support must be provided for L1.
instability resulting from amplifier load- Cut three %" lengths of 1/4" -diameter
ing. polystyrene rod and cement them be-
Construction. Putting the Code Bander tween the coil and the bodies of C2 and
together will be easier if you install R9. These plastic braces are visible in
Cl, C2, C3, LI, and R9 after wiring the the bottom photo on page 103.
other parts. A one -terminal tie strip sup- Code Bander Operation. To copy c.w.,
ports the junction of R5, R6, and the tune the receiver until you come across
r.f. choke (RFC) . A two -terminal strip the familiar thump and hiss which de-
supports C4 and one end of C5. notes a code signal. Turn R9 to mid-
Most chassis grounds are made to sol- range, and adjust C2 until the Code
der lugs located under the nuts which Bander's carrier beats against the signal
to produce a whistle each time code is
sent. You can vary the pitch of the beat
SINGLE SIDEBAND note by tuning Cl. Finally, adjust R9
Single sideband (SSB) is basically a way of re- for the best ratio between the signal and
ducing the bandwidth an AM signal occupies, and the locally generated carrier.
increasing its effectiveness per watt of power
radiated. A conventional AM signal has 66 per- If R9 is set too high, the c.w. station
cent of the power in the carrier and 16 percent will be smothered. On the other hand,
in each sideband when 100 percent modulated. to low a setting of the injection con-
An SSB signal has all the radiated power in one
sideband. Since a carrier of the correct fre- trol will cause the beat note to weaken
quency and amplitude is required for recovery of or disappear entirely.
the modulation signal at the receiving end, it Copying Sideband. For sideband recep-
must be supplied in the receiver. The Code tion, tune the receiver until the incom-
Bander is a low-cost device for providing this
carrier to receivers lacking an adequate BFO or ing garbled speech is loudest. If you're
any BFO whatsoever for receiving both c.w. and using a regenerative set, turn down its
SSB. regeneration to drop the detector out of
oscillation. Run C2 back and forth until
the local carrier can be heard on top of
hold the chassis to the front panel. Ex- the incoming signal. Slowly tune Cl for
ceptions are the grounded end of C5 normal sounding speech. Set R9 just
which goes to the ground terminal of JI, above the point where the signal tends
and the cold ends of L1 and R9 which go to distort.
to a lug bolted to the front panel midway Although at first glance these instruc-
between R9 and Cl. (The head of this tions may appear complicated, once
bolt is visible in the top photo on page you're accustomed to operating the Code
103 behind R9's knob.) Trim resistor and Bander, you'll find it easy to quickly
capacitor leads so they are just long tune in either a c.w. or sideband signal.
enough to connect to the terminals. If there is too much output with R9 at
The connector for 131 was salvaged minimum, connect a twisted wire gim-
from the top of a discarded 9 -volt tran- mick in the lead to the receiver (a gim-
sistor battery. Solder one terminal of mick is two short pieces of insulated
this connector to a ground lug and run a wire twisted together to form a small
wire from the other terminal, through a capacitance) . The gimmick arrangement
hole in the chassis, to switch S1 (a part may be needed with some receivers on
of R9) . Since the drain is less than 2 80 meters.
ma., the battery will last indefinitely.
Mechanical Stability. A number of pre-
cautions must be observed to insure
104
a turn or two. -
One final tip: if Q1 should refuse to
oscillate, move the base tap on L1 up

ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 SELECTED PROJECTS

ONE -TUBE SCREEN MODULATOR

The simple modulator shown here will sent a relatively constant load to the
convert any of the currently available, modulator during the entire modulation
low -power c.w. transmitters into low - cycle, thereby improving audio quality.
power phone transmitters. Referring to It also eliminated an audio squeal that
the diagram, the signal from the micro- developed when the gain control was ad-
phone is amplified in the pentode section vanced too far.
of the 6EA8 tube and drives the triode Construction. A 21/4" x 21/4" x 5" alu-
section as the modulator, which is choke - minum box easily accommodates the
coupled to the r.f. amplifier tube's screen modulator. Following the general parts
circuit. Operating the modulator at a layout shown on the next page will keep
higher voltage than the screen assures the input and output separated and min-
adequate audio modulation voltage with- imize feedback problems. Modulation
out excessive distortion. Resistor R6 "choke" T1 is the primary winding of a
across the coupling "choke" (the pri- small, replacement -type, speaker output
mary of transformer T1) helps to pre - transformer (Stancor A-3856) .

VIA C3 VIB PI *JI

1/2 -GERBA .005» 1/2 -GEARS CW

J2

RI
2.2M

BREAK
-.-THIS
LEAD

BRA
ADDED
TO RESISTOR SCREEN
(6.3V SAME RESISTOR
VALVE AS
SCREEN
Parts to left of dashed line are in modulator RESISTOR

proper; at the right are the modifications nec-

essary in transmitter tube's screen circuit. - *ADDED PARTS B+

PARTS LIST
C1 -20-µf., 450 -volt electrolytic capacitor R7*-2 -watt resistor having one-half the resist-
C2 -0.01-µJ., 600 -volt ceramic capacitor ance value of r.f. amplifier screen -dropping
C3 -0.005-µf., 600 -volt ceramic capacitor resistor
C4 -10-µf., 10 -volt electrolytic capacitor R8*-2 -watt resistor equal in value to original
C5* -1-µf., 200 -volt paper capacitor screen resistor
11*-Accessory socket on transmitter S1-D.p.d.t. toggle or slide switch
12-Single-contact microphone connector (Am- TI-Modulation choke; primary winding of 4 -
phenol 75PC1M or equivalent) watt, replacement -type speaker output trans-
P1-Plug to match accessory socket on trans- former (Stancor A-3856 or equivalent)
mitter V1-6EA8A triode-tetrode vacuum tube
R1-2.2-megohm, ;4 -watt resistor 1-2%" x 2%" x 5" aluminum box
R2-1.5-megohm, 5A -watt resistor Misc.-High-impedance crystal or ceramic micro-
R3-270,000 -ohm, ,4 -watt resistor phone, 5 -conductor cable, tube socket and
R4-500,000 -ohm potentiometer with audio taper shield, hardware, etc.
R5-56 -ohm, ?-watt resistor
R6-5600 -ohm, 1 -watt resistor *Components installed in transmitter proper

1965 Spring Edition 105

 RI C2 VI F C4 R5 TI CI

Simple screen modulator

converts low power c.w.
into phone transmitter.

PI

Refer to your transmitter instruction the original screen bypass capacitor, no

manual and the diagram (on the previ- matter what its value is.) Also connect a
ous page) while carrying out the fol- pair of wires from the transmitter's 6.3 -
lowing steps. If necessary, it is an easy volt heater circuit to the accessory
matter to add an accessory socket at a socket, and ground its fifth terminal to
convenient spot on the rear chassis lip the transmitter chassis. Finally, wire the
of the transmitter to accommodate the plug from the modulator to match these
modulator plug. You'll need five ter- connections, and insert the plug in the
minals. socket.
Disconnect the screen -dropping resis- Operation. Tune up the transmitter in
tor from the r.f. amplifier tube's terminal the normal manner with switch S1 in the
and connect a 1 -watt resistor (R7) of c.w. position. Then put the switch in the
half the resistance of the screen resistor phone position; this should cause the
between the tube socket screen terminal amplifier plate current to drop approxi-
and the accessory socket; also connect mately 50 per cent. Now, advance the
capacitor C5 across the resistor. Connect audio gain control (R4) while talking
the free end of the screen resistor to an- into the microphone until the amplifier
other terminal on the accessory; at the plate current increases slightly on voice
same time, connect another resistor of peaks.
the same value across the screen re- You can check your phone quality and
sistor. Check the value of screen bypass depth of modulation by listening to your
capacitor Cx; if it is greater than .002 signal on your own receiver using head-
ti., replace it with a .002-4., 1200-volt phones. Short the receiver's antenna in-
mica or ceramic unit. (You might check put terminals to reduce the strength of
the operation of the transmitter on phone the incoming signal. Careful adjustment
before making this change. If the qual- of the r.f. amplifier's grid current and
ity is not too bassy and the modulation possible experimental adjustment of R7
percentage is adequate, do not disturb will produce the best -sounding signal.

PLUG-IN TRANSMITTER CRYSTAL SWITCH

A sharp Novice operator soon recog- impossible. But by adding crystal
nizes the advantages of changing his switching to your transmitter, you can
transmitter crystal to get out from un- change crystals effortlessly.
der a strong interfering signal, or to The plug-in unit in the photograph at
move closer in frequency to a station right will accommodate up to eight
he wishes to work. Unfortunately, even crystals, and by using the larger box
when the crystal socket is mounted on specified in the Parts List and adding
the transmitter front panel, it is not al- four more crystal sockets, 12 crystals
ways easy to change crystals in a hurry, can be accommodated.
and when the crystal socket is recessed Construction. Clearances are quite lim-
inside the transmitter, it is practically ited (unless you decide to mount the
106 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
crystal sockets externally) ; therefore, ductor to the terminal for the switch
be extra careful to mount switch S1 rotor. Make the lead long enough to
in the exact center of the box. Position permit you to insert plug P1 into the
the sockets flush with the rear of the transmitter crystal socket when the unit
box, and space them about 9/16" apart, is conveniently placed near the transmit-
center to center. The Ys' mounting holes ter. Don't make the lead excessively
are 1%2" apart, and the 5/16" holes to ac- long, however. Although length is not
commodate the crystal holder prongs critical, too long a lead might make the
are centered 5/16" from the adjacent transmitter operate erratically.
mounting hole. Place an extra panel Operation. Transmitter operation
nut on the switch bushing before mount- should remain essentially the same ex-
ing the selector switch; adjust this nut cept for the added convenience of crys-
to position the switch wafer between tal switching. In addition, if you tune
terminals on the crystal sockets. the transmitter to a frequency near the
Wiring. Connect together the front center of the 80-, 40-, or 15 -meter Nov-
terminals of all crystal sockets, and ice bands, it probably won't be necessary
connect the rear terminal of each socket to retune the buffer and final stages of
to the corresponding fixed terminal of the transmitter to operate on any other
the selector switch. Use a length of frequency within that Novice band.
standard 300 -ohm TV lead-in for the However, for best keying with some
connection to plug Pl. Solder one con- crystals, you may wish to touch up the
ductor to the common crystal socket oscillator tuning.
terminals, and connect the other con - (Continued on next page)
r_40 1 PARTS LIST
JI2 O
11-112-Jacks for FT -243 type crystal holders,
0.487" pin spacing, 0.095" dia. pins (Millen
#33102 or equivalent)
P1 -2-terminal plug (Mosley #301 or equiv-
alent)
S1-Multi-position, s.p., ceramic rotary switch
(Centralab PA -2000 or equivalent)
Box-For 8 -crystal unit: 1;/" x 2'/y" x 23" alu-
minum (Bud CU -2100A or equivalent); for
12 -crystal unit: 13" x
(Bud CU -2102A or equivalent)
2'"
x 4" aluminum

Mise. -18" length of 300 -ohm TV lead-in, 4-32

round -head machine screws %" long, etc.

Changing frequency with crystal control is

PI METAL BOX easy with this multi -position switch. Plug Pl
u must be inserted in transmitter crystal jack
in position that grounds common crystal lead.

Two crystal jacks were

left out of the unit
shown to clarify the
construction details.

PI JI ,J 2, ETC,

1965 Spring Edition 107

 Warning. The distributed capacitances, ity is of no importance for normal Nov-
etc., of the crystal switch may change ice operation, but it is illegal for a CB
the actual oscillating frequency of some operator to make any changes that will
crystals as much as 100 cycles or so affect the output frequency. Therefore,
from their marked values. This possibil- the switch is not suitable for CB use.

ZENER DIODE NOISE LIMITERS

When you are listening to weak c.w. RI

IOK
JI

or SSB signals on your receiver, do TO

strong signals appearing suddenly on the TO RCVRPI
HIGH -IMPEDANCE
PHONES
same frequency really blast your ear- PHONE
JACK
drums ? When you use your receiver to
monitor your c.w. sending, are you con- Fig. 1. Simple "ear saver" noise limiter
stantly running the audio gain control should be inserted between the receiver
up and down? Does your receiver's noise phone jack and a pair of headphones.
limiter work properly for AM phone re- PARTS LIST
ception, but become useless for c.w. and
SSB? Maybe a couple of inexpensive 11-Single-circuit phone jack
zener diodes in one of the circuits shown P1-Phone plug
here can solve your problems. R1-% -watt, 10,000 -ohm resistor
Z1, Z2 -6.8 -volt, 400 -mw. zener diode (Motor-
Simple Limiter. Figure 1 is a simpli- ola 1N957 or equivalent-see text)
fied and modernized version of the Misc.-Short length of insulated wire, insulated
"Headphone 'Ear Saver' " originally de- tie point, hookup wire, small box, etc.
scribed in POPULAR ELECTRONICS in July,
1961. At low signal levels, the two zener
diodes (ZZ and Z2) act like a very high loud signal in the phones, 6.8-volt zener
resistance, and the circuit performs diodes (such as the Motorola 1N957
normally. But when a signal voltage specified in the Parts List) are recom-
exceeds the zener breakdown voltage rat- mended; for a moderate signal level,
ing of the diodes, they act like a virtual try 3.3 -volt units (such as the Motorola
short circuit. As a result, strong noise 1N746) .

and signal peaks are effectively clipped The "ear saver" can be built in any
down to size. small box that may be available. When
The two zener diodes connected back you wire the diodes, join the two nega-
to back are required to clip the positive tive leads (or the two positive leads)
and negative peaks of the a.c. signal
equally, and their voltage rating deter- PARTS LIST
mines the clipping level. For a fairly R1-500,000 -ohm to 1-megohm potentiometer-
see text
S1--S.p.s.t. switch
Fig. 2. To add more versatile noise Z1, Z2 -6.8 -volt, 400 -mw. zener diode (Motor-
ola 1N957 or equivalent)
limiter to a communications receiver,
just make the changes shown in these Misc.-Short length of shielded hookup wire
"before" and "after" circuit diagrams.

FIRST COUPLING AUDIO COUPLING AUDIO

CAPACITOR FIRST
AUDIO OUTPUT AUDIO CAPACITOR OUTPUT
TUBE TUBE TUBE TUBE

RI
500K
TO
IMEG.

ADD THESE
REMRÉSISTÓR/ L_ COMPONENTS

108 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

together, and connect the two remaining be grouped together at any convenient
leads across phone jack J1. To prevent point on the receiver chassis.
heat damage to the diodes while solder- After you finish wiring this unit, close
ing, grasp their leads between the diode switch S1 and set potentiometer R1 to
body and the connection with long -nose an arbitrary position-say, half scale.
pliers. Then slowly advance the regular receiver
Versatile Limiter. The limiter of Fig. 2 audio volume control to the point where
works on AM, c.w., and SSB signals. further increase causes no further in-
Its installation requires replacing the crease in volume from your loudspeaker
470,000 -ohm to 1-megohm fixed resistor or phones; simultaneously adjust R1 for
normally connected between the receiv- the desired output level.
er's output tube control grid and ground When these adjustments have been
(consult your receiver's instruction man- made, no signal or noise pulse can exceed
ual to identfy the resistor) with a small this preset level unless switch S1 is
potentiometer (RI) of the same resist- opened or potentiometer R1 is readjust-
ance connected as shown. The zener di- ed. ( With the switch open and the po-
odes are connected across the potenti- tentiometer turned to the maximum -
ometer through s.p.s.t. switch Si. If you signal position, the receiver will perform
use shielded leads, the components can exactly as before.)

PI-NETWORK TANK CIRCUIT

Have you ever tried to visualize what combination output tank circuit and an-
modern band -switching amateur trans- tenna-matching network in the Jones
mitters would be like if the universally Amateur Radio Handbook, the predeces-
used pi-network tank circuit had never sor of the Radio Handbook. W6AJF's
been developed? Without it, they cer- circuit (see bottom diagram on next
tainly would be bulkier, more compli- page) was identical to that used in many
cated and more expensive. In addition, transmitters today.
they would probably be slightly more In spite of its claimed advantages,
difficult to tune and-other things be-
; however, the pi -net tank circuit did not
ing equal-their emitted signals would gain much popularity up to the start of
contain just a bit more undesired har- World War II. But during the war prac-
monic energy. tically every ham was involved in de-
Original Arrangement. Probably the fense electronics work, or was in the
first use of the pi -network in amateur Armed Services, and many were directly
transmitters was described in the ar- concerned with mobile and portable
ticle "A Universal Antenna Coupling communications transmitters. Such
System for Modern Transmitters," by equipment was more useful if it could
Arthur A. Collins, W9CXX, in QST, Feb- feed r.f. energy into almost any random
ruary, 1934, page 15. Art claimed that length of wire in an emergency. It also
the new circuit (see top diagram on the had to be light and compact, without
next page) would feed power into vir- sacrificing efficiency and reliability.
tually any antenna, with increased trans- Many of these military transmitters used
mitter efficiency and decreased harmonic pi -network output tank circuits.
output. As a result of their wartime experi-
For some months after the publication ence, these hams came home convinced
of the article, almost every ham seemed that an amateur transmitter, even the
to be building a "Collins Coupler," and "full -gallon" size, did not have to be a
they were loading up all sorts of unlikely rack -and -panel monster, forever con-
metallic articles like bedsprings and win- demned to inhabit the attic or basement.
dow screens as antennas. But after its The idea of the compact, table -top -cabi-
novelty wore off, the Collins Coupler was net transmitter caught on strongly, stim-
soon forgotten by the average ham. ulated by the early appearance in sur-
Some time later, Frank C. Jones, plus of the Collins -designed AN/ART-13
W6AJF, described a low -power, portable and similar transmitters. And the pi -
transmitter which used a pi -network network speedily took over as the final
1965 Spring Edition 109
 mitters did little to bolster the reputa-
TRANSMITTER
OUTPUT TUBE
TUNED TO
OPERATING
tion of the pi -network. While many users
FREQUENCY had no trouble, others battled high har-
monic output, and replaced numerous
«5-aph. final tank components. Some technical
Sherlocking soon pinned down the trou-
ble. A lot of transmitter designers, both
amateur and professional, had gone over-
board in claiming that the pi-net was
able to drive any and all impedances,
T= B+
2504
Pf.
500*
pf.
and people expected far too much of it.
Theory was one thing, but in practical
equipment results were far better when
The diagram above shows how the classic pi -network
the standard pi-network was not re-
circuit was first used in amateur transmitters in quired to feed loads greater than 100
conjunction with a parallel -tuned tank circuit as an ohms or so.
antenna -matching network. The modern, simplified Oddly enough, the Collins Radio Com-
arrangement below employs a pi -network combina- pany, whose president, Art Collins, first
tion plate tank circuit and antenna -matching network.
brought the pi -network to the attention
TRANSMITTER
of radio amateurs as a "wide -range"
OUTPUT TUBE coupler, was among the first to recognize
the practical limitations of the circuit.
Consequently, all post -WW -II Collins
amateur transmitters have been designed
to work into nominal 50- to 75 -ohm
loads and are not guaranteed to give
satisfactory results with appreciably
different load impedances.
Some manufacturers were a little slow
to restrict the range of load impedances
B+
they claimed that their transmitters
*TYPICAL VALUES FOR would match. However, most of today's
3.5-29.7 MC. XMTRS. amateur transmitters are designed to
work into 50- to 75 -ohm loads (with the
tank circuit, for no other configuration exception of some low -power beginners'
known could be made so compact for the transmitters) . All of those we have
amount of power handled, and still pro- had the opportunity of testing-which
vide front-panel bandswitching, har- has been most of them-work well when
monic suppression, reasonable efficiency, fed into their rated load impedance.
and the ability to drive a considerable Thus, after a sometimes painful
range of load impedances. "growing-up" period, the pi -network
De -Bugging the Pi -Network. Unfortu- transmitter output tank circuit finally
nately, the performance of many trans- redeemed its early promise.

NUVISTOR Q -MULTIPLIER

Regular readers of "News and Views" an inexpensive communications receiver

in POPULAR ELECTRONICS have undoubt- to separate signals up to 10 times.
edly noticed that many equipment de- Construction Notes. The frequency range
scriptions go something like "He uses of the Q -multiplier must match the re-
a `you -name -it' receiver, plus a Q -multi- ceiver intermediate frequency; therefore,
plier foradditional selectivity." A part values are included in the parts list
Q -multiplier is a regenerative circuit for units to operate in both the 455-kc.
connected to the i.f. amplifier of a super- and 1600-kc i.f. ranges. The unit is built
heterodyne receiver to modify its selec- in a 5" x 21/4" x 21/ " aluminum utility
tivity characteristics. The simple Q - box ; the small size of the nuvistor per-
multiplier described here, which utilizes mits uncrowded construction. Although
a nuvistor, will increase the ability of parts placement is not critical, the gen -
110 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
r- As with other Q -multipliers,
the nuvistor version makes
C5 I SHIELDED WIRE
00i I. use of controlled regener-

1
1 1 I I TOPLATE TERMINAL
OFRECEIVER MIXER ation to boost selectivity.
TUBEl6BE6, 6S47, ETC,

8
455KC 1500-1700 KC

*CI 100 pl. 50 pt.

41
25K *C2 003Pf. 560pf.
R3
47K *C3 720 pf. 15C pf.

C6
005,.'. Construction in the type of
L I

METAL 80x
box shown permits parts
layout for good electronic
L__ J function and easy assembly.
+ V-
100-250VDC 6.3V
C6 SI C5 LI R3 Ri R2 VI CI

PARTS LIST

*C1 -100 -pf. (50pf.) midget variable capaci- R3 -47,000 -ohm, V2 -watt resistor
tor P1-Single-contact "phono" plug or equivalent
*C2 -0.003 -uf. (560 -pf.) mica ar silver mica Sl-S.p.s.t. switch
capacitor
*C3--720-pf. (150 -pf.) mica or silver mica
V1-6CW4 nuvistor
capacitor 1-2%" 5" aluminum box (Bud
x 2V4" x
C4 -270 -pf. mica or paper capacitor #2104,1 or equivalent)
C5 -0.001-µf. mica or paper capacitor Misc.-Insulated tic points, shielded wire (RG -
C6 -0.005-µf. mica or paper capacitor 59U or equivalent), etc.
L1-40-300 µh. slug -tuned coil (hiller #2002
ferrite rod loop antenna or equivalent) *First values are given for 455-kc. i.f. amplifiers;
R1 -25.000 -ohm potentiometer, linear taper values in parentheses are for i.f.'s in the 1600-
R2-2.2-megohm, V2 -watt resistor ke. range.

eral arrangement shown in the photo- a Q -multiplier may not give completely
graph is recommended. satisfactory results on c.w., however,
Refer to your receiver instruction when used with inexpensive a.c./d.c. re-
manual in connection with the following ceivers.
step. The 6.3 volts at 0.135 amperes and Install a shielded wire between the
100-250 volts, d.c., at a few milliam- plate terminal of the receiver's mixer
peres required to power the Q -multiplier tube (6BE6, 6SA7, etc.) and a connector
can be obtained from the receiver's ac- on the rear of the receiver chassis or to
cessory socket (if it has one) , or from an unused terminal on the receiver acces-
a convenient spot in the receiver, such sory socket, to accommodate the output
as the heater and screen terminals of the terminal (P1) of the Q -multiplier. After
output tube socket. The power may also the lead is installed, tune in a steady
be obtained from a small external power signal on the receiver, and carefully
supply. In fact, with an a.c./d.c. type of retune the primary winding of the first
receiver, an external supply is required; i.f. transformer for maximum signal
1965 Spring Edition 11I
strength. This must be done to compen- squeal from the loudspeaker or by the
sate for the capacity added to the pri- receiver suddenly going dead) . Also, the
mary tuned circuit of the i.f. transformer value of resistor R3 may be increased
by the shielded lead. or decreased if necessary to give resistor
Then plug in the Q -multiplier, adjust R1 full control.
capacitor Cl and resistor Rl, and ad- Operation. In operation, receiver selec-
just coil slug Ll for maximum signal tivity is maximum when resistor Rl is
strength. Retard control RI as neces- adjusted just below the oscillation point.
sary during this operation to prevent Capacitor Cl acts as a vernier tuning
the Q -multiplier from breaking into sus- control, permitting the desired signal to
tained oscillation (indicated by a steady be picked out of a mess of interference.

40 -METER ANTENNA FOR SMALL ROOF

Are you one of those people who claim for X in the formula gives: 500 + Y2
that they don't have room on the roof = 1152. Solving for Y, we get Y = 26
for an efficient transmitting antenna? feet, approximately. Consequently, the
Actually, if you have an outside TV an- apex of the "V" will have to be 26 feet
tenna, you probably do have room for an (Continued on page 163)
effective 40 -meter (7 -mc.) antenna
which will also work on 15 meters. The INSULATOR
secret is to use a pair of the TV antenna
guy wires as the radiating portion of an TV ANTENNA MAST
LI L2

"inverted -V" transmitting antenna as

shown in the diagram. son COAX

Let's work out the details for install- L2

ing a 40 -meter dipole which has an over- GUY WIRE

all length of approximately 66 feet on a

20' x 40' roof-a very small roof, inci-
dentally. You'll need a few "egg" type
strain insulators (approximately 1%"
x a}") and some 50 -ohm coaxial feed -
line to do the job. Use RG -8/U coaxial
cable if you can; RG -58/U will be okay
if the length is not excessive.
Design Details. Assuming that the TV
antenna is mounted in the center of the
roof, we first determine the distance
from its base to the corners of the roof,
where the guy wires are undoubtedly
anchored. COAX
Using the Pythagorean theorem (the COAX
TO
square of the hypotenuse of a right tri- XMTR

angle is equal to the sum of the squares

of the other two sides, or Z2=X2 -E Y2) ,
and substituting the distances from the
TV antenna base to one side and to the
front (or back) of the roof in the for-
mula, we come up with 102 + 202 = 500.
From a table of roots and squares in a
high-school math book, the square root 20'

of 500 is something over 22 feet.

Allowing a foot at each end of the Where roof space is at a mini-
dipole for insulators means that approxi- mum, a pair of guy wires sup-
mately 34 feet will be required to ac- porting a TV antenna installation
can be used as the radiating por-
commodate each half of the antenna. tions of a 7 -mc. (and 21 -mc.) "in-
Substituting 34 feet for Z and 22 feet verted -V" transmitting antenna.

112 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 HOW ABOUT IT, OM, what precautions have you taken
to make sure you comply with the FCC's ten-minute
identification rule ? Do you rely on the tumbling sand
grains of an egg timer to alert you for an ID? Or have
you placed your faith in one of those gadgets that ticks
like a time bomb and, every now and then, gives out with
a nerve -shattering bong-provided you go to the trouble
of resetting it every ten minutes. Probably you trust to
luck and memory to stay legal.
The "Idento-Minder" overcomes the inconvenience of

Ten-minute ID's? You'll

never forget with a
gadget for the ham shack
that times QSO s

By HARTLAND B. SMITH, W8VVD

other timing gadgets, and the uncertainty of depending

on memory. Housed in a 3" x 4" x 5" Minibox, it tells
you not only when to identify, but also lets you know at
a glance how many minutes have elapsed since the pre-
vious ID has been given. Its quiet electric movement re-
quires no winding, and its flashing neon indicator, while
an effective reminder, will neither startle nor annoy
you with unnecessary in -shack QRM.
The heart of the Idento-Minder is a small synchronous
timing motor that drives a 31/2" -diameter disc at a speed
 rated at exactly
THE be able to find one
1/10th rpm. The solution to this problem
iDENTO- is to use a pulley and belt arrangement
like that shown in the photos below to
MINDER achieve the proper disc speed.
Making the Pulleys. The motor in the
prototype is a 1/4th-rpm type which re-
of 1/10th rpm. At ten-minute intervals, quires a pulley diameter ratio of 1:2.5.
a 9/16" hole, cut 1/2" from the edge of A suitable motor pulley was fashioned
the disc, uncovers a blinking neon bulb from a 1/2" length of 1/2" -diameter poly-
to alert the operator in time for proper styrene rod. After cutting a fairly
station identification. deep groove around the rod with a small
The Blinker Circuit. A relaxation oscil- rat-tail file, the pulley was drilled at
lator circuit is formed by R1, D1, Cl, the center and pressed on the motor
and 11. When the direct current passed shaft.
by D1 charges Cl to the bulb's striking A larger pulley, slightly more than 1"
voltage, IZ lights up and discharges the in diameter, was then scroll -sawed from
capacitor. As soon as the capacitor volt- a piece of 1/4" plywood and also grooved
age drops to a low level, the bulb goes with a file. After drilling a 1/4" hole at
out and remains extinguished until Cl its center, the wooden pulley was pushed
recharges. The amount of resistance at onto the shaft of the 1/4" panel bearing
R1 governs capacitor C1's charging assembly visible in the first two photos
time. The higher the resistance, the and fastened in place with epoxy cement.
longer the intervals between flashes. An ordinary rubber band serves as the
When a 470,000 -ohm resistor is em- belt which transfers power from one
ployed, the neon bulb blinks approxi- pulley to the other.
mately four times per second. The exact pulley diameters you use
Although synchronous timing motors will, of course, depend on the speed of
are listed in many radio catalogs and your particular motor. The motor sug-
bargain bulletins, you undoubtedly won't gested in the Parts List, for example,
turns at only 1/15th rpm. Therefore, it
DI
2F4
requires a 1/2" disc pulley and a 3/4"
RI
motor pulley to bring the disc speed up
117 VAC 470K
SYNCHRONOUS II
TIMING NE2
MOTOR SyIT
200V

I/4 PANEL BEARING ASSEMBLY SYNCHRONOUS

TIMING MOTOR

31/2X43/4 ALUMINUM PLATE

All of the parts for the Idento- CI

RI
Minder are bolted on a 31/2" x 43/4"
aluminum panel which is mounted
inside a Minibox with spacers to 4 TERMINAL
INSULATED TIE STRIP
permit rotation of the "time" disc. DI
The blinker circuit, shown in the Sha METAL
SPACER
schematic above, is simple and re-
quires a minimum of components.
114 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
to 1/10th rpm. If you use a motor with from the edge for the warning light to
a different speed, vary the pulley size shine through. Spray the disc with black
accordingly. paint and apply equally -spaced number
All of the parts for the Idento-Minder decals. To install it, simply cement it to
are mounted on the 31/2" x 43/4" alu- the disc pulley.
minum plate. Approximate the parts To finish the job, insert bolts through
layout, and then drill holes for the tim- the front of the Minibox, slip 5/g" metal
ing motor, the panel bearing assembly, spacers over them to provide clearance
and the four -terminal tie strip. Drill four between the panel and the box for the
mounting holes for the bolts with spac- rotating disc, and bolt the panel in place.
ers which hold the panel to the front of Screw on the back of the Minibox, and
the Minibox. While you're at it, drill a you're ready to go.
hole 9/16" in diameter centered 13/16" Install the Idento-Minder where it will
from the top of the front panel of the be in your line of vision when you're on
Minibox for the "time" window, and an- the air. Don't worry about having to
other hole (line with a grommet) in the watch the little gadget like a hawk, how-
back for the a.c. line cord. ever, since its flashing neon indicator is
Assembly. Mount all of the components so insistent that you'll have a difficult
on the aluminum panel. The tie strip sup- time ignoring it, even when your eyes
ports D1, RI, and the leads of Cl. You are focused on an object as much as 90
can prevent the capacitor from flopping degrees away from it. Due to the disc's
around inside the case by taping it tightly slow rotation, the bulb is visible for al-
to the panel as shown in the first photo. most a minute as the hole passes by,
After fabricating and installing the and you're bound to notice the winking
pulleys, cut a 31/2" -diameter disc from light. The numbers also keep you alert
stiff cardboard or other suitable mate- because they indicate how many minutes
rial, and make a 9/16" hole centered 1/2" have gone by since the previous ID.
PARTS LIST- 7

C1 -0.5-µJ., 200 -volt paper capacitor 1-3/4" motor pulley for use with above motor-
D1 -200 -ma., 400-P1V silicon rectifier (Sartres see text
1-3" x
11
Tarzian 2F4 or equivalent)
ti E-2 neon bulb
R1-470,000-ohm, ,A-watt resistor
1-31/;"
4"
x 4"5" hlinibox
x (Bud CU-2105-A)
aluminum plate
1-')/4" panel bearing assembly
1-120 -volt, 60 -cycle synchronous timing motor .1-%" spacers for #6 machine screws
(Allied Radio, 78B-497, $2.40) Jlisc.--Decals,
4 -terminal tie strip, hookup wire,
1-%" disc pulley for use with above motor-see hardware, 3'/i" cardboard disc, black spray
text paint

Pulleys are mounted on front of inside panel and Glue the 31/2" disc to the large pulley, and position
coupled with a rubber band. Mount bulb 11 as shown. bulb 11 so it shines through the "ten minute" hole.

PLYWOOD PULLEY PLASTIC DRIVE PULLEY

CEMENTED TO PANEL ON MOTOR SHAFT
BEARING SHAFT
RUBBER BAND

NE -2 NEON
BULB, II

BULB LEADS INSULATED

WITH TAPE 9/6'HOLE
1/4"RUBBER GROMMET

1965 Spring Edition 115

Need a receiver for
the 2 -meter amateur
band? You can build
this sensitive unit
easily, at low cost.

MUTER
SIMPLE SUPERHET
LEADERS RESPONDED to the appeal of the "Simple Superhet for 6"
1 (1964 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK) so well that a 2 -me-
ter version was quickly assembled. It covers the 144- to 148 -mc, amateur
band, with enough overlap at the band ends to include MARS and CAP
frequencies. Three tubes are used to provide a superhet-type front end
and a superregenerative second detector, as in the 6 -meter version. This
combination provides exceptional performance, considering the number
of tubes and the overall simplicity of the circuit.
Most details of design and construction closely follow those of the
6 -meter model, with a utility box again serving as the cabinet, which
also contains the built-in speaker and power supply. The construction is
straightforward and free of tricky assembly problems, so with the care-
ful wiring and attention to detail that all VHF circuits require, you
should have little trouble getting it going.
About the Circuit. The coaxial line from the antenna connects to jack
Ji, which is connected internally to the tuned input circuit, made up of
C7 and L2. This circuit is adjusted to peak broadly at 145 mc. by means
of trimmer capacitor C7. The 2 -meter signals are coupled to the grid of
mixer Vlb via C8.
A "gimmick" capacitor made by twisting two lengths of insulated wire
116 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
together is used to couple the output of an 8" x 4'." aluminum sheet. Two
oscillator V1a to the grid of V1b. The pieces of aluminum angle support the
oscillator frequency is basically set by chassis shelf about 1';+" from the bot-
trimmer capacitor C3 and L1. This fre- tom of the cabinet.
quency is variable from about 138 to 142 The parts layout is shown in Figs. 2,
mc., tuning 6 mc. below the desired 4, and 5, and, as we said before, the
signal, which establishes the correct 6 - placement of parts and wiring must be
mc. i.f. frequency. closely followed, as in all VHF devices.
The i.f. output of mixer Vib is coupled Tuning capacitor C2 is mounted on
by C9 to the tuned circuit of the second three " metal spacers. A solder lug is
detector, which consists of L3 and WO. screwed to a tapped hole in the frame of
This circuit is adjusted to 6 mc. by C2, and soldered to the free end of a
means of the tuning slug in L3. The second solder lug, which is held to the
REGEN control, potentiometer R6, ad- chassis shelf by one of the screws that
justs the screen voltage of V2, to control secures the socket of V1. This provides
the superregenerative action of the de- a short ground path for C2, and helps
tector stage. to stiffen the structure mechanically,
To prevent overdriving the grid of V3 which improves stability.
with the quench frequency output of V2, A "K -Tran" type of mounting plate
R8 and C14 are connected as a low-pass was used to mount 6 -mc. coil L3. Since
filter section. The detected audio output it is not an exact fit for the Stancor coil
from V2 passes via R8 and C15 to GAIN specified, care must be taken to avoid
control R9, from which the signal is shorting the coil terminals. Use short
applied to the grid of V3. The amplified lengths of sleeving over the coil leads or,
output of V3 is coupled through output alternatively, drill holes in the chassis
transformer Tl to closed circuit jack and mount L3 by its spring clips.
J2 and the loudspeaker. Plugging in A 3" square of perforated aluminum
a set of headphones disconnects the is used as the speaker grille, and a 1"
speaker and provides output to the bracket held by the lower left-hand
phones through C18. speaker mounting screw aids in support-
Power transformer T2, rectifier diode ing the chassis. The small pointer
D1, and the filter made up of R11 and cemented to the back of the outer tuning
C19 provide the necessary B -1- voltages. knob can be made of stiff cardboard or
Construction. An 8" x 6" x 41/-/" alu- white plastic. The dial calibration is
minum utility box is used as the receiver inked on heavy bond paper and taped to
cabinet. The chassis shelf is made from the panel.
Fig. 1. Schematically, the 2 -meter set closely resembles the 6 -meter unit.
18 J2
C9 PHONES
4TVf. .005/1.

D12 88
1/2-12AU B 6 I [Link]
65 5
33041Vt
82K
.0CI05p1.1TA

CB
47<1.

CIO SPKR
1T/f.
C14
.005yf. .001/1.

ÌÓpt.
ISV

GIMMICK DI
ISEE TEXT) 5E4
/2-124ÚT
RED
C4
/
C19A CI9B 125V<
20/1. 20/1.
CI 7"C% 50V 150V
[Link] I7 AED
IITVAC
GRN
A1A Ñ
TUNING 6.3V<
BL
GRN

1965 Spring Edition 117

Fig. 2. Mounting and location
of Li, L2, and C7 are the most
critical assembly factors. Some
of the other parts are shown
t5
here slightly displaced from .(1'
the most convenient assem- LI
bly, for the sake of clarity.
TAP ATS
2ND TURN
(The center lug of control R9
connects to pin 1 of V3.)

PARTS LIST.
C1 -6.8 -pf., 600 -volt, NPO ceramic tubular RI -33,000 ohms All resistors
capacitor (5 -pf. and2 pf. units wired in parallel) R2-4700 ohms %-watt, 10% unless
C2-13 -pf. variable capacitor, with vernier shaft R3-1 megohm otherwise specified
and dual knob assembly (Lafayette 32-0919, R4-120,000 ohms
18-79, and 18-77-$1.95) R5-6.8 megohms
C3, C7 -12 -pf., NPO ceramic trimmer capacitor R6 -50,000 -ohm carbon potentiometer
C4, C8, C9, CIO, C11-47-µf., 600-volt ceramic R7-220,000 ohms
disc capacitor R8-82,000 ohms
CS, C6, C13, C17, C18, C20 -0.005-µf., 600- R9-1-megohm carbon potentiometer (with S1)
volt ceramic disc capacitor R10-220 ohms
C12 -330 -pf., 600 -volt ceramic tubular R11-1800 ohms, 2 watts
C14 -0.001-µf., 600 -volt ceramic disc capacitor SI-S.p.s.t. switch (on R9)
C15 -0.01-µf., 600 -volt ceramic disc capacitor
SPKR-3.2-ohm, 3" speaker (Utah SP3A or
equivalent)
C16 -10-µf., 15 -volt miniature electrolytic Tl-Output transformer; primary, 10,000 ohms;
C19-Dual 20-µf., 150 -volt electrolytic capacitor secondary, (Stancor A3879 or equiv.)
4 ohms
D1-400 Pli 450 -ma. silicon rectifier (Inter-
, T2-Power transformer; primary, 117 volts;
national Rectifier Corp. 5E4 or equivalent) secondaries, 125 volts @ 15 ma., 6.3 volts (i`
11-Chassis mounting type coaxial receptacle 0.6 anap. (Stancor PS -8415 or equivalent)
(Arnphenol 83-1R or equivalent) V1-12AU7A tube
12-Closed circuit phone jack V2, V3-6AK5 tube
L1-4 turns of #16 tinned copper wire, wound 1-8" x 6" x 41/2" aluminum utility box (LUD
/2" long on %" diameter; tap at second turn 146 or equivalent)
from ground end, leave %" leads at 45° angle 1-8" x 4%" aluminum plate (for chassis shelf)
-see Fig. 2 Misc.-Line cord and plug, "K-Tran" mounting
plate (for L3), tube sockets, aluminum angle
L2-Same as L1 but tap at first turn from stock, grommets, terminal strips, knobs, per-

ffffffffffffffffff
118
ground end-see Fig. 2
L3-Oscillator coil (Stancor RTC 8764)
forated aluminum for speaker grill, #16 bus
wire, insulated hookup wire, shielded wire, etc.

ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 The connection from L1 to Cl is made
by means of a piece of #16 bus wire,
which passes through a grommeted hole
in the chassis. The "gimmick" capacitor
is formed by soldering two short pieces
of insulated hookup wire to pins 2 and 7
of Vi's socket, and twisting them to-
gether. Trim the pair with your diagonal
cutters to leave about two complete
twists.
Several 3/8" holes drilled in the back of
the cabinet cover will provide ventila-
tion. In addition, two accurately placed
holes in the bottom are required to per-
mit adjustment of trimmers C3 and C7
with the cover on.
(Continued on page 157)

Fig. 3. Panel controls are

straightforward and func-
tional, for ease and ef-
ficiency of operation.

Fig. 4. Rigidity in the

mounting of Cl and C2 is
important for good tuning
stability. This top view
shows their relationship.

R6 ANGLE
R9 SI BRACKET
J2 (1 OF2)

JI

Fig. 5. The spacing and

LINE CORD
dimensions in this bot-
GROMMET tom view are important
because of the very high
operating frequency, and
must be followed closely.
L._.-___2'14 I/2

8'X43/8' ALL MEASUGEMENTS

ALUMINUM PLATE IN INCHES

1965 Spring Edition 119

 egiliacc
electronic organs
are available
by mail,
completely
assembled, or in
build-it-yourself
kits
the first with
-
pre -wired chassis.

Get
Avoid dealer
your
profits. Buy directly from
the manufacturer. Pacific has easy -
to -play theatre -style "horseshoe" con-
own
soles; all -transistorized circuitry; built-
in reverberation, sustain, percussion,
copy!
vibrato; and complete organ voicing.
Several models available. It's only $1...
e_act -te ORGANS The 1965 STEREO/HI-FI DIRECTORY is so
valuable, even your best friend won't be
a division of Electric Organ Arts able to wrest yourcopy away!
597 N. Lake Ave. / Pasadena, California In 180 photo -packed pages, you get authorita-
tive prices and performance data on over 2,000
Write Dept. EHB for additional information. components from 170 manufacturers!
CIRCLE NO. 4 ON READER SERVICE CARD This all -new Buyer's Guide gives you vital sta-
tistics on speakers, tuners, receivers, turntables,
changers, cartridges-on every hi-fi component
manufactured today! Use it to compare similar
items, dollar -for -dollar, feature -for -feature,
before you buy, and avoid excessive prices, dis-
appointment, and costly mistakes!
The 1965 STEREO/HI-FI DIRECTORY also con-
tains...an up-to-the-minute listing of every hi-fi
dealer in the country...and a complete run-
down of all the FM stereo multiplex stations in
the U.S. and Canada!
-
But most important if you want to get top
value on every hi-fi component you buy during
the next twelve months...
SEND JUST $1 NOW FOR YOUR COPY OF
THE 1965 STEREO/HI-FI DIRECTORY
r- FILL IN AND MAIL THIS COUPON RIGHT NOW! -
Ziff -Davis Service DivisionDept. S.H.
589 Broadway New York, N.Y. 10012
WI,',, Send me a copy of the New, up-to-date 1965
COMPLETE
WME e STEREO/HIFI DIRECTORY! My dollar (plus 15f for
PHONE TODAY POI
COMPIETE INIOIMATIOT 169x° 7
shipping and handling; 25f outside U.S.A.) is enclosed.

Y C MULTI-ELMAC COMPANY
21470 COOLIDGE HIGHWAY OAK PARK 37, MICH. name please print

Name
address LLD.I
Address
City Zone State city state zip code
Ia
CIRCLE NO. 25 ON READER SERVICE CARD
120 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Chapter
ELECTRONICS
for theWORKSHOP
S ELECTING material for this chapter always presents a bit of
a problem for your Editors. We solve this problem by intro-
ducing test equipment that is unusual and not readily avail-
able in kit form, or gadgets that can only have a special
place in your workshop. The "Electronic Stop Watch" is a
good case in point; connected to a 6 -digit readout, the stop
watch is accurate to a tenth of a second-and because it is
all -electronic, it can be remotely controlled and a total of
27 hours can be timed! The "Grid -Dip Meter," "C Bridge,"
and the "Meterless VTVM" are all low-cost construction proj-
ects for the fellow whose workshop budget is at a low ebb.
"Bargains by the Bagful" is a report on the current prac-
tice of selling resistors and capacitors sight unseen. You
can stockpile your lab or workshop, but be cautious-some
bargains are not what they seem.

Bargains by the Bagful Oliver P. Ferrell 122

Handy EP Pack E. G. Louis 126
The Squealer Frank A. Parker 127
Meterless VTVM William J. Millard 131

Electronic Stop Watch Fred Blechman, K6UGT 137

C Bridge Frank A. Parker 141

VHF Grid -Dip Meter E. H. Marriner, W6BLZ 143

The Best of Tips and Techniques 146
1965 Spring Edition 121
 BARGAI N S

BV TH E BAG FU L
With a few careful purchases, you can stockpile many of the
resistors and capacitors you'll need for project building

By OLIVER P. FERRELL, Editor

EVERY radio parts store worth its salt The so-called "junk box" of re -usable
these days offers a variety of "poly" parts is one method. A second is stock-
bags full of capacitors, resistors, po- ing up resistors and capacitors obtained
tentiometers, transistors, diodes-every- in poly bag assortments. As opposed to
thing but the kitchen sink. Mail-order buying each resistor or capacitor in a
catalogs and flyers are full of assort- project individually, a stockpile can
ment offers and several companies spe- shave these costs by 70-80 per cent.
cialize in selling nothing but bags of We found that poly bag assortments
various radio components. included everything from floor sweepings
The editorial staff has spent several of some unknown manufacturer to care-
months quietly investigating poly bag fully packaged, top-quality merchandise.
assortments of resistors and capacitors. The buyer has no recourse (caveat
These two categories of bargain bags emptor) but to accept what the poly bag
will be discussed here. contains without question. The only firm
First of all, why buy assortments at guideline that we could uncover as to the
all? Inveterate electronic project builders possible worth of a bargain bag is to
are well aware that there are numerous know with whom you are dealing. Mail-
ways and means of cutting project costs. order companies with business reputa -
122 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
These are a few of the differ-
ent types of capacitors (mica,
ceramic, molded paper, etc.)
culled from poly bag assort-
ments. The two mica capacitors
with eyelet leads are over 15
years old. They are not color -
coded; values are hot -stamped
on bodies of the capacitors.

In disposing of these tubular

ceramics, no effort was made
to even separate them from
an adhesive strip. Obviously,
they are all the same value.

tions at stake and speciality houses Bargains, Bargains, Bargains? As ex-

dealing in bargain bags will nine times amples of "radio row" transactions, here
out of ten sell exactly what they ad- are two instances that occurred during
vertise. our poly bag hunts in lower Manhattan.
The same cannot be said for at least In one store a sign proclaimed drastic
one-third of surplus or distress equip- price reductions in resistor assortments
ment mail-order houses, or most of the from $1.98 to $1.49 to a new final "low -
inhabitants of "radio row" stores in ma- low" of 99¢-an irresistible bargain. A
jor metropolitan areas. The latter stores sealed box (poly bag inside) was pur-
-specializing in a walk -in -off -the -street chased and from its weight appeared to
trade-offer very tempting bargains that be packed. It was-with 481 resistors of
are difficult to resist. But, resist them the same value!
you should, even though the investment A second store offered precision wire -
is almost always under $2. Often as not, wound and carbon -film resistors-30 for
you'll be glad you did. $1.29. The count was correct and we
1965 Spring Edition 123
 This was our prize purchase. All 481 re-
sistors are of the same value although
the exterior wrapping of this assortment "BAD" ASSORTMENT
said it contained 100 different resistors.
25 Mica Capacitors for 89¢
4 3.7 µµf. 2 68 µµf.
1 7.5 µµf. 1 680 µµf.
1 25 µµf. 1 800 µµf.
3 27 µµf. 2 900 µµf.
8 60 µµf. 2 1000 µµf.
Although far from obsolete, this assortment
clearly established that mica capacitors are
"on their way out." Capacitors from five dif-
ferent manufacturers were represented and
all showed distinct signs of aging. Seven ca-
pacitors had pre -World War Il color coding
(nearly invisible) and two of the 27-µµf. ca-
pacitors were unmarked. This was a local
(New York City) purchase.

"EXCELLENT" ASSORTMENT
50 Tubular Capacitors for 98¢
19 0.001 µf., 60 w.v.d.c.
6 0.0015 µf., 600 w.v.d.c.
1 0.0018 µf., 400 w.v.d.c.
6 0.002 pf., 150 w.v.d.c.
6 0.002 µf., 400 w.v.d.c.
1 0.0022 µf., 400 w.v.d.c.
1 0.0022 µf., 600 w.v.d.c.
4 0.0027 µf., 600 w.v.d.c.
1 0.003 /if., 400 w.v.d.c.
5 0.005 µf., 200 w.v.d.c.
1 0.007 µf., 600 w.v.d.c.
2 0.01 µf., 100 w.v.d.c.
1 0.01 µf., 600 w.v.d.c.
1 0.015 µf., 200 w.v.d.c.
2 0.1 µf., 200 w.v.d.c.
1 0.2 µf., 400 w.v.d.c.
1 0.5 µf., 600 w.v.d.c.
This mail-order assortment contained 59 ca-
In the politest terms, these four resis- pacitors instead of the advertised 50. All were
tors can be called "floor sweepings." in good shape, although obviously "over -runs"
Twisting the leads together was done by from TV set manufacturers. All were clearly
a technician, eliminating the chance imprinted, and all tested "good."
that the resistors would be new stock.

found values ranging from a low of 100 leaky, shorted or open on being tested.
ohms to a high of 3.32 megohms. How- Some of the problems that do beset
ever, four of the 30 resistors were un- bargain capacitors, especially those pur-
marked and if you can describe a more chased from doubtful sources, are old,
worthless electronic item than an un- obsolete or indistinguishable color codes
marked "precision" resistor we'd like to and markings. Fortunately, these trou-
hear about it. bles do not usually affect resistors. Our
Purchases via mail order from any of sampling showed that only one out of
the five top distributors, plus one spe- every 90 resistors would either be open
ciality mail-order house, were satisfac- or have indiscernible markings.
tory. With few exceptions, the compo- On the other hand, precision resistors
nents were clean, well -marked, of fairly are always a poor buy in poly bag assort-
recent manufacture and of good quality. ments. The offerings are generally over-
A sampling of capacitors indicated that production runs of highly irregular
only one out of a possible 50 would be values used in test equipment manufac-
124 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 "BAD" ASSORTMENT "EXCELLENT" ASSORTMENT
50 Resistors for 99¢ 40 Disc Ceramic Capacitors for $1
2 12.0 µµf. 3 100 µµf.
2 0.33 ohm, 1/2 watt 1 7500 ohm, 1 watt
1 15.0 µµf. 1 120 µµf.
3 3.3 ohm, 1/2 watt 1 8200 ohm, 1/2 watt
1 15 ohm, 1/2 watt 2 8200 ohm, 3 watt*
1 18.0 µµf. 7 470 µµf.
2 180 ohm, 1/2 watt 2 10,000 ohm, 1 watt 3 22 µµf. 1 390 µµf. (1.5 kv.)
1 10,500 ohm,
3 27 µµf. 1 680 µµf.
2 390 ohm, 2 watt*
1 470 ohm, 3 watt* precision 2 33 µµf. 4 1000 µµf.
1 560 ohm, 1 watt 1 18,000 ohm, 2 watt 1 39 µµf. 2 0.005 µf.
1 680 ohm, 1 watt* 1 68,000 ohm, 2 watt. 2 47 if. 6 0.01 µf.
1 820 ohm, 14 watt, 20% 1 56 µµf. 3 0.02 µf. (1.6 kv.)
20% 1 75,000 ohm, 2 68 µµf. 1 0.05 µf. (25 v.)
2 910 ohm, 1/2 watt, 1/2 watt
1 82 µµf. (2 kv.) 1 0.047 µf. (50 v.)
5% 2 44,000 ohm, 2 watt Even though this assortment contained a few
1 2700 ohm, 1 watt 2 330,000 ohm, "seconds" there was a surplus of nine extra
1 4700 ohm, 1 watt 1 watt capacitors-plus an unusual 27/27 µµf. duo -
1 4700 ohm, 4 watt* 1 750,000 ohm, ceramic not listed above. The distribution of
3 4700 ohm, 2 watt 1 watt, 5% values was remarkable in this poly bag-note
1 6800 ohm, 1/4 watt, 1 1.2 meg., 1 watt the volume of most -used values (470 and
20% 1 2.2 meg., 1 watt 1000 µµf.).
2 6800 ohm, 1/2 watt 2 20.0 meg., 1/2 watt
1 6800 ohm, 1 watt

At first glance-while the resistors were still in

In the great welter of assortments,
the poly bag-this looked like a promising pur- special "buys," and "good deals," the
chase. Unfortunately, the assortment was more average buyer of poly bags has reason
of a hodge-podge containing all wattage values to be hopelessly confused when it comes
from 1/4 to 4 watts. Particularly bad in this
assortment was the absence of values in the
to determining just what he's getting for
range of 75,000 to 330,000 ohms. All resistors his money. As this article was being
identified by the asterisk had no color code. written, the following average prices
This was a "radio row" purchase. (cents -per-unit) were computed from
our survey.
Resistors:
Lure. Wattages are rarely indicated (per- Top -grade 1/2 -watt 03
haps on one unit out of ten) and you Second grade 1/2 -watt 015
take a chance in using a precision re- 1- and 2 -watt 035
sistor in any circuit that draws more 3 -watt, or higher (carbon) 05
3 -watt, or higher (w.w.) 08
than a watt. Also, the need for precision Precision 07
resistors in everyday electronic experi-
menting is unbelievably small. Capacitors:
Ceramic discs 03
What To Buy. There are several rules - Ceramic tubulars 02
of -thumb in buying poly bags. If you Top -grade mica 03
can see the bags be sure that component Second grade mica 02
Paper or molded 035
leads are uncut and have not been short-
ened for use in printed circuit wiring. The experimenter will find that an $8-
In the case of resistors, check that the $10 investment in poly bag resistor and
one-half-watters have either a silver or capacitor assortments will be money
gold tolerance color -coding band. Also, well spent. We suggest that the follow-
ancient 2 -watt resistors were much long- ing components be purchased as a start:
er and thinner than present-day units- two good 1/2 -watt resistor assortments,
they are not a good buy. one good 1 -watt resistor assortment, one
Capacitors must be watched carefully, ceramic disc assortment, and two bags
although the signs of age are more ob- of mica or molded capacitors. Unless
vious (see p. 123) than with resistors. you need them for some specific purpose,
Ceramic disc capacitors should be defer buying precision resistors or elec-
checked for signs of poor dipping-the trolytic capacitors until a later date.
colored ceramic insulation does not cover However, if you expect to try out tran-
all of the capacitor body. Units of this sistor circuits, a good assortment of
type are "seconds" and are not safe to high -capacitance, low -voltage electrolyt-
use. ics can be added to the above list. -{-
1965 Spring Edition 125
 Handy EP Pack
Like to breadboard tube
circuits? Here's an
Experimenter's Power
pack that makes
it easy

By E. G. LOUIS
RE E,.7. c. I,

ONE OF THE BIG REASONS transistor circuits are popular with experimenters is
that the only power supply required is a small battery. Tubes can do a number of
jobs better than transistors, however, and if you take an hour or two to assemble this
simple supply, your power problems for one- and two -tube circuits will be ended.
Since the EP Pack is a medium -voltage supply, a rather elegant filter section can be
used without straining the budget; in any case, the junk box should provide numerous
substitutions. Transformer T1 (Merit P-3046 or equivalent) delivers 150 volts at 25 ma.,
and 6.3 volts at 0.5 ampere. A half -wave rectifier circuit is used with a 50 -ma., 300 -PD/
(or better) silicon rectifier (DI). Resistor R1-1 watt will suffice-prevents surge
damage to DI as CI charges. The filter capacitors (Cl, C2, C3) are all in one multi -
section can, and should be rated at 250 w.v.d.c. Use an 8 -henry choke for LI (Stancor
C1355). The only other parts required are a small chassis, tie points, a s.p.s.t. toggle
switch, and a three -terminal, screw -type terminal strip.
Mount the major components, placing the capacitor can so that it is not in direct
contact with the heat -producing transformer. Also, some degree of separation between
the choke and transformer should be maintained to prevent hum coupling. The wiring
under the chassis is connected to standard tie points. Be sure to observe capacitor and
rectifier polarities; use a heat sink when wiring the rectifier.
If the supply will not be connected to a constant load, add a bleeder resistor (60,000
ohms, 2 watts) between terminals 1 and 3 (the B -plus and ground terminals). If
isolated filament output is desired, a four -screw terminal strip can be used-five screws
if the filament winding of the transformer employed has a center tap. A neon pilot
lamp can be connected across TI's primary, and another optional feature would be
a %- or 1 -amp fuse connected in one leg of the primary. --
DI
PI
+ 47f1
7 RED
LI + + +
Simple power supply for 8hy.
2
experimenting with tube 30yf.
C2 C3
r---13 (OUTPUT
BLK 20V1. 25V(.
circuits is cinch to build,
and can usually be put
3
together with junk box SI
RED
materials. If you use a ONO
higher voltage transform- GRN
er, you must rate other BLK

components accordingly. I I7 VAC IGRN-YEL NOT USED)

GRN

126 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

THE

By FRANK A. PARKER

Another starred current circuit application-an audio oscillator

AMAZING AS IT SOUNDS, this starved circuit vacuum -tube audio -note

generator has a plate supply of only 5 volts What's more, the 100 -
!

microampere plate current drain beats many transistor circuits. In a

unit similar to the "Starved Circuit Amplifier" which appeared in
the 1963 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK, the single 12AT7 dual -
triode does not need the usual high -voltage plate supply transformer.
Plate voltage is taken off the same 6.3 -volt winding used for the tube's
heater. In the author's model, plate voltage was reduced to an unbe-
lievable 3 volts before the Squealer was silenced.
The output of this easy -to -build unit can be varied from 20 cycles to
1965 Spring Edition 127
Coupled to a 3 -transis-
tor amplifier in the
speaker enclosure, the
Squealer had a re-
sounding wallop. If the
Squealer's output cir-
cuit were broken with
a telegraph key, this
arrangement could be
used for code practice.

about 12,000 cycles with a single control. Experimenters will realize how this
Audio output voltage is high enough to circuit differs from the previously men-
drive any hi-fi amplifier to full volume. tioned "Starved Circuit Amplifier." The
The Squealer makes a fine auxiliary latter circuit produced a high signal
audio source in the shack. And, in emer- gain through the use of a 4.3-megohm
gencies, or for mobile use, it can run plate load resistor. Furthermore, the
from a 6 -volt battery. gain could only be obtained by forcing
About the Circuit. The Squealer uses a voltage drop of several hundred volts
dual triode V1 in a modified multivibra- across the plate load resistor. This cir-
tor oscillator circuit. Coupling between cuit is "starved" in a different sense-
stages is through the cathode connection, deriving its voltage from the heater
resistor R2 being common to both tri- line (6 vs. 250 volts) and feeding
odes. Feedback is maintained by capaci- through a small plate load resistor
tor Cl, which together with potentiome- (47,000 ohms vs. 4.3 megohms). The ef-
ter R3 determines the Squealer's audio fects are largely the same, however.
output frequency. The upper frequency Construction. The Squealer fits neatly
limit can be pushed to 15,000 cps or in a 5" x 4" x 3" aluminum box. Parts
higher by decreasing capacitor Cl to placement is not critical but layout
about 0.01 µf. or lower. Resistor R1 might well follow the author's setup for
serves as a plate load for Via; audio easiest assembly.
output is tapped off the same plate via All parts are mounted on the cover
capacitor C2. half of the box. The tube is mounted
The Squealer is isolated from the topside in the center of the box. If de-
power line by filament transformer Ti. sired, the filament transformer can also
The same transformer is also used in a be mounted on top of the box but the au-
standard half-wave rectifier circuit with thor chose to mount it at one end as
diode D1 and RC filter C3, Cxc, R5. Re- shown.
sistor R4 protects D1 against current Most of the resistors and capacitors
surges. For battery operation, a 6 -volt and the diode are soldered to a pair of
d.c. source is connected between point A 9 -lug terminal strips (visible in the pho-
and ground. Useful output can be ob- to at right) on either side of the tube
tained with a d.c. source as low as 3 or socket. Potentiometer R3 and audio out-
4 volts operating V is plate and heater. put jack J1 are mounted on the end of
128 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 JI
AUDIO
OUTPUT

C2 1 OPTIONAL

ï1)I CLOSED
CIRCUIT

CI
.02y1, - JACK

117
VAC

R3
500K

i}
Waveform of the audio note gen-
erated by the Squealer is not a
true sine wave. As the diagram at RS
f
JUMPER FOR BATTERY
VOLTAGES UNDER 6VOC
R4
33011.
4

47K
right illustrates, plate voltage is taken C.T.
NOT
from half -wave rectified heater supply. USEZ
+1.
25P1. IÓÓyi.
2 5V 25V

01
R4
R5
PARTS LIST
C1 -0.02-11J., 200 -volt disc capacitor
C2 -0.01-µj., 200 -volt disc capacitor
C3 -100-µf., 25 -volt electrolytic capaci-
tor
C4 -25-µf., 25 -volt electrolytic capaci-
tor
Dl-Silicon diode, 50 PIV, 100 ma., or
higher
31-RCA-type phono jack
Rl, R5-47,000 -ohm, ,A -watt resistor
R2 -5600 -ohm, 'A -watt resistor
R3 -500,000 -ohm potentiometer (with
switch S1)
R4 -330 -ohm, V2 -watt resistor
Sl-S.p.s.t. volume control switch
(ganged with R3)
T1-Filament transformer: primary,
117 volts a.c.; CT secondary, 6.3
volts @ 0.6 ampere, CT not used
(Stancor P6465 or equivalent)
V1-12AT7 tube
Parts arrangement is uncritical, al- 1-5" x 4" x 3" aluminum box
though author recommends mount- Misc.-9-pin miniature tube socket,
ing most of the components in out- terminal strips, knob, dial plate, hard-
side wraparound of aluminum box. ware, wire, solder, etc.
r

the box opposite the transformer. Since cable terminated with a pair of RCA -
no pilot lamp is employed, a dial plate type phono plugs will do.
is used with the potentiometer as an If desired, the Squealer can be op-
on -off indicator and to spot the different erated from a 6 -volt battery. Simply
output frequencies. connect the battery between point A and
Operation. The Squealer works fine ground as shown on the schematic. Be
with both crystal and medium- to high - sure to disconnect the 6.3 -volt secondary
impedance dynamic headphones. If it is of T1 before connecting the battery
to be used for code practice, a closed- since the transformer winding repre-
circuit telephone key jack can be option- sents a d.c. short for the battery. To in-
ally inserted between capacitor C2 and crease the audio output with supply volt-
output jack J1. As an audio source for ages under 6 volts, short out resistor R5
hi-fi amplifiers, an ordinary shielded with a wire jumper. - i-
1965 Spring Edition 129
 AS MANY PROJECTS
AS MUCH FUN!
In September, 1965
For the first time, ever,
POPULAR ELECTRONICS
will publish a Fall Edition of
ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
...the second one this year!
(THE REGULAR PRICE WILL BE $1.25 PLUS POSTAGE FOR MAIL ORDERS!)

BUT, AS A PREFERRED READER, YOU

ARE INVITED TO RESERVE A COPY
IN ADVANCE, AT THE VERY SPECIAL
PRE -PUBLICATION PRICE
OF JUST $1-POSTPAID.
This special offer to EEH readers
cannot be repeated, so don't miss out!
Fill in and mail the Reservation
- Coupon today!
Ziff -Davis Service Division Dept. EH2-P
589 Broadway New York, N.Y. 10012
My dollar is enclosed. Reserve my copy of the
more pages Fall Edition of Electronic Experimenter's Hand-
book and mail it to me from first -off -press cop-
of challenging ies in September, 1965, postpaid.
electronics projects
and experiments- name
[Link]...for profit
...for YOU! address

city state zip code

- - (PAYMENT MUST BE ENCLOSED WITH ORDER.) --
130 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
meterless vtvm By WILLIAM L. MILLARD

When you need a high -impedance voltmeter, you usually need it

bad-this one uses no meter, and twelve bucks buys the parts

THE trusty multimeter is generally the first mea-

suring instrument bought for the average
home workshop, and often it's the only one the
experimenter's budget will permit. But what do
you do when the voltage to be measured is in a
very high impedance circuit? Even if the multi -
meter is one of the fairly expensive sort having
a 20,000 -ohm -per-volt movement, the input
impedance on a low -voltage range, say 3 volts
full scale, is only 60,000 ohms. If you're trying
to measure the bias on the oscillator grid of a
mixer, or in a low-level audio stage having a 5-
megohm (or higher) grid resistor, the multimeter
looks pretty much like a dead short circuit to the
voltage being measured. In such cases you either
give up (unthinkable!), buy a vacuum -tube volt-
meter ("unfundable"), or rummage in your junk
box and build the "Meterless VTVM."
1965 Spring Edition 131
 RED
TEST LEADS
-BLK
10 MEG. I I7VAC

R2 4
3.6 MEG.
70

R3
I MEG.
240
700

R4
360K
IRE WOUND
t900n Fig. 1. The slide -back
circuit is simple and
0 -ZERO
R5
150K 3000f1WIRE
easy to get working.
WOUND If you can make good
solder joints, you can
build this useful unit.

0
A. ADJUST CATHODE B. APPLY VOLTAGE TO BE C. READJUST CATHODE
BIAS TO CLOSE EYE MEASURED. EYE OPENS BIAS TO CLOSE EYE

PARTS LIST -
C1 -50-µf., 150 -volt electrolytic capacitor R10 -3000 -ohm, wire-wound potentiometer
C2 -30-µf., 150 -volt electrolytic capacitor R11 -1000 -ohm, 1 -watt carbon resistor
D1 -1N2070. 400-PIV silicon diode S1-Single-pole, 5 -position rotary switch
RI -10 megohms S2-S.p.s.t. toggle switch
R2-3.6 megohms '/z -watt carbon TI-Power transformer; 125 volts @ 15 ma.,
R3-1.0 megohm resistor, 5% 6.3 volts @ 0.6 ampere (Stancor PS -8415 or
R4-360,000 ohms tolerance equivalent)
R5-150,000 ohms 1 VI -6E5 electron-ra_v indicator tube
R6-3.0 megohms ',/z -watt carbon 1-Aluminum box, sloping front (Bud AC -1612
R7-5.0 megohms I10% tolerance or equivalent), or constructor's choice
R8 -25,000 -ohm, 10 -watt, wire -wound resistor Misc.-6-prong tube socket, line cord and plug,
R9 -1000 -ohm, linear taper, wire -wound poten- red and black pin jacks (one each), test prods,
tiometer solder, hookup wire, hardware, etc.

It's true that the Meterless VTVM at least $10, and it can cost more. Such
won't measure resistance or current, ex- transient voltage jumps are taken in
cept by indirect methods, but the multi - stride by the Meterless VTVM.
meter can still take care of those chores How do you measure voltage without
as before. And the Meterless VTVM will a meter? By reviving a voltmeter circuit
provide a bonus "instrument." You can so old and out of use that it has prob-
use it when you're measuring a voltage ably been forgotten by many old-timers
that may suddenly take a drastic jump . . . and maybe never learned by new-

as you make adjustments, thereby avoid- comers to the electronics field. It's called
ing the risk of wrapping the pointer of the slide -back voltmeter circuit, and it
your multimeter around the stop pin! originated back in the 1930's. It doesn't
The repair of this all -too -common lab- require a meter (although one can be
oratory ailment (known as Technician used, of course) , because all that is
Goofitis) will deflate your piggy bank by needed is a means of indicating when
132 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Fig. 2. Details of the mount-
ing holes and other me-
chanical work are shown
in this dimensioned sketch.

SOCKET BRACKET

Fig 3. Cut the sheet metal

for the bracket as shown be-
fore bending to final shape.

5/B"

two voltages have been adjusted to be I-I/B"

equal, and a tuning indicator ("magic

eye") tube can do that very nicely.
Years ago these miniature cathode- 5/8"-.13/8"H-1-1/8" -1 1/B'-.13/8'5/B""
ray tubes were used by the thousands as
I

4 I/4"
tuning indicators in broadcast and other *MOUNT TUBE SOCKET SO THAT PIN 5 IS AT THIS POINT.
SHADOW WILL THEN BE AT 8 O'CLOCK WHEN TUBE IS INSERTED.
receivers. Today, they're still used wide-
ly in the less costly tape recorders.
Naturally a lot of them are lurking in a suitable dial scale, you can read off the
the junk box waiting to be put into ser- unknown voltage as quickly as the eye-
vice again, and if you don't have one closing adjustment can be made.
on hand, the cost of a new one is far How do you calibrate the scale of R9?
below that of a respectable meter. By applying known voltages, such as
A 6U5/6G5 may be substituted for the from combinations of batteries, or by
6E5 tube specified if an additional 1000 - measuring voltages in low-impedance
ohm resistor is put in series with the circuits simultaneously with your mul-
lead from the arm of R10 to ground. timeter and the Meterless VTVM.
The 6U5/6G5 will sharpen up the "tun- Since the range of measurement poten-
ing" of the VTVM. tiometer R9 is limited, the switchable
How It Works. Take a look at the sche- voltage divider network has been in-
matic diagram in Fig. 1. If you set the cluded to extend the usefulness of the
arm of potentiometer R9 to the low-volt- circuit to higher voltages. For stable
age end of the resistance element, and operation and ease of calibration, R9
adjust potentiometer R10 to bias V1 so must be a linear taper wire -wound poten-
that the "eye" just closes, as in Fig. tiometer, if you want the voltage scale to
1(A) , application of a d.c. voltage to be uniform. The 1000 -ohm value used by
the input leads will cause the eye to open the writer provides a good spread of the
again-see Fig. 1(B) . Now, by readjust- dial markings without requiring too
ing the bias by means of potentiometer many steps of the range switch, but oth-
R9, you can cause the eye to just close er values can be used to suit the individ-
again, as in Fig. 1(C) . And if you cali- ual constructor's needs. Use of 5% tol-
brate the position of the arm of R9 on erance resistors adds little to the cost of
1965 Spring Edition 135
 SI S2 RIO

R5
R4
R3
Layout and wiring are not
R2 R8 critical, but assembly is
RI easier if the order given
in the text is followed.

TI
R9 CI,C2

the unit, and provides better accuracy

and ease of calibration.
Construction. Since the box used to
house the writer's unit has no chassis, R8
all controls and associated parts are
mounted on the sloping front panel,
as shown above. Solder resistors R1
through R5 to the terminals of the range
switch before you mount it. It's also a
good idea to mount R9, R10, 21, S2, and
the test prod jacks before installing VI
the transformer and indicator tube.
For details of the angle bracket used
to support the socket of V1, see Fig. 3. ranges. Then short the test leads togeth-
When the socket is in place, you can de- er and adjust the zero setting control
termine the exact location of the 1%" (R10) so that the eye of tube V1 just
hole in the front panel for the eye end of closes.
the tube. Cut this hole and cement a Now fasten a piece of paper under the
piece of blackened cardboard mailing knob of R9 with Scotch tape, for use as
tube around it as a light shield. a temporary scale. Apply a known volt-
Fasten the filter capacitor to the rear age such as from a single flashlight cell,
surface of the box by means of the ma- and adjust R9 until the eye is just closed
chine screw in the center hole of the again. Mark the temporary scale accord-
tube socket bracket. A three -lug termi- ingly. Continue with other voltages until
nal strip on the side of the tube bracket the low range is calibrated.
supports diode D1 and resistor RI1. Re- This scale will hold for ranges three
sistors R6 and R7 (not indicated in the and five if you multiply the scale mark-
photos) are supported by the tube base ings by 10 and 100, respectively. Ranges
lugs to which they are soldered. two and four are calibrated in the same
Calibration. When you have completed way, after which you have only to trans-
and checked the wiring, switch the unit fer the temporary markings to a perma-
on and let it warm up until the eye pat- nent scale for mounting under the knob.
tern stabilizes. Set range switch 21 to Want to use your unit for a.c. also?
the lowest range and turn R9 counter- Just add a 0.002- to 0.005-µf., 200 -volt
clockwise so that the arm is at the end capacitor from pin 2 of V1 to ground,
nearest to R10. This is zero volts on all and you're in business.
136 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Split-second timing is v'tal in dozens of
operations from hrang .noon rockets to
checking hot rod performance at the local
drag strip. Equip coursed to make highly
accurate time check s by building the . . .

ELECT FON is
vrop WAtCH
OR YEARS the standard device for accurate
ela ased time measurement in sporting
events and industrial processes has been the
handheld stop watch. This works well for
many purposes, but it has its shortcomings
anc limitations. For ene thing, it can't very
well be operated remotely, and mo. t models
are limited to a total elapsed time of fifteen
minutes, when the hands are again on zero.
And you do have to remember to wind it, of
course.
IN,Also, pricing a jeweled -movement
ä pod
stop watch capable )f tenth -second accuracy
at the local jeweler's will probably get you a
quotation of $25.00 or more.
For less than $21.00 you can L uild this
electronic stop watch tha- will time events
in seconds and tenth up to a total of more
,

than 27 hours, yet can be reset to zero in sec-

onds. Readout is enli-ely in Arabic numerals,
with no unnumbered dial marks to interpret,
and remote control can be added for about
$4.00, with safe isailatio n of the control
circuit from the power line
You can time almost any kind of race or
 sporting event, and scores of other things moved from TIME to STDBY at the end
like free -flight model airplane endurance of a timing operation, the motor con-
flights, photographic time exposures or tinues to run, and the unit remains in
developing processes, phone call dura- readiness for the next timing operation.
tion, lab experiments, and ... but the list With the switch at STDBY, the timer
of potential uses is endless. can also be controlled from a remote point
How It Works. The heart of the elec- (if you elect to include this feature) by
tronic stop watch is a 600 -rpm synchro- merely closing a switch to initiate a tim-
nous motor. The shaft speed of this motor ing period and opening it at the termina-
is directly controlled by the frequency of tion. This can be done either manually
the 60 -cps a.c. line voltage (not the volt- or automatically by the mechanism of
age) , which is maintained by the utility the operation being timed, such as the
company to an accuracy of 0.1 of 1 per rise of a starting gate. Since the remote
cent, or better. At 600 rpm, the motor line carries only the current needed to
shaft makes 10 revolutions per second. A close a relay, it is not necessary to shield
plastic cam mounted on the shaft opens it, and it can have several ohms resist-
and closes a snap -action switch ten times ance without affecting operation.
per second. Each switch closure ad- The pilot lamp provides a visual alert-
vances an electronic counter one digit, ing signal to let the user know that the
indicating the lapse of 0.1 second. unit is standing by, or actually counting.
Since the counter has six digits, 99,- In a noisy environment (such as a drag
999.9 seconds can be counted without strip), the muted clicking of the leaf
interruption-a total of 27.77+ hours. switch can't be heard when the unit is at
The control switch has a standby po- STDBY.
sition ( marked STDBY) between the Construction. For correct electrome-
OFF and TIME positions. In this po- chanical operation, three of the com-
sition, the motor is started and allowed ponent parts are critical. The motor
to get up to full synchronous speed, must be a 600 -rpm unit of the synchro-
which requires about one second. If this nous type, and it must have sufficient
were not done, the timing during the first torque to operate the switch. The small-
second would be slow, causing a serious est, lightest, and least expensive motor
error in measuring duration of events filling these requirements, and having
that last no more than a few seconds. the added advantage of ready availabil-
Note also that when the switch is ity, is specified in the Parts List.

Fig. 1. The author's layout

of parts is compact, and can BINDING POSTS
be followed easily.

COUNTER

MOTOR
CAM

SI
Kl
32

TI

Fig. 2. Mechanical
mounting of motor and switch
S2 must maintain alignment.
138 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 In order to use the motor called for, /CAM IN SWITCH -OPEN POSITION

the operating force required by the snap- Ne CAM IN SWITCH -CLOSED POSITION

action switch must be very small. The OTOR SHAFT

switch specified requires an operating : ,/e OFFSET1 CENTER OF CAM

CAM DIAMETER -3/4
force of only four grams, and comes with u
the necessary leaf actuator already at- : 3f
tached. SWITCH LEAF
PIVOT POINT

The 6 -digit electrically operated coun- 1/4 LEAF

MOVEMENT
ter has a built-in full -wave bridge recti- MEASURED
AT CAM
CONTACT POINT
SWITCH CLOSED

fier circuit, which serves two important Fig. 3. Dimensions shown must
purposes. It converts a.c. line current to be followed closely to insure
d.c., which is required by the counter correct cam and switch action.
actuating coil for operation at the ten- :
counts -per-second rate used. It also pro-
vides a conductive path across the coil MOTOR LEAF ACTUATED SWITCH
terminals to dissipate the transient volt- SHAFT
SWITCH BRACKET
age generated when the actuating volt-
age is interrupted by action of the motor- Á BRACKET NUT

driven switch. If you want to substitute SPACER NUT

another counter for the one specified, it u MOTOR MTG EAR

(MAY BE TAPPED
*6-32
must have a similar bridge rectifier
circuit. --SPACER (OPTIONAL)
The layout of the author's unit is
shown in Figs. 1 and 2. Since wiring is VIII III CASE
not critical, the layout can be altered to
suit the constructor's preferences. How- MOTOR MOTOR
ever, good mechanical positioning and MTG SCREW
#4-40 OR *6-32
rigidity between the motor shaft and the
snap -action switch is very important. Fig. 4. Use of spacer tube and
The necessary mechanical relationship nut will avoid risk of bending
motor case and misaligning cam.
between these parts is shown in Fig. 3.
The control switch may be a rotary
type if desired, but the lever switch
specified allows more precise start -stop
i control. Another alternative would be to
use a push-button switch as a means for
starting and stopping the actual timing
function, with the lever switch controll-
ing the off and standby conditions. If a
push -on, push -off type of switch is used,
K6u4T the Electronic Stop Watch will require
less relearning on the part of users who
0 0 0 are familiar with the ordinary mechan-
1 7 5 ical stop watch.
ECONDS
The counter specified comes with a re-
movable escutcheon plate that allows
FIT SET additional mounting flexibility; it was
not used in the author's unit. In quiet
surroundings, the counter is a bit noisy
when it is running. If the sound is un-
ilELE desirable, insulate the counter from the
panel with soft rubber grommets, and
STOPWATCH
wrap the counter with a layer of Styro-
---__ foam or foam rubber.
The filament transformer, relay, and
U REMOTE CONTROL terminals are op-
NrtitoL tional parts, necessary only if you want
to use the remote control feature. The
1965 Spring Edition 139
 II RI
100K
SIA 2
Fig. 5. Wiring is not critical
SWITCH POSITIONS but it must be kept clear of
I OFF the cam and snap -action switch.
2 STANDBY-REMOTE
3 TIME

rOUNTER NC

PARTS LIST
3 S2 NO B1* -600 -rpm, 20-inch/ounce synchronous motor
(Synchron Model 630, Herbach & Rademan,
2 1204 Arch St., Philadelphia 7, Pa., Stock No.
SIB HI-26, $4.95)
A 11-NE-2 neon panel lamp
R1 -100,000 -ohm, %-watt carbon resistor
o oto o o o
S1 -2 -pole, 3 -position lever switch, non -short-
ing (Centralab PA -7001 or equivalent)
L S2*-Miniature snap -action switch, with inte-
gral leaf (Acro 2CMD1-2AXX-A24)
1* -117 -volt a.c., 6 -digit type counter (La-
fayette 99-9511)
1-5" x 4" x 3" aluminum utility box (Premier
OPTIONAL
FOR PMC-1005 or equivalent)
REMOTE
CONTROL
Misc.-Line cord and plug, panel marking
decals, sheet metal screws, machine screws and
BPI
nuts, terminal strip

K
Optional for Remote Control
BP1, BP2-Insulated binding post
6.3V K1 -6.3 -volt a.c. relay (Advance GHA-IC-6AC
BP2 or equivalent)
T1-6.3 volt, 0.75 -ampere heater transformer
*Do not substitute for these parts. Equivalent
items may be used for all other parts.
I17VAC

parts are small, and can be added to the Follow the schematic diagram of Fig.
basic unit without difficulty. However, 5 when you are ready to wire the unit.
be sure to insulate the terminals and the There are no critical points, but it is
contacts of relay K1 from the box, if a advisable to mechanically anchor the
metal box is used. wiring so that it cannot interfere with
The motor may be mounted in any po- operation of the motor and snap -action
sition. The four motor mounting ears switch.
can be tapped for 6-32 screws, or 4-40 Operation. The control switch is set
screws and nuts may be used. Take care to STDBY when timing operations are
not to overtighten the screws as the thin to be started. The motor reaches syn-
motor case is easily bent. Spacers of chronous speed in about one second, and
aluminum or brass tubing can be used as a rapid, quiet clicking of the snap -action
mounting standoffs, as shown in Fig. 4, switch will be heard. To start a timing
if desired. operation, flip the control switch to
The cam consists of a heavy plastic TIME and leave it there until the event
button with a Mu" hole drilled M" off nears the finish. At the exact finish, flip
center. It should make a gentle force-fit the switch back to the STDBY position,
on the motor shaft. Cement it perma- and read the time in seconds and tenths
nently in position with epoxy or a simi- of a second. To operate from a re-
lar strong adhesive. mote point, leave the unit in STDBY,
Make a simple sheet -metal bracket to close the remote switch to start, and
hold the snap -action switch in the re- open it to stop the timing operation.
quired position with respect to the cam, When the time has been read off, the
as shown in Figs. 3 and 4. If you make counter is reset to zero by a few strokes
elongated holes in the bracket, they will on the thumb wheel.
permit some adjustment of the cam -to - The author's unit has timed events
leaf spacing. Don't stray too far from ranging from sprint races to recording
the dimensions shown, or the motor may time of long -play tapes, but you can un-
be stalled by excessive friction or me- doubtedly come up with plenty of uses
chanical interference. not mentioned here. ----
140 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 BRIDGE
By FRANK A. PARKER

Having trouble reading the markings on your junk box capacitors? The C Bridge

will enable you to measure them more accurately than the maker marked them.

MOST OF US have many capacitors junk box contains a few of the common
gathering dust in the junk box be- parts needed, you can easily cut that
cause the markings can't be read. It's cost in half.
easy to measure the values of the un- How It Works. Any bridge works by
knowns if you have access to a capaci- comparing the signal voltage across the
tance bridge, but most such instruments unknown part with the same signal
come high, due to the wide range, sensi- across an adjustable known part that is
tivity, and accuracy that must be pro- accurately calibrated. The C Bridge is
vided in a laboratory instrument. no exception, but by using a null indi-
For those who can't afford so much cator that you already have on hand,
frosting on their technical cake, the "C and making the a.c. line provide the
Bridge" will do the job very well. And bridge signal, a lot of the cost of the
you can make the accuracy high enough precision lab bridge is avoided.
to yield far closer values than the maker The bridge circuit consists of poten-
puts on ordinary bypass and coupling tiometer R2, the "known" capacitor se-
capacitors. Best of all, since no sensitive lected by switch S1, and the unknown
null detector is built in, you can con- capacitor connected between binding
struct the C Bridge for about $12.00, posts BP1 and BP2. Notice that R2 ac-
even if you buy all new parts. If your tually forms two arms of the bridge
1965 Spring Edition 141
 Label positions of range
switch Si "x.01," "x1.0,"
and "x 10.0." Use capaci
tors of known value singly
and in parallel combina
BPI tions to calibrate your C
Bridge. By borrowing or
buying a few 5% capaci-
tors, you can give your
scales greater accuracy.

BPI, BP_'- l
-PARTS LIST ----
esal binding post ( one black,
one red) DI
13P3, BP4-Insulated pin jack (one black, one 750mo.
400PIV
red)
'UNKNOWN''
C1-0.001-µ,f., 200 -volt silver mica capacitor-
see text
C2 -0.1-µf., 200 -volt Mylar or paper capacitor reason for not using the 60 -cycle line
-see text
C3 -10-µf., 25 -voll electrolytic capacitor-see frequency from the 6.3 -volt secondary
text
1)1-750 -ma., 400-P1V silicon diode
of transformer T1 is that many inexpen-
F1-% -ampere, 250 -volt type 3AG fuse sive earphones don't reproduce a 60 -
.11-Open-circuit phone jack cycle signal very well.)
12-Phono jack, RCA type
R1 -350 -ohm, V2 -watt carbon resistor The signal voltage across the known
R2-10,000-oh»n, linear taper, carbon element and unknown capacitors in series will
potentiometer (Ohmite CMU-1031 or equiva- be divided according to their relative
lent)
Sl-Single-pole, 3 -position rotary switch capacities. By adjusting the arm of po-
S2-S.p.s.t. toggle switch tentiometer R2, a point will be found
T1-6.3 -volt, 0.6 -ampere filament transformer
1-5" x 4" x 3" aluminum utility box where the voltage is the same as the
Misc.-Hardware, knobs terminal strips, wire, voltage at BP4, the common point of the
solder. etc.
Note: Four 0.0001-µí. and four 0.01-µf. capaci- known and unknown capacities. In a
tors for use in calibration may be required if
capacitors of known value are not at hand
pair of headphones plugged into Ji, this
will be heard as a "null" point, at which
the signal disappears. Once the dial
circuit, since its moving contact is scale of the potentiometer is calibrated,
grounded, and the signal is connected the value of the unknown capacitor can
across the whole resistance element of be read from the scale as fast as you
R2. find the null point.
The signal? That's a harmonic of the Construction. All parts of the circuit
60 -cycle a.c. line frequency generated by mount in the cover portion of the box.
diode Di. It's mostly the 180 -cycle third There is nothing electronically critical
harmonic, since diode D1 acts as a half- about the parts layout, but potentiom-
wave rectifier, but the exact frequency eter R2 should be located so that the
does not matter very much, as long as calibrated scale can be made relatively
it can be heard in headphones or mea- large and easy to read. The writer's lay -
sured with a multimeter or VTVM. (The (Continued on page 152)
142 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 VHF
GRID -DIP
METER

Going to build some gear for working the VHF bands? VHF project
construction can be a real pleasure if you build this gadget first
-cost is under $10 with all -new parts, and it's a one -evening job

By E. H. MARRINER, W6BLZ

MOST OF US would like to build About the Circuit. The VHF Grid -Dip
equipment for the VHF part of the Meter is a simple, self-excited oscillator,
spectrum, but find ourselves blocked with a diode and microammeter so con-
by lack of a suitable instrument for ad- nected as to give a reading proportional
justing tuned circuits to the desired to the emitter -to -base r.f. current. When
frequency. A good VHF signal gener- the tuned collector tank circuit consist-
ator will do the job, but its cost will ing of LZ and Cl is coupled to an ex-
cause sharp, shooting pains in the region ternal tuned circuit that is resonant at
of the wallet. the frequency of oscillation, there is a
The author found a way around this sharp dip in the meter indication, similar
snag with a transistor version of the to the dip in grid current of the tube
familiar "grid -dip" oscillator, which, version.
though grid-less, works on the same Construction. The VHF Grid -Dip Meter
basic principle. is assembled in an aluminum utility box
1965 Spring Edition 143
 with all parts mounted on the flanged
half. This provides complete enclosure
and shielding when the box halves are
mated, but also permits easy access
when a battery change is needed (which
isn't often, incidentally).
As in all VHF devices, placement of
parts and length of leads is important.
Take particular pains to center the hole LI

for tuning capacitor Cl 3/" from the

end of the box, measured on the outside.
Take equal care to center the coil socket
in the end of the box s" back from the
front panel surface (outside measure) . SI

If you use the specified part for Cl, and PARTS LIST
make the coil as described below, cali- B1 -9 -volt transistor battery (RCA VS 323 or
bration of your unit will closely follow equivalent)
that shown on the dial of the author's CI -4- to 20 -pf. variable capacitor (E. F.
Johnson Type 201111)
unit. C2 -5-pf. NPO tubular ceramic capacitor
Mount the coil socket, tuning capaci- C3 -10 -pf. silver mica capacitor
C4-10 -pf. NPO tubular ceramic capacitor
tor Cl, switch Si, potentiometer R2, C5, C6 -0.01-µf. disc ceramic capacitor
and meter MI first, since lugs on these D1 -1N277 VHF semiconductor diode
I ¡-VHF tuning inductor-see text
parts support many of the other parts. MI -99-5026 50-µa. tuning meter (Lafayette
Note that Si is held in place by an in- Radio Electronics, 111 Jericho Turnpike,
ternally threaded insulated terminal and Syosset, L.I., N.Y.)
O1 -2N1742 VHF transistor
a binding head machine screw at each R1-330 -ohm, V2 -watt carbon resistor
end. Wire the small parts according to R2 -50,000 -ohm, linear -taper miniature poten-
tiometer
the pictorial diagram. Be sure to use a R3-39,000 -ohm, /-watt carbon resistor
heat sink every time you heat a transis- R4-3300 -ohm, 1/2 -watt carbon resistor
tor lead, either by soldering to it or its Sl-S.p.s.t. slide switch (Lafayette 99-6189 or
equivalent)
supporting lug; a small wad of wet facial 1-4" x 2W' x 2W' aluminum utility box (LMB
tissue gripped around the lead with a J-875 or equivalent)
Misc.-#16 solid copper wire (for L1), hookup
small alligator clip is good. wire, ceramic standoffs-see text, etc.
Note that capacitor C6 is not shown
in the pictorial. In practice, the capacity 11.

to ground through the ceramic standoff

supporting the junction of RI and R4 trollable with potentiometer R2. If this
at one end of Si was enough for proper is not so, check for a wiring error, or
operation in the author's unit. If you use defective transistor or diode.
a different insulated terminal, better Calibration near the low end of the
play safe by using C6, as shown in the range can be checked against an FM
schematic. It may be wired from the hot receiver. Tune in an FM station on a
end of the standoff terminal to the channel above 100 mc., hold the grid -dip
ground lug. unit loop close and parallel to one wire
The sawed-off base of an FT -243 crys- of the twin-lead at the FM receiver an-
tal holder serves as the base for Li, tenna posts, and tune the dipper slowly
the tuning "coil," which is actually a through its range. Near full engagement
loop of #16 solid copper wire. Make the of capacitor Cl, the output of the meter
loop 1/2" wide, with parallel sides, and will be heard interfering with the FM
trim the length to just 2" long from the station tuned in. Tune the meter exactly
end of the base pins to the end of the to the FM station signal, and mark the
loop. Cover the exposed portion with dial with the corresponding frequency.
sleeving of Teflon or polyethylene before Do the same for other stations of known
soldering to the base pins. frequency that your receiver covers.
Adjustment. Plug in the coil and set Bear in mind that if your dipper tunes
switch SI to the "on" position. The meter to an FM station on, say, 100.9 mc. with
should read up-scale at once, and the Cl almost fully meshed, it can't be far
amount of the deflection should be con - from 150 mc. with Cl fully unmeshed, if
144 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 LI

Use of inexpensive but sensitive uncalibrated

tuning meter as indicator helps keep cost down.

Values of C2 and C4
are critical for proper
operation at VHF frequen-
cies. Use heat sink when
soldering Dl and Q1 leads for
safety. Low -loss crystal socket
serves as socket for Ll. Physical lay-
out of tuned circuit affects frequency
band covered, should be followed closely.

you have followed the construction data.

If you are a 2 -meter ham (or have a pal
who is) , check the dipper against the re-
ceiver calibration, and so on. its range. At the resonant frequency of
Operation. Once calibrated, your VHF the trap, the meter will show a sharp
Grid -Dip Meter serves both as a signal dip. Be sure to adjust R2 as needed to
source and means for determining the keep the meter indicating nearly full
resonant frequency of tuned circuits in scale, so the dip will show clearly.
its range. Want to trap out a local FM When the dip is found, reduce the
station on 106.9 mc. so you can receive coupling between the dipper loop and
that distant station on 107.3 mc. ? A the trap circuit, and carefully find the
trap series -resonant at 106.9 mc. across center of the dip; read the resonant
the receiver input will do the job. A frequency of the trap from the dipper
short length of small coil stock of the dial. Tune the trap trimmer over its
"Airdux" kind and a low-value trimmer range to resonate the trap at 106.9 mc. if
capacitor (15- to 20 -pf. max.) will do. possible. If necessary, trim the coil
Connect the coil and trimmer directly value, and try again, until you hit the
(no extra leads) in parallel with each frequency of the unwanted station. Now
other. Couple the loop of the dipper to reconnect the trap coil and capacitor in
the trap circuit by holding it near the series across the FM receiver input, and
end of the coil, and watch the meter make final adjustment for minimum sig-
while tuning the dipper slowly through nal from the unwanted station. -i-
145
1965 Spring Edition
 FOR
:-
HANDLES
MINIBOXES
The Best of

Good-looking, sturdy handles for units built

TIPS & TECHNIQUES

WIRE STRIPPER
FOR PLASTIC INSULATION
A handy wire stripper for plastic -insulated
into Miniboxes can be made with pieces of hookup wire can be made from a strip of
300 -ohm TV twin -lead. Determine how long sheet copper
the handle should be, cut the twin -lead to with a V-
length, and punch a small hole at each end shaped slot in
through the center of the insulation. Fasten one end as
shown in the
photograph at
right. Bolt the
copper in
30011 place and al-
TWINLEAD
low the iron
to heat. The
insulation to
be removed is laid in the "V" and rotated.
The heat will make a clean break in the
insulation and permit it to be easily removed
by simply sliding it off the wire.
the handle in place with two of the screws -Milton F. Dickfoss
that hold the box together. If the unit is
rather heavy, a stronger handle can be PLUG-IN CONNECTOR
made by cutting the twin -lead a bit longer FOR 300 -OHM TWIN -LEAD
than needed, stripping off some insulation
at each end, and twisting and soldering the Connectors for 300 -ohm ribbon transmis-
two conductors together. -Jay Prager sion line can be bought at reasonable cost,
but there are plenty of times when you
CHANGING PANEL need one right away, and the shop shelf is
DECALS WITHOUT TEARS bare. If you have a spare crystal holder
of the FT -243
Ever wish you could change some of those variety, the
decals you put on the panels of your home - problem is
b ewed electronic masterpieces? It happens easily solved.
to all of us when we modify a unit, or think If the crystal
of a better name. If this is your problem, is still in the
holder, disas-
semble the
unit and re-
move it. Heat
each pin with
the soldering
iron and shake
or blow out excess solder. Use a file to
cut a groove in the Bakelite portion of the
holder just wide and deep enough to fit
snugly over the twin -lead you are using.
Face a strip of fresh cellophane tape over Next, strip the conductors of the twin -lead
the decal and stick it down well, leaving back %" to %", clean and pre -tin them.
one end free. Then remove the old decal by Push them fully home in the crystal hold-
pulling the tape directly out and away from er pins, solder, and reassemble the hold-
the panel. It may take two or three pieces er. Any standard crystal socket serves as
of tape to remove stubborn old decals com- a female connector on the receiver chassis.
pletely. -Stanley E. Bammel -Waldo T. Boyd
146 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
EMERGENCY OR
SPECIAL SCREWDRIVERS

If you carry a screwdriver to fit every width

and length of screw -slot you encounter,
you'll find that they can crowd other items
out of the tool box. Here's a way to obtain PLUG-IN TYPE
those special sizes you need without having PORTABLE
them bulge over the sides of your tool kit.
Cut some short driver blades from 3/46" INVERTERS'
MODELS
A.C. HOUSEHOLD ELECTRICITY 6-RMF 16 volts) 60 to 80
Anywhere ...
in your own earl watts. Shipping weight 12
lbs. DEALER NET
Operates Standard A.C. PRICE. $36.50
Record Players
Dictating Machines [Link] (12 volts) 90 to
Small Radios 125 watts. Shipping weight
Electric Shavers 12 lbs. DEALER NET
Heating Pads, etc. PRICE. $36.50
*Additional Models Available

"'s
"A" Battery
steel and grind the opposite edges parallel u',P!21;I
llipl8faQlül!IilaLif
li!ii
ELIMINATOR
and
For Demonstrating
so that each blade is a snug push-fit in one Testing Auto Radios-
TRANSISTOR or VIBRATOR
of your hex -nut drivers. Then grind the Il! OPERATED!
end to leave 1/8" to ßi6" projecting. Finally Designed for testing D.C.
Electrical Apparatus on Reg-
grind the tip to the thickness you need for ular A.C. Lines-Equipped
with Full -Wave Dry Disc -
those special narrow or broad screw-slots. Type Rectifier, assuring
-Ken Murray noiseless, interference -free
operation and extreme long
life and reliability.
MAY ALSO BE USED AS A BATTERY CHARGER
EXTRA MODEL 610C-ELIF ...
6 volts at 10 amps. or 12 volts
at 6 amps. Shipping weight 22 lbs.
"LAMP HANDEE" DEALER NET PRICE S55.00
MODEL 620C-ELIT... 6 volts at 20 amps, or 12 volts at
10 amps. Shipping weight 33 lbs.
Here's an old trick, but one so useful that DEALER NET PRICE $73.50
it's worthwhile rehashing. It's easy to see
into those dark ALL -TRANSISTOR
chassis corners MODEL 707
if you have
a spare Ungar
"Standard
Line" solder-
ing iron. This
is the common
type of iron ATR
that comes c .

equipped with
several screw -on heating units of different
wattages. The thread is the same as that $2995
for the base of a standard 7 -watt decorative SUGGESTED RETAIL PRICE
light bulb. For less eye strain, all you have . for those who want the finest!
to do is to screw one of these bulbs into the Check the features of this all -new,
soldering iron, in place of a heating unit. all -transistor Model 707 Karadio by
-Steve Brant, K8VII ATR . features galore that make
sales easier, keep users happier! Com-
ANOTHER KIND pare ...
and without hesitation place
OF THIRD HAND your order NOW for the new all -
transistor ATR Karadio.
If you're suffering from the same old prob- Neutral Gray-Tan baked enamel finish. Over-
lem of not having enough hands to hold a all size approximately 51/2" deep x 61/2"
component, a soldering iron, and a roll of wide x 2" high. Shipping Weight 5 lbs.
SEE YOUR ELECTRONIC PARTS DISTRIBUTOR
WRITE FACTORY FOR FREE LITERATURE....

ATR ELECTRONICS, INC.

Rodio Co. Formerly. American Television 6
Quotety Products Since 1931
ST. PAUL 1, MINNESOTA-U:S.A.
CIRCLE NO. 1 ON READER SERVICE CARD
1965 Spring Edition 147
 solder (unless, of course, you use your
teeth!), try this idea. Slip a small rubber
grommet over the end of a pair of needle-
nose pliers and use them to hold the com-
ponent. This "third hand" can also be used
when you solder transistors, diodes or other
small parts requiring a heat sink.
-Charles Caringella
RIBBON REELS BECOME
SOLDERING IRON STANDS

Worn-out typewriter ribbons should be dis-

carded, of course, but you might want to
keep the reels they come on. You can make
la
YOUR CAREER handy holders for soldering irons from this

MSOE
To guide you to a
successful future in
ELECTRONICS
RADIO -TV type of reel. All you have to do is bend
the reel to resemble the one shown in the
COMPUTERS photo. -Wayne Floyd
ELECTRICAL ERASER CLEANS

ENGINEERING CIRCUIT BOARDS

If you've ever faced the problem of hav-

'This interesting pictorial booklet tells you ing the foil separate from a printed -circuit
how you can prepare for a dynamic career board when you attempt to solder it, this
as an Electrical Engineer or Engineering tip is for you. Before you start, carefully
Technician in many exciting, growing clean the copper foil by rubbing it with a
fields:
MISSILES AVIONICS AUTOMATION
typewriter eraser like that shown. The
DEVELOPMENT
SALES
eraser has the correct amount of abrasive,
ELECTRICAL POWER ROCKETRY and removes oxidation and dirt so that
RADAR RESEARCH
Get all the facts about job opportunities,
length of study, courses offered, degrees
-
you can earn, scholarships, part-time work
as well as pictures of the Milwaukee
School of Engineering's educational and
recreational facilities. No obligation it's
yours free.
-
MILWAUKEE SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING
MAIL COUPON TODAY!
joints can be rapidly tinned and soldered.
Milwaukee School of Engineering Incidentally, this technique is recommended
Dept. EX -65, 1025 N. Milwaukee St., Milwaukee, Wis.
Please send FREE "Your Career" booklet by NASA for high -reliability soldering of
I'm interested in satellite components.
Electronics D Radio-TV Computers
Electrical Engineering D Mechanical Engineering -Kent A. Mitchell, W3WTO
Name. _..........Age..............
PLEASE PRINT IDENTIFYING
Address........._ ........................... _............................................__............._.._._.... TRANSISTOR TYPES
City.. Zone............State...._..__._._.._.
D I'm eligible for veterans education benefits - Painted -on transistor type -numbers often
Discharge date. Ins -117 wear off with repeated handling, and many
CIRCLE NO. 38 ON READER SERVICE CARD transistors, especially those of the general -
148 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
purpose variety sold to experimenters, are
not marked at all. If you do a lot of bread-
boarding of circuits, you'll save yourself
considerable time and trouble by scratch-
ing type numbers and/or other data such now there are
as "a.f." or "r.f.," and "pnp" or "npn," on
the outside of each transistor case with a
sharp instrument. -Stanley E. Bammel time & tool -saving
IMPROVING COMFORT
OF TAP WRENCH HANDLE double duty sets
The ordinary tap New PS88 all -screwdriver set
wrench can be pretty rounds out Xcelite's popular,
wearing on the hands compact convertible tool set line.
when many holes must Handy midgets do double duty
be tapped in hard or when slipped into remarkable
hollow "piggyback" torque ampli- PS88
tough metal. In a fier handle which provides the 5 slot tip,
pinch, slide a pair of grip, reach and power of standard
3 Phillips
screwdrivers
large rubber battery drivers. Each set in a slim,
clip sleeves over the trim, see-thru plastic pocket case,
two halves of the also usable as bench stand.
wrench handle, as
shown. They can be PS7
2 slot tip,
taped or tied in place 2 Phillips
if desired, and will screwdrivers,
help prevent the development of blisters 2 nutdrivers

when a lot of tapping must be done.

-Jerome Cunningham
SLEEVE PROTECTS
AGAINST DRILLING DAMAGE

If you find it necessary to drill holes in

delicate pieces of electronic equipment, pro-
tect them from damage by using a piece of
polystyrene tubing over the bit as shown
in the photo. The tubing, which can be PS120
10 color
coded nutdrivers

taped to the drill chuck to hold it in place,

will keep the bit from plunging through the
hole when the metal gives way, and then
striking and damaging delicate components
on the other side of the panel.
-Stanley E. Bammel
BATTERY CLAMP SERVES
AS SELF-GRIPPING PLIERS XCELITE INC. 54 BANK ST., ORCHARD PARK, N. Y.
Please send free literature N563.
A large battery clamp can be a handy tool name
for turning TV lead-in stand-off insulators; address
as a bonus, it will hang onto the stand-off
if you have to let go. Such a clamp can city state & zone

also help in turning wing -nuts and thumb- V J

screws, and in getting those pesky caps off CIRCLE NO. 38 ON READER SERVICE CARD

1965 Spring Edition 149

GIANT NEW 1965 CATALOG

bottles of coil dope and speaker cement.

And as a "third hand" for holding together
two parts to be soldered, it's hard to beat.
-Joseph Carroll
FLUORESCENT
STARTER REPAIR

The starters in fluorescent light fixtures

seldom outlive the fluorescent tubes. This
is almost invariably due to the failure of
the poor -grade capacitor used in the starter.
100's OF BIG PAGES When the starter goes, the tube blinks on
CRAMMED WITH SAVINGS and off, or doesn't light at all. To repair
BURSTEIN-APPLEBEE CO. the starter, open its case by bending back
the lugs holding the aluminum shell to the
¡Dept. 459, 1012 McGee St., Kansas City 6, Mo.
1

Rush me FREE 1965 B -A Catalo SEND

FOR IT
fiber base. Clip
out the paper -
Name TODAY
foil capacitor
Address and discard it.
City
IEREE Substitute a
State 600 -volt, .01-µf.
CIRCLE NO. 6 ON READER SERVICE CARD ceramic disc
capacitor for
the original ca-
Interested in a space age electronics career? pacitor if the
light uses a 15-20 watt fluorescent tube.
For a light using a 30-40 watt tube, install a

THINK .005-µf., 600-volt ceramic disc capacitor.

Then reassemble the starter, making sure
that the capacitor leads do not short to the
aluminum shell. -Bert Isbell, K5IBZ
FOOT PADS
FOR HEADPHONES

Nothing beats a pair of ordinary, inexpen-

sive magnetic headphones for general util-
ity use, but they
can become very
uncomfortable if
you wear them for
any length of time.
If copying code or
trying to snag rare
s.w. stations is
your meat, get a
couple of foam rub-
ber callus cushions
For a free copy of this folder write: to attach to your
headphones. Al-
Penn Technical Institute though these pads
are intended to ease foot problems, they'll
5440 Penn Ave,, Pittsburgh, Pa. do a good job on your ears, too!
Phone 441-3502 -John A. Comstock
CIRCLE NO. 29 ON READER SERVICE CARD 150 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 the receiver antenna, either directly or
Crystal Super Calibrator through a small capacitor, and fully
mesh the padder capacitor plates. Then
(Continued from page 90 ) back off on the padder slowly, listening
as the beat note gets lower, until zero
beat is reached.
broke," and complete the final assembly, When the frequency difference be-
or you can hook everything up on the tween the calibrator harmonic and the
bench with clip leads and make sure it standard signal gets down to a few cy-
works before assembling the unit in the cles, a regular oscillation of the receiver
box. If it doesn't oscillate, recheck ev- signal strength meter will be seen. This
erything, particularly the transistors. indication is more sensitive than the
When you're ready, mount the circuit audible one, and permits adjustment to
board on the inside of the prepared box within one cycle per second or better If !

cover, taking care to space it clear of you adjust your calibrator this carefully,
the cover with quarter -inch spacers, or the harmonic will be within 15 cycles of
with extra nuts on the mounting screws. the correct frequency, even at 150 mc!
Put the cover on, and complete the wir- Bear in mind that, while the unit will
ing to the battery, on -off switch, and the function with a 1.5 -volt, one -cell battery
output binding post. Last, connect the supply, it will also operate on higher
two wires going to the crystal and pad - voltages (safely to at least 10 volts) ,
der capacitor, put on the second cover, and will give commensurately greater
and you're ready to fire up. output, at some small sacrifice in ther-
Adjustment. To adjust for zero beat mal stability. And you can even use an
with WWV, tune in the 10 -mc. transmis- a.c. power supply running off the re-
sion (or the 5 -mc. signal if you can't ceiver heater circuit, as shown in the
hear the 10 -mc. signal at your location) . schematic, if the few milliamperes of
Couple the output of the calibrator to battery drain worry you.

TELEX
- 30

FOR QUALITY
The quality of Telex headsets has become well known to hams over the last
twenty-five years. Here are three Telex headsets that deliver the
kind of top grade performance that hams expect from Telex-

MAGNA-TWIN TELESET MONOSET

For absolute maximum intelli- Lightweight, economy version Feather -light at 1.2 oz.... Elim-
gibility under difficult QRM con- of the famous Magna -Twin ... inates headset fatigue...Sound
ditions ... Super -comfort foam High performance, shock -proof from replaceable driver is fed
cushions ... Rugged, moisture - Magna -Twin drivers... Designed directly into your ears through
proof magnetic drivers give
broad response, excellent sen-
especially for ham requirements. adjustable tone arms ... Telex
quality construction assures re-
sitivity ... Sturdy construction liability.
of high impact plastic.

Write for descriptive literature today. TELEX/Acoustic Products

COMMUNICATIONS ACCESSORIES
3054 Excelsior Blvd. Minneapolis16, Minn.
CIRCLE NO. 40 ON READER SERVICE CARD
1965 Spring Edition 151
 electrolytics in parallel. This was neces-
C Bridge sary in order to bring C3 to within the
desired 5% accuracy, since ordinary elec-
(Continued from page 142 )
trolytics are not made to close toler-
ances. The writer found that two
Sprague Type TE capacitors marked 6
out is convenient, but need not be fol- and 2 µf. totaled 10 µf. when paralleled.
lowed exactly. An optional neon pilot lamp was in-
First drill and deburr all the holes cluded in the writer's unit. If you wish
needed for mounting the parts. Note to add this feature, connect a plastic -
that in the unit shown the transformer, encased NE -2A (or similar) neon lamp
line fuse, and a neon pilot lamp (option- in series with a 200,000 -ohm, 1/2 -watt
al) are all mounted in one end of the carbon resistor across the primary of
box, with all connections for the null transformer Ti.
detector at the opposite end. One of the Calibration. The C Bridge is calibrated
two terminal strips is mounted near the by connecting known values of capaci-
center of the box lid, and supports D1, tance across the "unknown" binding
Rl, and the common ends of capacitors posts, adjusting potentiometer R2 to the
Cl, C2, and C3. Use a heat sink when null point, and marking the position of
soldering Dl. the knob pointer with the value of the
Standard capacitors Cl and C2 can be known capacitor. To do this, connect the
bought in 10%, 5%, 2%, or even 1% tol- null detector by plugging it into the ap-
erance. The 5% tolerance is recommend- propriate jacks (JI, J2, or BP3 and
ed for Cl as the best compromise in B/24), and plug the C bridge into the
price and accuracy. For C2, the saving a.c. line.
for the 10% tolerance may be enough You can use high -impedance phones,
to be worthwhile. Capacitor C3 is actu- a VTVM, or best of all, an amplifying
ally made up of two small 25-w.v.d.c. type a.c. VTVM as null detector. -i -
// N.Y. PORT OF AUTHORITY TAKING OVER 13

"MOVING OUT SALE

...
We must unload 3 BULGING WAREHOUSES
BLOCKS FOR TRADE CENTER & WE'RE IN IT!
at the GREATEST PRICE SLASH in Electronic History!

FREE $1 BUY WITH EVERY 10 YOU ORDER °n.!¡,"e;,,, FREE GIFT WITH EVERY ORDER
D 1000 -ASST.
..yew., nou.
HARDWARE
....nn. 'issue
KITS
Ste. 1 3AMPNENOI CO -A% CONNECT-
ORS so-x3a, Pl.-zsa, [Link] o+u,s
5
1 1
ER
-WESTINGHOUSE TV TUN-
atm+, nr,w new tieu rpcee,
Si 5200 SONOTONE NEARING AID $5
cOmpteu tees epiere a a,nerre
100-MIXED eDEAL'_JACKPOT" Si $15.00 TELEVISION
r PARTS si 20-ITT
,r2, b. r rs,
SELENIUM RECTIFIERS
1000
RIVETSntnsl
ASSORTED
useful selected nixes
S1 conaene'e. vuto' nr p,2!
ZI CORD
.

{
'JACKPOT"
- TV ALIGNMENT
opr . r

TOOLS
nn !sons [Link].,
`n,ree's,
fi
.. 1
S
1000 ASSORTED WASHERS Si O100'.AINIATURE
z sow2rw.. [Link] lot 2vu movt 2verui [Link]
S
1 6-IBM COMU nOb
I»aw wnn DSECTIONf
covens-
100 ASST.
It RADIO KNOBS
POD'*' ices
Si $15.00 RADIOO PARTS Si e Diodes, Reststore. ere. $ 1
D TELEPHONE RECORDING DE
VICE p s p re n nn e' tele
fi error
100-RADIO
,ti
nS TV SOCKETS Si
POT" nano' uv ',men! -JACK-
50-RCA LUCITE !RADIO KNOBS Si
BONANZA "JACKPOT" nnl Sota. s,5
nos o wl , we,im o< [Link]é
,

phone type p R Dln, a pin. H p Wul,r type w, nacator Pointer hems-Money-Boo..N,nnI» ..

UNIVnE SmAen5e<,' PM EAeER fi 100-ASST. TERMINAL STRIPS

lys w aase
Si 300-.557. Ih
Top Br,na,
W RESISTORS
3eort !eves, eznllena. fi t1e1GclNúmo UBESOI 2055
S1
- ASST t/ WATT
3R wP ,

100 RESTS SO-G.E. FLASHLIGHT BULBS $1

D S1 Ome sors.. 1 S
500-A55í MOLDED CONDENSERS Si RPR-R, z.T L 1.

100 - ASSORTED Vz WATT fi

UNIVERSAL {" PM SPEAKER op rena, snort taws, e,cen<na --
Atnleo b meenel. +ue11tY L"n e .
2_G.E. PIECES OF EQUIPMENT
+ue w won ose+ zoo [Link] [Link],
Si
RESISTORS son.. so m
-
ELECTROSTATIC 3" TWEETER S1 STRIPS
SPEAKER to' PM. fli-Pl. etc 70 - ASSORTED WATT RESIST. $1
1
SO
GHETTI n,nar .ASSORTED
es
SPA- $
1 O.E. TV POWER TRANSFORMER
R5Ome, 30')/SeO., 0.3 -awe 5..SA
34
ORS «me in 5'Y
i
.

S -mn OI
nTxRxAN
SaOaMERS
fi 35 - o ORS
ASSORTED 2 WATT RESIST. Si D
I00-ASSORTED RUBBER GROM-
METS n.t v:u fi 10 N,A NOOK
ror ono.
CABLE BIG
[Link] ror ul osas ..
f
1
S
O
AUDIOm OTrnn , wS Si SO-PRECISIONmRESISTORS S,R 10 - zSURE-.2RIP ALLIGATOR S1
CRYSTAL LAPEL MICROPHONE
nten tmneaenre, zon.3000
Si
fi
ron
Rea true aeom -i CLIPS ptt

fi D
eut. e3o e.s ..

PHONO PLUGS i
1ROQA>TSORTED TUBES
{-TOGGpE SWITCHES
SPST, T. DPST, DPDT
20 -
ASS'T9 WIREWOUND
RESISTORS, s. Io. zo w.0
Si 10 - SETS
PIN JACKS xcA wpe
Si io. a Ina2n,l

IS-A55í.
u popw.r
ROTARY
ww ezo
SWITCHES
..me
$1 6 - ASST.
FIERS 05m,,
SELENIUM
IOOm,,
RECTI-
SOOme, ale.
Si 10 SETS
JACKS se.-DELUXE
ror m,nr wrpove...
PLUGS i -i$..FR » e^»",
10-SYLVANIA 1U{ TUBES
2at.ta2t
ITS
rtons

CLEAN UP THE KITCHEN "JACK-

- SYLVANIA HEAT
25 Trenettore, le.
SINKS 51 20-ASSORTED TV COILS
.... S 1
ALL AMERICAN
sr.w,.a [Link] lzawe.
TORE
- KIT S
2
POT"
only one to
1003Aii Z A
,
Rte o
e2momer

.NSeTOeCeK CLIPS
1
Si
so-ASSORTED MILAR CONDEN- yR
SERS roP2i.r
20-DENDIX CONDENSERS
true .Dol r5 . T ..:
$1
i I.v..ta.o.
{0_ASSORTED
,
TV KNORS1Ye
aloena
{ _ w SPOOLS HOOK-UP
rrDee. sao .. .. S 1
lz nee. lzwye, socs, 35W ....
3 - TOP BRAND 35W4 TUBES Si
WIRE 51e
CNAT ZU DI MITZIA "JACK
fi
z000. ers airterenl Soto'.

fi
r

POT' aounle yore money [Link] it yR

10 u-RASS DUAL CONTROLS r o.
veto fll-PI. see
f.
+
100-A55í. CERAMIC CONDEN-
SERS vome m [Link]
Y - ASST. TV EIECTROIEIC
r » «t nos mmpNuiy wonw . - _i
Sler» CONDENSERS Dover

HANDY WAY TO ORDER: Pend mark or write amounts wanted in each box, Enclose with check or money order, add extra for shipping.

BROOKS RADIO & TV CORP., 84 Vesey St., Dept. B, New York 7, N.Y. coeEae"7íúe
CIRCLE NO. 5 ON READER SERVICE CARD
152 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Car Battery Saver
(Continued from page 55)
LATEST SAMS BOOKS FOR
EVERYONE IN ELECTRONICS

Mounting the Battery Saver. After de-

termining the polarity of your car's
t. Use This Handy Order Form 9
Electronic Gadgets for Your Car. Practical projects for 1
electrical system, choosing the proper building a tachometer, transistorized battery
checker/charger, handbrake protector, other auto- I
circuit and constructing the Battery motive electronic devices. Order CAR -1, only. $2.95 .

Saver, the last step is to mount it in CB Radio Construction Projects. complete details for
1
the car and hook it up. One self -tapping building S -meter, portable antenna, pocket monitor
receiver, selective call system, SWR meter, modula- 1
screw will secure the case in any loca- tion monitor, etc. Order CBG-1, only $2.50
tion you choose. When it is in place, Hi-Fi Projects for the Hobbyist. Improve your present
connect the ground lead under a bolt on hi-fi system -build low-cost rumble filter, noise filter,
hi -gain antenna, transistorized mike preamp, FM
1
the dash or to any metal that is in com- tuner, tape recorder, etc. Order HFF-1, only $2.50
mon potential with the frame of the car. I
Amateur Radio Construction Projects. Shows how to build
Connect the ignition wire to the cold 40-80 meter novice transmitter; 30 -watt, 15, 40, 80
meter transmitter; crystal -controlled converters, I
accessory side of the ignition switch. and other ham gear. Order ARP -1, only $2.50
This is the terminal normally used for a ABC's of Electronics. ELW-1 $1.95
I
D How to Read Schematic Diagrams. RSD-1
radio or other accessories. Turn on the D Electronics For the Beginner. BHJ-1
1.50
3.95
ignition as a test; nothing should hap- D Having Fun With Transistors. THE -1
Radio Receiver Servicing. RS -2
2.50
2.95
pen. Connect the other lead to the head- Transistor Ignition Systems Handbook. IGS-1 2.50
light switch on the side that goes to the D Garage Door Openers. GDO-1
Modern Dictionary of Electronics. DIC-2
2.95
6.95
So You Want To Be a Ham. HAM -3 2.95
TV Servicing Guide. SGS-1 2.00
D ABC's of Hi-Fi and Stereo. HSF-1 1.95
ABC's of Short -Wave Listening. SWL-1 1.95
ABC's of Citizens Band Radio. ACR-1 1.95
Electronic Games & Toys You Can Build. EGT-1 2.50
D Science Projects in Electronics. SPJ-1 2.95
Practical Projects in Radio Electronics. RSM -1 1.95
Science Projects In Electricity. SPE -1 2.95
Computer Circuit Projects You Can Build. BOC-1 2.95
Tape Recorders-How They Work, TRW -2 3.95
Electronic Experiments & Projects. ESE -1 2.50
D ABC's of Transistors. TRA -1 1.25
D ABC's of Electronic Organs. ECO -1 1.95
ABC's of Ham Radio. HAP -2 1.95
ABC's of Computers. ABC -1 1.95
Electronic Servicing For the Beginner. BSJ-1 2.95
ABC's of Television Servicing. STA -1 1.95
Short -Wave Listeners Guide. SLG-1 1.25
How to Repair Small Appliances. APP -1 2.50
Know Your VOM-VTVM. KVM-1 2.50
Automotive Electronics Test Equipment. AEL-1 2.50
D ABC's of Electronic Test Equipment. STE-1 1.95
101 Ways to Use Your Oscilloscope. TEM-2 2.50
D Electronic Musical Instrument Handbook. EMI -1 2.50
Citizens Band Radio Handbook. CBH-2 2.95
Sams International Code Training System. CTG -1 6.95
You can mount finished unit in almost anything, Handbook of Electronic Tables & Formulas. HTF-2 3.95
Electronics Math Simplified. 2 Vols. MAT -20 7.95
even plastic soap dish. This one fits in Minibox. Tube Substitution Guide. TUB -8 1.50
D Understanding Electronic Components. UEC-1 2.95 I
Understanding Electronic Circuits. UEW4 2.95

headlights, or again, the "cold" side of FREE!Askfor the Sams Booklist, describing I
the switch. With the switch off, no over 300 important books.
Index to Photof act, world's finest cir-
voltage should be measured. Then, with cuit
FREE!
data on 58,000 TV & radio models.
the ignition switch on, turn on the head-
lights. Still nothing should occur. How- HOWARD W. SAMS & CO., INC.
ever, when you turn off the ignition with Order from any Electronic Parts Distributor, or
mail to Howard W. Sams & Co., Inc., Dept. EX -1
the headlights on, your Battery Saver 4300 W. 62nd St., Indianapolis, Ind. 46206
will come to life with a loud blat. Send books checked above. $ enclosed.
You have built, tested and installed a 1 D Send FREE Booklist Send Photofact Index
device that will save you considerable
trouble. Of course, the acid test comes I Name
when you trade cars. Which do you pull fAddress
out first: the Battery Saver or those City State Zip
new tires ? ins ismIN CANADA: A. C. Simmonds & Sons, Ltd., Toronto 7 we owl
1965 Spring Edition 153 CIRCLE NO. 34 ON READER SERVICE CARD
 S AV E Time & The WXCVR
(Continued from page 97)
BU
BU ground lug bolted on the left end of the
L D cover. Run a fairly heavy, solid wire
POP TRONICS from terminal 1 to the grounded mount-
ing foot of the 3 -lug tie strip. Use sim-
ilar wire for the balance of T1's connec-
HANDBOOK Projects tions to insure adequate support for the
And Others Wifh transformer. A study of the illustra-
tions will reveal how the rest of the
components are mounted and wired.
Antenna Tips. Don't skimp on the sky -
wire if you want topnotch performance
from the WXCVR, for long wavelengths
need long antennas. Within 50 miles of
an FAA station, a 25' antenna will prob-
ably be sufficient. However, if you want
Simple - Easy to reach out for distance, put up at
least 50 feet of wire, and install the an-
tenna as high in the air as possible.
Send For FREE Catalog For best results, use a cold water
pipe or a rod driven into moist earth
for the ground connection. If you can't
IRVING ELECTRONICS CO. conveniently do this, simulate a ground
117 DWYER SAN ANTONIO 1. TEXAS POST OFFICE BOX 9222
CIRCLE NO. 20 ON READER SERVICE CARD by connecting 20 or 30 feet of wire to
the ground terminal of TS1. Put this
RAY JEFFERSON CITIZENS BAND wire on the floor under a rug, or run it
M along the baseboard.
0
D
E
L
7
o
0
-WATT; Adjustment. After temporarily taping
L3 to the case of the radio the WXCVR
is to work with, adjust the slug until 3/4'
2 -WAY of the slug screw extends outside the
RADIO coil form. Should the receiver have no
on sale at McGEE
built-in loop, but, instead, require an
at Vo original price external antenna, wrap a couple of turns
of insulated wire around LS, strip the
Reg
$99.50 $4995 opposite end of the wire, and connect it
for to the radio's antenna terminal.
2 for $99.50 Add 1150 kc. to the frequency of your
Send remittance with your nearest FAA station as listed in the
order plus 51.00 for packing table. Tune the receiver to the sum of
and postage-send 25°C de-
posit with C.O.D. orders. the two frequencies, which will lie some-
walkie-talkies for channel BC made where between 1350 and 1550 kc. With
to sell at $99.50. McGee's sale
is
theoriginal price of one or$99 .50.
for antenna, ground and battery connected
Add 81.35 for 9 regular "C"
Size cells if you want batteries.
to the WXCVR, and S1 switched on,
Features
controlled
-8 transistors, crystal
uperhet receiver with slowly adjust the slug of L2 until the
1 micro volt sensitivity. Transmit-
ter Is crysta controlled with 1
watt power to the final. Furnished carrier generated by Q1 is heard in the
with channel 8 crystal. Other chan-
nel crystals at $5.00 per pair ex-
plastic case Is
radio. If you hear more than one car-
tra. Net weignt is a little over 3 lbs. Textured
11" long by 3l/8" by 51/¢". Telescoping
antenna jack, speaker and mike are
antenna and external
built in. A fabulous value, rier during this adjustment, pick the
Each set Is new, factory cartoned with factory warranties. A reg.
lar C.B. license is required. strongest.
Write for McGee's 1965 catalog-sent free -176 pages Now retune the receiver dial to 1150
of bargains in Hi-Fi Speakers-Tape Recorders-Radio
and TV parts kc. If a strong broadcast station occu-
McGEE RADIO CO. pies this spot, move over to 1140 kc.
1901-A McGee St., Kansas City 8, Missouri
or 1160 kc. Adjust the slugs of T1 and
CIRCLE NO. 23 ON READER SERVICE CARD
154 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 L3 for maximum noise, hiss, or static. maximum signal transfer to the receiv-
With ordinary luck, you will already be er's loop. To avoid the danger of shock
hearing the weathercaster's voice. If when working with an a.c.-d.c. set, be
not, slowly move L2's slug back and sure that the converter's mounting
forth until you encounter the desired screws and other parts do not make
signal. Touch up Ti and L3 for maxi- contact with any metal parts of the re-
mum volume. ceiver. Apply plastic electrical tape to
As you align the converter, you will all screws that protrude from the re-
probably hear what sound like slow ceiver's case.
speed code stations. These are airways Readers located beyond the range of
and marine beacons, many of which op- an automatic weathercaster need not
erate on the low frequencies. You will despair. Similar information is trans-
also hear a Morse code identification mitted at half-hour intervals on many
signal under the voice of the weather- other low -frequency channels. A com-
caster. Tweak the receiver dial slightly plete list of all FAA radio facilities is
to accentuate the voice and discriminate contained in the Airman's Guide, avail-
against the beacon tone. able for about 75 cents (the price var-
If you want to explore the band from ies) from the Superintendent of Docu-
200 to 400 kc., slowly tune L2's slug ments, Government Printing Office,
through its adjustment range. As you Washington 25, D. C.; since a new issue
discover interesting signals, repeak Ti is published every two weeks, you may
for best reception. be able to wangle a copy for free at the
Final Installation. With adjustment on local airport. The station list is also
the desired FAA station completed, ma- given in Weather Services For Pilots,
chine screws can be used to fasten the also available from the Superintendent
rear cover of the converter to the back of Documents (for 10 cents) , but this
of the receiver. Fasten L3 in place pamphlet is not so frequently updated
after finding the position which provides as the Airman's Guide. -iO

HOW TO
IMPROVE YOUR
ö TWO-WAY RADIO!
The right communications microphone may
double the talk power of even the finest trans-
mitters! Learn how unwanted noise can
be eliminated-reliability improved-
inte ligibility increased by proper
microphone selection.
Write for our helpful
free booklet today!

ELECTRO -VOICE, INC., Dept. 152EH

-
Buchanan, Michigan 49107
Please send the free E -V booklet on choosing communications

radio: Amateur _ _ _
microphones. I am Interested in the following areas of two-way
Aviation CB Business.

NAME

COMPANY

ADDRESS

CITY STATE
SETTING NEW STANDARDS =N SOUND

CIRCLE ND. 41 ON READER SERVICE CARD

1965 Spring Edition 155
 Pickup Pranks
(Continued from page 31)

or other rotating member that can be

reached with the pickup. The magnet
need not be large-a more sensitive me-
ter can be used if the signal is low. Care
should be taken to anchor the magnet
Q2é
firmly as near as practical to the axis of
m ENNrEnNIEHN
ñ'I-in
o °
m scd- dóaÈ :3 uÉnmNoOIeÉ[Link].»ñgv
Le
r sytme
l

Vcc,N,wn
apm
mm
rotation, since the centrifugal force de-
F- ..noa oa GOW....,rH
6 16a 16m OnñwÑNÑg veloped at high speed could cause the
= NMN1N\`.JN
,[Link]éá
OONOO
ya,NmnON
É . ÿÿ
MM O
ï
magnet to break loose with consequent
damage. Any clamps used to hold the
,+ -ov
%N.@E
*«%;", W
E m¿` ^
magnet or pickup should be made from
m4mnaamn wo miYú
NìÒmt«gé .npnrvn+t
dÿÿ ufÑ z È nonmagnetic aluminum.
CñÁOññt°ny ygN3p Calibration. If you're interested in ac-
wnlVrini_ cé
>>
te::;
Ctid n
tual rpm rather than relative speed,
ep
NOOÓÓ
nnanm calibration can be accomplished with an
oscilloscope and audio generator hooked
g s<Hoogo g Ém á.
WaG;
5.;21
up as indicated on page 31. With the
_n .wriei z orN motor running at low speed, adjust the
e'B

a3

m
c
Ó:<ññ°ÓromV
+OHNHO
ÑN^nmmmgO
wwwmH

.:..
;era,
.

ee
nZ
i mQ
~
o 1... .,n
3
~Wr
L
6

ñ
frequency of the audio generator until
a single trace appears on the oscilloscope
screen. Read the generator frequency
<` .. and multiply by 60 to convert to rpm.
f 9a>n^s dZóótRccH
_ú_múimN
6ryryZHZ62N rvOAim ° a9000ppHu1
6
NO.. . Zia
NN

ry :
ZO

e Increase engine speed and repeat for

CIRCLE NO. 36 ON READER SERVICE CARD several readings: plotting the results
should give you a "scatter" of points
Get Your First Class Commercial that fall on both sides of a straight line.
The graph thus plotted may be used to
F. C. C. LICENSE convert any meter reading to rpm, or
a new meter scale may be made to over-
lay the existing scale.
auiartre Code Practice Oscillator. Oscillation re-
quires positive feedback. By placing the
pickup in the inductive field of its own
Career opportunities in communications amplifier, oscillation will result and can
electronics are almost unlimited. Prepare clearly be heard through the speaker.
now. Let Grantham train you-by corre- By putting a key in series with the pick-
spondence, or by classroom and laboratory
instruction. Get your first class commercial up, dots and dashes can be made. Here
F.C.C. license in as little as 3 months, or at again, the transistor amplifier with its
a slower pace if you prefer. Then, continue relatively low impedance requirement
in more -advanced electronics training if you does a better job than a typical radio
wish. Diploma awarded. Our catalog gives
full details. audio amplifier. It may be necessary to
Learn how our training can prepare you couple to the back of the speaker for
for your F.C.C. license; write or telephone better sensitivity. Also, changing the
the School at any one of the teaching divi- position of the pickup will very often
sions listed below, and ask for "Catalog EX5."
change the pitch of the oscillation.
Grantham School of Electronics A pickup can also be used as a hum -
1505 N. Western Av., Hollywood, Cal. 90027 finder. Simply connect it to a high -gain
(Phone: HO 9-7878)
408 Marion Street, Seattle, Wash. 98104 amplifier and use it to trace a.c.-carrying
(Phone: MA 2-7227) circuits.
3123 Gillham Road, Kansas City, Mo. 64109 There are, no doubt, many other prac-
(Phone: JE 1-6320) tical applications for this simple induc-
818 -18th St., NW, Washington, D.C. 20006
(Phone: 298-7460) tive coil, and the price is low!
CIRCLE NO. 15 ON READER SERVICE CARD 156 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 2 -Meter Simple Superhet You've gotto SEE it lo BELIEVE it!
(Continued from page 119)

As with any other construction job, it

is important to do all cutting, drilling, IRKING ÑITS IOP
and deburring before beginning assem-
bly. You'll probably find it easier to wire
the tuned circuits connecting to V1 be- ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
fore wiring the other stages.
Testing and Calibration. When assembly
and wiring is completed, carefully check
all connections against Figs. 3 and 5 fee :
before firing up. That done, plug into
the a.c. line, turn on the set, and allow An MA AA MK AN,
ALMA.. ALIAMAZAI
a 10 -minute warm-up. Set the GAIN
control to maximum and increase the
REGEN control setting until you hear
the typical superregenerative detector
hiss from the speaker.
Before aligning the front end to cover
the 2 -meter amateur band, it's necessary
to align the second detector to the 6 -mc. "Instant Lettering" marking kits bring you all the necessary
i.f. channel. First, make an approximate elements for completely marking electronic equipment,
adjustment of L3 by turning the slug drawings, prototypes, schematics, etc. in a fast new easy -
screw until about 14" is exposed above to -use form.
the lock nut on the can. If you have a Words, letters, numerals, switch patterns, arcs, etc. are
generator that will provide a 6 -mc. sig- printed on a special transparent carrier film. Rubbing over
one of these elements with a ballpoint pen releases it from
nal, apply it to the coax antenna input, the carrier film and adheres it to your working surface.
back off the REGEN control until the "Instant Lettering" words and patterns transfer to almost
hiss just disappears, and adjust the slug any surface including glass, plastic, metal ... even crackled
in L3 for maximum output from the finished metal. Now you can quickly mark all panels, even
especially calibrated two-color meter dials, tap switches,
speaker. This puts the detector circuit panel nomenclatures, pilot light jewels, sub -assemblies, cir-
on 6 mc. cuit boards, etc. Reproduction quality "Instant Lettering"
To align the front end when no gener- transfers are clean and sharp, leave no background haze or
ator covering the 2 -meter band is avail- film, make prototypes look like finished production equipment
able, set trimmers C3 and C7 to about and give all equipment and drawings a professional look.

half capacity, and main tuning capacitor TITLES FOR ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
CS at a little more than half capacity. This set contains hundreds of preprinted titles researched to
give you up to 95% of all electronic marking. For labeling,
Connect a good 2 -meter antenna to J1, marking, titling all electronic control panels, drawings, pro-
and adjust oscillator trimmer C3 until totypes, etc.
No. 958 -BLACK $4.95 No. 959 -
WHITE $4.95
2 -meter amateur signals are heard. On
a medium strength ham signal, adjust TERMINAL & CHASSIS MARKING KIT
Contains all the necessary letters, letter combinations and
C7 for maximum gain. numerals for marking chassis, printed circuit and terminal
If you have a generator covering 2 boards, rotating components, etc.
meters, connect it to JI and set it to give No. 966 -
BLACK $4.95 No. 967 -
WHITE $4.95

a modulated signal at 145 mc. Turn up METER & DIAL MARKING KIT
Arcs, dial patterns, lines, wedges, graduation lines, switch
the REGEN control until you hear the symbols, alphabets and numerals in black, white and red for
hiss, and adjust C3 with a nonmetallic marking standard and special rotary tap switches, potenti-
ometers and prototype and especially calibrated meter dials.
screwdriver until you hear the generator Colors provide contrast on scales and switches simplifying
signal. usage of complex instruments.
Finally, adjust C7 for maximum signal No. 968 - METER & DIAL MARKING KIT $4.95

output while rocking the main tuning WRITE FOR FREE SAMPLE AND COMPLETE DETAILS
capacitor slightly. This adjustment is
necessary because changing C3 affects
the oscillator frequency. -{ 0
THE D ATA K Dept. 634
CORPORATION
63 - 71st St. Guttenberg, N. J.
1965 Spring Edition 157 CIRCLE NO. 10 ON READER SERVICE CARD
 SILICON RECTIFIER SALE Ceramic Tile Enclosure
IMMEDIATE DELIVERY
FULLY GUARANTEED NEWEST TYPE (Continued from page 71)
AMERICAN MADE FULLY TESTED
HIGHEST QUALITY
750 MA -SILICON "TOP -HAT" DIODES
LOW LEAKAGE FULL LEAD LENGTH treble diffuser added. One method that
PIV/RMS
50/35
PIV/RMS
100/70
PIV/RMS
200/140
.12 ea
PIV/RMS
300/210
.16 ea
works well is an inverted plastic funnel
.05 ea .09 ea
PIV/RMS PIV/RMS PIV/RMS PIV/RMS (as used in the "Drainpipe 8" enclosure
400/280
.20 ea
PIV/RMS
500/350
24 ea
PIV/RMS
600/420
32 ea
PIV/RMS
700/490
.40 ea
PIV/RMS
-see the 1963 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENT-
800/560
.48 ea
900/630
.55 ea
1000/700
.70 ea
1100/770
.75 ea
ER'S HANDBOOK) .
ALL TESTS AC & DC & FWD & LOAD
Egg Tray Diffuser. Another type of
SILICON POWER DIODE STUDS diffuser, shown on p. 71, has the advan-
150 Ply 200 PIV
D.C.
AMPS
50 PIV 300 PIV
35 RMS 70 RMS 105 RMS 140 RMS tage of being adjustable, and the multi-
3
12
.12
.45
.18
.65
.22
.75
.30
.90 ple convex surfaces insure wide diffu-
33
50
100
.90
1.60
1.75
1.15
1.90
2.15
1.50
2.30
2.55
1.70
2.80
3.15
sion. It is made from half of a plastic
D.C. 300 PIV 400 PIV
280 RMS
500 PIV
350 RMS
600 PIV
450 RMS
refrigerator egg tray (sold in dime
210 RMS
AMPS
.40 .45 .55 .65
stores for about 29 cents), an eye bolt,
and a strap that electricians use for
:1
12 1.10 1.35 1.50 1.70
35 2.35 2.55 3.00 3.50
3.50 4.20 5.25 7.00
50
100 3.75 4.60 5.65 8.00 fastening down electrical cables.
"SCR" SILICON CONTROLLED RECTIFIERS "SCR" The egg tray is cut in half and a hole
PRV
7
AMP
16
AMP
25
AMP PRV AMP
7 16
AMP
25
AMP drilled in the remaining end to match
".'. .50
.85
.85
1.20
2.30
1.20
2.60
1.40
250
300
2.65
3.00
3.10
3.40 the size of the eye bolt. A nut is then
111O
1.110
1.35
2.10
1.60
1.80
2.65
3.00
2.20
3.75
400
500
3.40
4.25
4.15
4.75 placed on each side of the plastic tray
2.40
1.75 2.90 4.00 600 5.00 5.25
200
Money Rack guarantee. $2.00 min. order. Orders F.O.B. NYC.
end to clamp it in place ; again, sealant
include check or money order Shp¢. charges plus. C.O.D.
orders 25% down.
is called for.
The small strap will have to be drilled
WARREN ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS out on one side to allow it to fit the Ii4'
230 MERCER ST., BOX EH, N.Y. 10012 N.Y. OR -3-2620
threaded rod as shown. If you're plan-
CIRCLE NO. 37 ON READER SERVICE CARD
ning to use this diffuser, the strap should
be installed at the time the speaker board
is tightened, substituting it for the wash-
BIG MONEY er. After the diffuser is mounted, a
screw should be put on the other end of
the strap.
If you use this diffuser, you may want
to "dress up" the system. Decorator bur-
lap or even grille cloth can be glued di-
in TELEVISION, RADIO, rectly to the outside of the tile. Alter-
ELECTRONICS, RADAR, SONAR natively, a light frame could carry the
ONLY CHRISTY OFFERS
COMPLETE TRAINING!
grille cloth up around the diffuser and
Investigate the Christy Complete hide it, or a frame could be built around
Course. Why be satisfied with less?
CTS Shop Method, Home Training the entire system which could then be
makes learning easy. You learn by
working with actual equipment. You encased in grille cloth.
receive Comprehensive training from The Word Is "Crisp." Not everyone
the start. Can EARN AS YOU LEARN.
Yeu become qualified to open your
own Electronics Repair business or to will like this speaker system. One listen-
gain high pay as a TV, Radio, Elec- er, for example, said he preferred his
tronics, etc., Technician.
19 TRAINING KITS INCLUDED!
You receive a Multi -Teeter, Oscillator.
SEND,43 own, because it was more "mellow." But
Signal Tracer, Oscilloscope. Signal Gen-
erator, Electronic Timer, Regenerative FREE it's wise to be suspicious of that word.
Radio, 24- TV set (optional) and other
valuable testing equipment. FREE ROOK
and TWO FREE LESSONS yours for the
BOOKrte,
"Mellow" usually suggests hangover, and
asking! No obligation. this in turn means transient distortion.
CHRISTY TRADES SCHOOL
A poorly braced cabinet can produce it
3214 W. Lawrence Ave..
Dept. T-318 Chicago 60625 idea in great quantities.
CHRISTY TRADES SCHOOL, Dept. T-318
3214 W. Lawrence Ave., Chicago 60625 "Crisp" is the word for the kind of
I Please send me the 3 FREE BOOKS and Special Porm for
PAYING LATER from EARNINGS MADE WHILE INO. bass produced by this little enclosure.
NAME AGB
If you like your bass crisp and you
ADDRESS
aren't flush with either space or money,
this system is for you!
L-ITT
- mama
CIRCLE NO. 7 ON
--------
ZONE

READER SERVICE CARD

STATE
j 158
-[
ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 the base, taping it to the mast at suit-
The Cloud Sentinel able intervals.
A 6' length of '/>" galvanized steel pipe
(Continued from page 10) driven into the ground near the base
serves as a ground. Use microphone
cable to connect the antenna and ground
can be used to power the amplifier and to the Cloud Sentinel, soldering the an-
thereby increase amplification. tenna lead to the center conductor. Con-
You can experiment with different nect galvanized ground wire to the
values of R2, R5, and possibly R4 for even ground pipe, and then to the base of the
better results. Because current drain on antenna mast; solder the braid of the
82 is only about 3 ma., smaller batteries microphone cable to this wire.
can be substituted for B2. Possible tran- Be sure that these connections are
sistor substitutions include experiment- electrically and mechanically sturdy,
er's pnp types such as the 2N107. All then bury the length of microphone cable
switches can readily be changed, as can leading away from the mast in a trench
potentiometer types and values. at least 10" deep for a minimum distance
Antenna -Ground System. The antenna of 30 feet. Finally, bring the end of the
shown in the photograph on page 10 is cable above ground and connect it to the
made with seven 10" lengths of #14 bare Sentinel.
copper wire filed to points at the top, and Calibration and Use. To calibrate the
soldered together at the bottom. The Sentinel, turn it on, rotate R4 until the
wires are fitted into a hollow oiled block meter is zeroed for ambient tempera-
of wood which insulates them from the ture, close Si, and adjust R3 until the
mast and supports them so that they desired amplification factor is shown on
point upward. Connect a length of #14 1111. Connect the antenna and ground
insulated copper wire to this assembly, and throw S3 to ANT. If the meter reads
and bring it down the antenna mast to down -scale, throw S3 to the GND posi -

YOUR NEW FREE! For fun and pride in assembly, for long
years of pleasure and performance, for new ad-
ventures in creative electronics mail the coupon

COPY IS below and get Conar's brand new catalog of

quality do-it-yourself and assembled kits and
equipment. Read about items from TV set kits
to transistor radios ...from VTVM's to scopes
WAITING .. from tube testers to tools. And every item
in the Conar catalog is backed by a no-nonsense,
no -loopholes, money -back guarantee! See for
yourself why Conar, a division of National Radio
Institute, is about the
fastestt growing entryry
in the quality kit and
COMM
equipment business.
NORM MAIL THIS COUPON NOW 11111111111111

1NA A Q5C

. 3939 Wisconsin Ave., Washington 16, D.C.

Please send me your new catalog. .
Il Name 11

LIAddress
a City State Z-Code I
II
11

CIRCLE NO. 9 ON READER SERVICE CARD

1965 Spring Edition 159
 tion. iJ it will be noted that the
GIANT CB SALE ! ! 2 meter will frequently deflect down -scale
HALLMARK TRANSCEIVER (Reg. $150.00). SALE $99.50 -this shows a temporary reversal of
GLOBE STAR TRANSCEIVER (Reg. $159.95) SALE $99.50 current flow in the antenna -ground cir-
HY-GAIN 3 -ELEMENT BEAM (CB -100) SALE $15.99
CB WALKIE-TALKIES (3 trans.) 2 for $19.95 cuit and is in no way unusual.
GROUND PLANE ANTENNA SALE $ 7.99 In operation, it will be found that as
HALLMARK CB TESTER (Reg. $50.00) SALE $39.95 an electrical storm approaches the meter
CB CRYSTALS (.002% Tol.) EACH $ 1.79 pointer will wander-aimlessly at first,
(Specify Make, Model, Channel)....12 or more at EACH $ 1.69
then rather animatedly as the storm
TRIUMPH 10 TRANSISTOR WALKIE-TALKIE SALE $29.95 nears. If the storm is at a distance of
RG58U FOAM COAXIAL CABLE 100 feet for 5 4.95
100 feet for $ 9.95
15 miles or more, it will normally be im-
RG8U FOAM COAXIAL CABLE
RG8U EXTRA-FLEX FOAM COAXIAL CABLE 100 feet for $14.95 possible to hear the thunder, but the
ROTOR CABLE -4 conductor-
meter will show lightning discharges as
(plastic jacket) 100 feet for $ 2.49

MOBILE NOISE SUPPRESSION KIT (15 pc)..SALE $ 4.99

fast drops in readings following rather
MOBILE ANT. BUMPER MOUNT slower build-ups.
(BM -1) (Chrome) SALE $ 3.99 As the storm approaches, the pattern
CITIZENS BAND COUPLER (Solid State) SALE $ 3.99 continues, but it will be necessary to
CHANNEL SELECTOR -12 POSITION SALE $ 3.99
SUPER -MAGNETIC MICROPHONE HOLDER SALE 89g shunt the meter because peak currents
VIBRATOR ELIMINATOR-TRANSISTORIZED SALE $ 4.99 of several microamperes will flow. Typ-
SWR BRIDGE & FIELD STRENGTH ical lightning flashes will be read as in-
METER (Reg $15) SALE $ 9.89 creasingly rapid rises in current fol-
CDR ANTENNA ROTATOR-Model AR -22 ONLY $31.31
FREE with AR -22 Rotator: 150 ft. of ROTOR CABLE-FREE
lowed by very sharp drops-possibly
SEND FOR GROVE'S FREE necessitating reversing the ANT-GND
1965 CATALOG OF TERRIFIC CB VALUES!!! polarity. With some experience, it will be
Send check or money order: include postage. excess re- possible for the operator to predict quite
funded. Min. order $5.00-50c sery chg under $10.00.
50 << deposit on COD's. accurately both the instant and intensity
GROVE ELECTRONIC SUPPLY of each stroke.
COMPANY Another interesting phenomenon which
4107 W. Belmont Ave. Chicago. III. 60641
will be noted is that variations in the
CIRCLE NO. 16 ON READER SERVICE CARD temperature of the surrounding air alter
the no -signal (zero) position of the me-
ter-up-scale for warmer, down -scale for
colder. Temperatures can change very
KNOW -IT ALL quickly during thunderstorms, and for
this reason, zero and calibration should
be checked every few minutes.
Its easy to be an authority on tape when you The Cloud Sentinel can also be used in
have a copy of Hi Fi/Stereo Review's 1965
Tape Recorder Annual handy. The special arti- clear weather to measure what are
cles featured in this 132 page factbook includ- known as "fair weather currents." Dur-
ing now to choose a recorder-tips on making ing thunderstorms you will note that
better tapes-selecting the right recording tape
-how to edit tape-recording live stereo in electron movement is normally from air
the home-copying records onto tape-the truth to antenna to ground. In fine weather, a
about bargain tape-and much more are just reverse flow will be registered, but at
a few of the 23 complete features! considerably reduced readings and with
Expert tips by the dozens on equipment-mak- the possible need for extended antenna
ing better tapes-editing-copying-sound on
everything you need to know about tape re- height.
cording. Safety Precautions. The Sentinel is
Plus . . . a complete directory of stereo tape considerably safer than most installa-
recorders! Over 100 photos-complete data on tions using an antenna. However, the
230 models from 33 different manufacturers! All following rules should be observed for
the model numbers, specifications, dimensions
and prices! absolute safety:
Published for the first time, the 1965 Tape Re- (1) Limit antenna height to 20 feet
corder is an indispensable guide for everyone for monitoring local thunderstorm activ-
who wants better performance and better versa- ity.
tility from his tape recorder. For your copy, (2) Locate the antenna mast near a
send $1 plus 15e for shipping and handling
(25e for orders outside the U.S.A.) to Ziff -Davis building or other tall object so that the
Service Division, Dept. TR, 589 Broadway, New antenna is within the object's "cone of
York, N.Y. 10012. protection."
160 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 (3) Lead the microphone cable away In '64 over 6,000 readers asked for Poly Paks
from the antenna by burying it in a cov-
ered trench at least 10" deep and 30"
long.
(4) Operate the Sentinel indoors -in
FREE' BONUS _ 1 pi
DOUBLE
BONUS!
BONUS #2
a house, garage, or dry shed. 00 Worth of 1x POLY PAK OF
(5) Should lightning begin striking
within two miles of your operating posi- 25_ Radio-TV PLUS
Include arts!-.
basean for Parts!!!
hantlling
BOTH FREE WITH EVERY $10.00 ORDER
YOUR CHOICE
LISTED BELOW

tion, suspend operations until the storm

passes out of this range. New! 'PANCAKE' Transistors
IN THE NEW T046 Like W. VCB HFE MC SALE
(6) Ground the base of the antenna MICRO CASES D 2N706 .4 20 20 200 $1.00
mast to the nearby ground. Silicon Epitaxial
Planers
1=I 2N708
D 2N807
.36
.5
20
60
30
120"
480 1.00
80 1.00
High
At first glance it may seem that the 70%y of1retá
Gold nover ieada
D 2N995*"
D 2N996**
.36 15 140* 100 1.00
.36 12 100' 120 1.00
above precautions go to mollycoddling 2N1613 .8 50 120' 80 1.00
extremes. This may be true, but it is D 2N1893 .8 100 120' 70 1.00
2N2049 .8 50 300* 85 1.00
strongly recommended that they be ob- 0 2N2645 .5 50 300* 85 1.00
served -they could possibly save your 100 each
D 2N2695"
*Maximums
.36 25
*'PNP's
130* 100 1.00

life! WORLD FAMOUS POLY PAK KITS -BRAND NEW PARTS

Although parts for the Sentinel cata- D
detector-ED
RAY
ducerPNOTO
transducer
$1 D 40
TORS,
ELI S1,I 2W, 1%SIS- $1
D 2 -500 -MC "MESA" RESISTORS, $1
log at about $13 (including $4.95 for the transistors, pap TO18
$1 D 30
to 5POWo RlOK ohms
D 50 MICA CONDENSERS,
meter), judicious use of junk box parts D INFRA -RED
reflector
RAY PARA-
'n' $1 t. silvers too
10 VOLUME CONTROLS $1
$1
and substitutions can cut this total down 3-25W 2N255 TRANSIS -$1 to 3 meg, witch too
50 RADIO 'n' TV KNOBS $1
TORS or equal TO3 case....
asst. lors. styles
considerably. The completed unit can 60 TUBULAR COND'S to
.omf to IKV $1 30 TRANSISTOR ELEG
TROLYTICS, l0 -to -100 mf.. $1
D
also be used as a sensitive laboratory 3250 038539,40 transistor $1 [Link]
slant wide $1
instrument for measuring tiny currents. HI-FI SPECIAL! 4" SQ. ELECTROSTATIC TWEETER
Made by Lorenz. ITT. for Grundig. Never
The amplifier will prove to be quite lin-
ear for all factors of amplification if the
before offered. A natural for hi-fi en-
thuslast. Buy 2 for stereo. Illustration re-
1.49 ea.
sembles tweeter in stock. Includes hookup 2 for 2.50
meter has been accurately zeroed and 50 COILS 'n' CHOKES.
f. it. peaking, etc. .. $1
15 NPN TRANSISTORS
asst. types 'n' styles
$1
35 TWOcWATTERS, Allen $1 D 4-20W TRANSISTORS $1
calibrated prior to use. -[0- Bradley. IRC. 5% too
40 DISCto CONDENSERS,
ENSEIR S.
pnp. stud, CBS, 2N1320
40 WORLD'S SMALLEST
$1 $1
D 60 TUBE SOCKETS. resistors, 1/10W. 1% too
pluga, receptacles. etc. ... $1 0 100 PRINTED CIRCUIT
D 10 PANEL SWITCHES. $1 parts wide variety. worth $60$1
micro. rotary, pwr, lide.... 2 "MESA" 2N498 4-Watt$1
4 RAYTHEON CK721 tram- $1 transistor, npu, silicon
Istors, alum case pnp.- D 4 SYLVANIA 2N35 trou- Si
25 GERMANIUM 'N SILT- Blears, npn,
$1
Two-Tube Superhet CON Diodes. 1N34, etc.....
D S GENERAL ELECTRIC $1 P
sILICON
STUD2-25 rectifiers
$1

(Continued from page 94 ) 0

2N107
asst.5HA
aF
p transistors

5%
RAYTHEON CK 722
transistors.10
too$1 $1
D 6setTRANSISTOROVRADIO
e. out
RCA PHONO PLUGS-LUGS
10
$1

Sets. Si

3 -TRANSISTOR AUDIO AMPLIFIER

Printed Circuit
1.95
ing slug screw of L1 to V)" above the
trtransistors
Subminiature Wired with Transistors
NPN SILICON 4-2N43 POWER OUTPUT$1
shield can, and the slug screw of L2 %" 4 2N 36a
3T0TRANSISTORS
$1 by G.E
15nPRtNTED CIRCUITtching.
$1 $1
above the shield can; this should bring 9 170N
T
PRAL ELECTRIC ñ
transistors, rf, etc$ I transistors. pAID $1
the adjustments in the vicinity of 80 I-1
2
3
silicon, 1 -Watt $1 D
unttestAT
RECTI-ed....
FIERS, 60mil, untested.... Si
meters, and you can readjust on received 1 -20-Watt
pn MESA164T Si
7TOP

references, 6VN
ER $1
60 HI -CI RESISTORS. 1/2. $1 15 TEXAS SWITCHING $
signals. 1. 2 watts. to 1 meg. 5% too transistors, PM' and VPV., 1
30 SPRAGUE "YELLOW"
50 TERMINAL STRIPS, fl
A ground connection will probably im- 1
35
to 3 lugs. asst
MICA con-
$1
n
mylar tond. asst
6 SYLVANIA one amp 400V Si
$1
$1
prove reception, and is also advisable nsSILVER
D 60 CERAMIC co lensers $
ponyy
l0
tiflcra
2 -AMP POWER REC-
$1
discs, neo s. to .05mí TIFIERS, atad 50.400v
if you use C18 and C19 across the power 4 TRANSISTOR trans-
formers. worth $25 $1
1
3 50 WATT, TO-36
GOLD, stud transistors Si
transformer primary, as otherwise the pro/to
5/ SUN eBATTERIES,sensitive S. D 10 [Link] POWER
$1
$1
chassis will be slightly "hot" to ground. O
ast
e15
PNP eTRANSISTORSs
in. styles, $1 D 10 30s MC
tratransinsistors, ted
If you have no trouble with line noise Transistor Sale 0 1000* GAIN TRANSISTORS
or transmitter r.f. into the receiver, C18 100 for $2.50 Silicon npn Planar
and C19 can be omitted. The author used Similar to 2N998
*Minimum 1.49
a hank of stranded insulated wire about All types, shapes, RF,
PHOTO TRANSISTORS
20 feet long as an antenna and an inex- 15, switching, audit, pow-
NPN SILICON PLANAR
pensive imported type of crystal head- er, untested. 105, 1022, Sensitivity: Sua
set (Lafayette 99-2550 or equivalent) cases, etc.
7018.
2Ñ98candle. 2.98
for reception. D FREE! 1965 catalog. Orders:. in lade postage, avg. wt. per oak 1 lb.
The c.w. signals are received with the P.O. Box 942 -EH
detector REGEN control set just above POLY PAKS So. Lvnnfield. Mass.

CIRCLE NO. 30 ON READER SERVICE CARD

1965 Spring Edition 161
 the point of oscillation and the GAIN
control low enough to prevent detector
overloading. Phone signals are received
by setting the REGEN control just be-
low the point of oscillation. With a little
trial and error, you'll find you can hear
just about any signal on the band that
anyone else can hear, and without
ERSIN straining your ears, either. -ä-
MULTILORE
5 -CORE SOLDER Telephone Beeper
(Continued from page 38)

Any standard potentiometer will do if

the box you use has room for it. (If
the adjustment of R2 is too touchy,
ONLY 50C use alternate 10,000 -ohm unit specified.)
The time interval between beeps is
BUY IT AT RADIO-TV PARTS STORES controlled mainly by the relative values
MULTICORE SALES [Link] WASHINGTON, N.Y.] of capacitors Cl and C2, and resistor
CIRCLE NO. 26 ON READER SERVICE CARD Rl. Increase the resistance of RI if the
interval is too short, decrease RI's re-
sistance if the interval is too long. If
"chirp" is evident, readjust R2.
The speaker specified in the Parts List
will fit in the plastic box used by the
FREE Catalog
OF THE WORLD'S FINEST
author. If a larger enclosure is used,
any 3.2-ohm speaker will be satisfactory.
Construction. The construction of the
GOV'T. SURPLUS Beeper may be varied to suit the builder,
ELECTRONIC BARGAINS and wiring placement is not at all criti-
HUNDREDS and HUNDREDS cal. The author used a perforated board,
OF TOP QUALITY SURPLUS ITEMS with components on top and point-to-
TO CHOOSE FROM: point wiring and jumpers underneath. A
ANTENNAS cutout in the board accommodates the
AMPLIFIERS speaker frame. A single screw and spac-
RECEIVERS er support the circuit board in the box.
TRANSMITTERS Small holes may be drilled in the box in
GENERATORS the area of the speaker, or (as in the
OSCILLOSCOPES author's unit) a piece of perforated
DYNAMOTORS aluminum can serve as a grille to cover
INDICATORS a cutout opening. The speaker itself is
CONVERTERS supported by four screws.
TRANSFORMERS A simple retainer clip fashioned from
POWER SUPPLIES 1/16" -diameter piano or coat -hanger wire
TEST EQUIPMENT is formed to fit around the mouthpiece
CONTROL BOXES of the particular telephone you intend to
MICROPHONES use (since the size of the mouthpiece is
TIMERS, TELEPHONES, different for different -style handsets). A
MOTORS, FILTERS, BLOWERS, CHOKES, HEADSETS, CABLE, piece of foam rubber or plastic may be
SELSYNS, SWITCHES, KEYERS, HANDSETS, METERS-Etc., Etc.
shaped with a razor blade to form a
SEND FOR FREE CATALOG! Dept. EH -5 cradle for the mouthpiece, as well as to
FAIR RADIO SALES
2133 ELIDA RD. P.O. Box 1105 LIMA, OHIO
provide a "spring" force holding the
phone snugly against the wire clip,
CIRCLE NO. 14 ON READER SERVICE CARD
162 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
which fits into the mouthpiece groove.
The ends of the wire clip fit into small
SURPLUS BARGAINS SURPLUS BARGAINS
holes in the side of the box.
Switch 21 is mounted with two screws, ENLARGER LENS f3.5 to f16, $3.50
and wired to two battery connectors govt. cost $53.00
(which may be salvaged from discarded LAPEL MIKE, 1.35
xtl, w/cord & plug
9 -volt batteries) in series. The batteries PHONE, hearing aid type, .60
can be wedged into position by the cir- w/cord & plug
cuit board, or held in the box with a GEIGER COUNTER 1.25
tube w/schem.
bracket or cement. Spray -painting the THROAT MIKE, .50
box after assembly will improve the ap- from Air Force
pearance, and title decals will add the MIKE BUTTONS,
carbon, min. size 4/1-0°
finishing touch. SOLAR CELL KIT, 1.50
Operation. When the Beeper is in use, 5 cells with book
the first beep will be heard about 30 IBM FERRITE
toroidal oes (memory) 200/ 1'00
seconds after the switch is turned on.
Thereafter the beeps will be heard at
MAT TRANSISTORS,
hi-freq
5/ 1.00
approximately 15 -second intervals. To POLARIZING FILTER
(Polaroid) 6x6 :nch 2/1-0°
test the Beeper, temporarily connect a 2N174 POWER TRANSISTOR 1.50
10,000-ohm resistor across R1; this 15 amp 80 volt
should increase the beep rate. Current RELAY, DPDT 1.00
1.5 volt operation
drain is only about 21/2 ma., so the bat- RADIOSONDE 1.25
teries should last over 200 operating xmtr w/tubes, new
hours with normal intermittent phone MINE DETECTOR PRS -3, military, un-
used, w/book, & btrys, finds treasure 4500
use. SCOPE TUBE (CRT) 3AP1, 1.00
If you regularly record telephone con- new
versations of technical discussions, busi- SOUND POWER PHONE (2) 2.00
w/100 ft wire
ness transactions, long-distance family MINIATURE MOTOR .50
calls or for any other purpose, the Tele- 1.5 volt operation
phone Beeper will be a useful accessory CADMIUM PHOTO CELL, 1.00
make counter, nite liter
to remind the party at the other end COMPUTER plug-in boards, good for
that he is being recorded, and may also parts source. Each w/transistors, re- 6/1.00
prevent you from being charged with sistors, etc.
REED SWITCH 1.00
unlawful recording. The investment is w/magnet, make burglar alarm

sult worthwhile. --
small, the inconvenience slight, the re- SNIPERSCOPE TUBE 6032
w/specs, see in dark
OPTICAL PRISM-
pocket rainbow, new
6.50
.60
TOGGLE
SWITCHES 4/1.°°
SIGMA 1.50
40-Meter Antenna 4F RELAY

(Continued from page 112)

SILICON DIODES
750 ma, 500 PIV 5/1-0°
INFRA -RED 1.25
DETECTOR
USA PERISCOPE PRISM 1.00
higher than the ends to fit in the avail- 5 inch long
IR FILTER 1.75
able space. If your TV antenna mast is in. dia.
not high enough for the purpose, you Rchannel, 200-400
125'00
can add a length of mast to it above the n el,I115 [Link].
Cost $2,500 NEW
SILICON DIODES 1.00
TV antenna. 2 amp 1,000 PIV
Modifying the Guy Wires. Insert an M-3 SNIPERSCOPE INFRA -RED
egg -type strain insulator (which is see in dark 225-°°
stronger than ordinary antenna insula- ALL MATERIAL FOB LYNN, MASS.
tors) in the pair of guy wires where Above is a small selection of choice surplus from our
they are fastened to the mast. Then large 72 page illustrated catalog. Send 20f produc-
tion & handling cost for catalog.
determine the exact length of each half
of the antenna (L1 and L2 in the dia- JOHN MESHNA JR.
gram) for the desired frequency with 19 Allerton St., Lynn, Mass.
the formula: Lengthft. = 234/Freq.,,., CIRCLE NO. 24 ON READER SERVICE CARD
1965 Spring Edition 163
 which works out to 32' 7" for 7.175
EARN YOUR DEGREE mc., the center of the 40 -meter Novice
band. Both LI and L2 should be cut to
in ELECTRONICS this length if you want to operate
around this frequency.
ENGINEERING Now measure off the desired lengths
at home from the center insulators and insert
another strain insulator at each mea-
Our A.S.E.E. degree is recognized the sured point. If your transmitter power
world over by personnel men in the is much over 100 watts, it might be wise
electronics industry. Our graduates are to use two strain insulators in series
always in demand. at these points for increased insulation.
College level HOME STUDY courses Finally, solder the inner conductor of
-taught so that you can easily under- your coaxial feedline to one side of the
stand them. Continue your education. antenna at the apex and the outer shield
... Earn more in the highly paid elec- to the other side. Tightly tape the end
tronics industry. of the cable to keep moisture out of it,
Learn about Missiles, Computers, and drop the cable down the pole, along
Transistors, Automation, complete elec- the roof, and into the radio room.
tronics. Don't worry about the guy wires not
Over 27,000 graduates now employed being copper; they will radiate okay.
by industry. Resident school also avail- But you might insert strain insulators
able at our Chicago Campus.-Founded in the unused guy wires at 10' intervals
1934. for slightly improved results. -®-
Send for our FREE course catalog.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF
ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY
1137.1139 West Fullerton Pkwy.-Chicago 14, Illinois Stereo Indicator
CIRCLE NO. 3 ON READER SERVICE CARD (Continued from page 75)

ture is connected to the frame, and in

the case of the stereo indicator, it's
necessary to keep it off ground.
Connect a multimeter or VTVM across
diode D1, and tune in a stereo signal.
A negative potential of about 0.5 volt
d.c. will appear across the diode with
respect to ground. If no stereo signal
is available at the time, a 19-kc. sig-
nal from the audio oscillator can serve
as the input. Set the audio oscillator to
provide a signal of 0.5 to 1.0 volt or so,
and tune coil L1 for maximum voltage
Fill in coupon for a FREE One Year Subscrip- across D1. The input sensitivity of the
tion to OLSON ELECTRONICS' Fantastic Value
Packed Catalog-Unheard of LOW, LOW PRICES
stereo indicator is about 0.03 volt r.m.s.
on Brand Name Speakers, Changers, Tubes, at 19 kc.
Tools, Stereo Amps, Tuners, CB, and other Val- Potentiometer R7 is a level or thresh-
ues. Credit plan available.
old control. Adjust it to set the thresh-
old high enough to light the lamp when
a moderate level FM stereo signal is
If you have a friend interested in electronics send being received, but not so high that the
his name and address for a FREE subscription also. unit trips on inter-station noise. Strong-
er bursts of noise between stations will
trip the relay. However, careful adjust-
ment of R7 will eliminate most of the
318 S. Forge Street Akron, Ohio 44308 trouble from this source. -®-
CIRCLE NO. 28 ON READER SERVICE CARD 164 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 111l1
FOR SALE
CLASSIFIED MARKET PLACE
EBB BBB BOMB BNB B
RESISTORS, newest type metal -film, Copper Circuit
ROBB

Board, Capacitors, Barrier Terminal Blocks, Farnsworth

Electronic Components, 88 Berkeley St., Rochester, N.Y.
CRYSTALS-Navy 100Kc Units $2.95. Electronicraft, Box
13, Binghamton, N.Y. 13902.
SURPLUS QUARTZ Crystals 500,000 Available. Lists 100.
Quaker -Electronics, Hunlock Creek, Pa.
TRANSISTORIZED buried or concealed pipe, cable find-
ers. Free information. Relco-D4, Box 10563, Houston 18,
Texas.
CANADIANS-Giant Surplus Bargain Packed Catalogs.
Electronics. Hi-Fi, Shortwave, Amateur, Citizens Radio.
IIIftfilfil

RADIO-TV
WIZ 1i1
BBB :
CONVERT any television to sensitive, big -screen oscillo-
scope. Only minor changes required. No electronic expe-
rience necessary. Illustrated plans, $2.00. Relco-A45, Box
10563, Houston 18, Texas.

CLUBS

ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTERS' CLUB. Projects, Bar-

gains, Benefits. Join NOW! Information Box 5332A, Ingle-
wood, Calif. 90310.

Rush $1.00 (Refunded). ETCO. Dept. Z, 464 McGill, Mont-

real, Canada. BUSINESS OPPORTUNITIES
PRINTED CIRCUIT Boards. Hams, Experimenters. Catalog
100. P/M Electronics, Box 6288, Seattle, Wash. 98188. SIMPLE, pleasant mailorder can net $12,000 year. Write
EXPERIMENTERS' CATALOG-TV Camera Parts, Transis- Rutward 2682, Bryant, Columbia Station, Ohio.
tors, Tubes, Diodes, Relays, Transformers. Spera Elec- SELL CB EQUIPMENT-Dealerships available to aggres-
tronics, 37.10 33rd Street, Long Island City, New York. sive people who can sell Citizens Band Radio full or part
time. Knox Electronic, Dept. ES5, Galesburg, III. 61401.
HIGH FIDELITY
INSTRUCTION
ARISTOCRAT of SPEAKER SYSTEMS for perfectionists.
"Designing the Ducted Port Bass Reflex Enclosure",
$1.00. How to double the bass output of any loudspeaker. FREE Career Guide to success in Electronics, Automation.
Formulas, charts, trade secrets. Also free literature on Practical "job oriented" home study training. Beginners,
guaranteed basic speaker systems, unbelievable prices. intermediate advanced college level. Tuition refund sure-
ESW Speaker Systems, 1602 Alta, Wichita, Kansas 67216. ty. Since 1931. Write Central Technical Institute, Dept.
16015, 1655 Wyandotte, Kansas City, Mo. 64108.

TREASURE FINDERS LEARN Morse International Code Alphabet in Half Hour.

Mail $2.00 check or money order for Laminated, Pocket -
Size, Fifty Word Mnemonic to: MNEMONICS ASSO -
NEW Supersensitive transistor locators detect buried CIATES, 56 Grand Street, White Plains, New York.
gold, silver, coins. Kits, assembled modells. $19.95 up.
Underwater models available. Free catalog. Relco-A45,
Box 10563, Houston 18, Texas. TAPE & RECORDERS
EQUIPMENT TAPE -MATES MAKES AVAILABLE TO YOU-ALL 4 -TRACK
STEREO TAPES-ALL LABELS-POSTPAID TO YOUR
FREE Electronics Catalog. Tremendous bargains. Electro - DOOR-AT TREMENDOUS SAVINGS. FOR FREE BRO-
labs, Department C-510RR, Hewlett, N.Y. 11557. CHURE WRITE TAPE -MATES CLUB, 5280-P. W. PICO
BLVD., LOS ANGELES, CALIF. 90019.

PLANS AND KITS

MISCELLANEOUS
WE SELL CONSTRUCTION PLANS: $35 Color TV, $40
Automatic Telephone Answering Machine, $50 TV Cam- FREE 'HIT' SONG gift for you, friends. Send names, ad-
era, $50 Ultrasonic Dishwasher, $15 Bell System Type dresses: Nordyke Songs, 6000-3A Sunset, Hollywood,
Speakerphone, TV Recorder, Private Eye Tail Transmitter, Calif. 90028.
$10 Legal Telephone Connector, Electronic Tranquilizer,
Transistorized Teletype; Plans $4.75 each. Free Super INCREDIBLY COOL -SMOKING PIPE Unique air-cooled
Hobby Catalog. Don Britton Enterprises, 7906 Santa Mon- stem makes the difference, removes hot moisture and
ica Blvd., Hollywood, Calif. 90046. tars. You agree or money returned. Inquire and receive
free pipe cleaners. Write: Monarch Pipes, Dept. N, Box
1431, Tulsa, Oklahoma.
BOOKS HORSE RACE COMPUTER. Dial time for each horse. Any
distance, Any track. 42 Distances, 91 Tracks listed. Fas-
150 BOOKS 7 for $1.00 Postpaid. Catalog send stamp. cinating, Exciting, Fun. $5.00 Delivered. Lehtonen Com-
M & M Books, 536 Tracy, Peoria, III. 61603. putalizer, 914 Pulaski Hwy., Joppa, Md. 21085.
1965 Spring Edition 165
 UNUSUAL BARGAINS ELECTRONIC
BUILD YOUR OWN INFRARED DETECTOR
...
SEE IN TOTAL DARKNESS
Use ir23A Infrared Image Tube to convert infrared
rays to visible image. You seeeverything-even in EXPERIMENTER'S
al darkness. Approx. 5,000 lt 41/4" long x l3§"
diem. New tubes-government cost about $150 ea. Tested before shipment.
Complete direetions.
Stock No. 70.127-013 59.95 Postpaid HANDBOOK
Also available inter model Farnsworth Tube í`6032 or RCA Tube #6676.
Potential approx. 20,000 volts. 41/2" long. 2" diem. at widest point.
Stock No. 70.160 -GD $12.50 Postpaid SPRING 1965
SOLVE PROBLEMS! TELL FORTUNES! PLAY GAMES!
NEW WORKING MODEL DIGITAL COMPUTER
ACTUAL MINIATURE VERSION READER
OF GIANT ELECTRONIC BRAINS SERVICE NO. ADVERTISER PAGE NO.
Fascinating n see-through model computer
actually solves problems. teaches computer fun- I ATR Electronics, Inc 147
damentals. Adds, subtracts, multiplies. shifts,
mpleineuts. carries. ntemoriges. counts, rom 2 Allied Radio 35, 36
pares, sequence, Attractively colored, rigid
parts easily a bled. 12"x31/a"x43/4 ".

e.'
Incl. step-by-step assembly diagrams, e 3 American Institute of Engineering & Technology 164
Instruction book wavering peration, computer language (binary sys-
tems), programming. problems and 15 experiments.
Stock No. 70.683 -GD $5.00 Postpaid
5 Brooks Radio & TV Corp 152

6 Burstein-Applebee Co 150
Make Your Own Astronomical Telescope
7 Christy Trades School 158

a
1 r e: ' GRIND YOUR OWN MIRROR
Kits contain mirror blank.
tool, abrasives, diagonal mir-
8 Cleveland Institute of Electronics
Conar
66

/ -.W/ ror and eyepiece lenses. You 9 159

build instruments ranging in 10 Datak Corporation, The 157

value from $75.00 to hundreds of dollars.
Mirror II DeVry Technical Institute 1

Stock No. Dian,. Thickness Price

70,003 -GD 4t/" a/4n $7.50 Ppd. 12 Edmund Scientific Co 166
70,004 -GD 6" 1" 11.95 Ppd.
70,005 -GD
70,006 -GD
8" 1.4" 19.50 Pled. 41 Electro -Voice, Inc 155
10" 1a/4"
70.007-GD 125/2" 25/ " 59.95 Barringtonf.o.b. 13 Electropac Inc 15

SCIENCE TREASURE CHESTS 14 Fair Radio Sales 162

For Boys-Girls-Adults
Treasure Chest-Extra-powerful magnets,
Science 15 Grantham School of Electronics 156
polarizing filters, compass, way -mirror film.
prism, diffraction grating, and lots of other items for 16 Grove Electronic Supply Company 160
hundreds of thrilling experiments, plus a Ten -Lens
Kit for making telescopes, microscopes, etc. Full In-
structions Included. 17 Hallicrafters 2
Stock No. 70.342-GD $5.00 Postpaid
SCIENCE TREASURE CHEST DELUXE 18 Heath Company 20
Everything In Chest above plus exciting additional items, for more
advanced experiments including [Link] kit, electric motor.
molecular model set, first -surface mirrors and lots more. 19 International Crystal Mtg. Co., Inc 6
Stock No. 70.343 -GD $10.00 Postpaid
20 Irving Electronics Co 154
STEREO -MICROSCOPE AMERICAN MADE! 21 Johnson Company, E.F. 4
Up to 3" Working Distance 22 Lafayette Radio Electronics SECOND COVER
Wide 3 Dimensional Field
Used in production, in research or at home; 23 McGee Radio Co 154
for inspections, examinations. counting, check-
ing, assembling, 2 sets of objectives on ro- 24 Meshna Jr., John 163
tating turret. Standard pair of wide field IOX
Kellner Eyepieces give you 23 power and 40 39 Milwaukee School of Engineering 148
power clear, sharp, erect image. Helical rack
and pinion focusing. Interpupillary distance 25 Multi-Elmac Company 120
adjustable. So good we'll SHIP on 10 -DAY
FREE TRIAL. 26 Multicore Sales Corp 162
Order Stock No. 85.056 -GD full price $99.50 F.O.B.
27 National Radio Institute THIRD, FOURTH COVERS
GOOSENECK INSPECTION MAGNIFIER 28 Olson Electronics Incorporated 164
{.,. For Workshop-Lab-Office
"^fr" Large 4" glass lens mounted in chrome 4 Pacific Organs 120
plated brass for extensive use, on 12" 29 Penn Technical Institute 150
long, flexible gooseneck. New, unique ball
swivel provides trouble -free movement in 30 Poly Paks 161
any direction. Weighted metal grey finish base.
Stock No. 70.241 -GO $7.00 Postpaid 31 Progressive "Edu-Kits" Inc 76

Order by Stock No.-Send Check or M.O.-Money-Back Guarantee 32 RCA Electronic Components and Devices 46
EDMUND SCIENTIFIC CO., Barrington, New Jersey 33 RCA Institutes, Inc 17, 18, 19

MAIL COUPON for FREE CATALOG "GD" 34 Sams & Co., Inc., Howard W 153

Completely New 1965 Edition. 148 pages. 35 Scott, Inc., H.H 56

Nearly 4000 Bargains.
EDMUND SCIENTIFIC CO., Barrington. N. J. 36 "TAB" 156
Please rush Free Giant Catalog -GD
40 Telex/Acoustic Products 151
Name 37 Warren Electronic Components 158
Address 38 Xcellte Inc 149
City Zone. .State
CIRCLE NO. 12 ON READER SERVICE CARD CIRCLE NO. 27 ON READER SERVICE CARD- .
166 Printed in U.S.A. ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 BUILD, EXPERIMENT, EXPLORE, DISCOVER
WITH NRI CUSTOM -DESIGNED TRAINING KITS

BUILD YOUR OWN BUILD ACTUAL ANALOG BUILD A CUSTOM -ENGINEERED

PHONE/CODE TRANSMITTER COMPUTER CIRCUITS TELEVISION RECEIVER
This is just one of seven training Industry, business offices, the gov- Want to earn $3 to $5 an hour in
kits programmed into NRI's Com- ernment and military all need spare time? Want your own part-
plete Communications course. You trained Electronics Technicians. time or full-time business? In Ra-
get actual pract ce in building your NRI's Industrial Electronics course dio-TV Servicing you learn to in-
own crystal -controlled, phone/code prepares you. You progress through stall, maintain, service radios, TV
transmitter and putting it on the 10 carefully designed training kits, sets, hi-fi and stereo, other home
air. You experiment with moaula- topping off your practical experi- Electronics equipment. In your
tion, "clamping" circuits, key fil- ence phase of training by experi- training are eight training kits, in-
ters, other aspects of commercial menting with feedback control sys- cluding this complete, modern,
transmitter operation. Can be put tems, analog computers and digital slim -line TV receiver. You build it
on the air simply by attaching an computer elements. You actually yourself, become familiar with
antenna and complies with FCC solve problems on this analog com- components and circuits, learn
regulations. As with all NRI trai ling puter you build yourself. This is the servicing procedures ...
and earn
kits, you get the most modern fea- practical, fast way to a good pay- extra money as you train. National
tures and parts. ing, career position. Radio Institute, Washington, D.C.

SEE OTHER SIDE

Join the Thousands Who
Gained Success with Nil
r FIRST CLASS
"1 am Frequency PERMIT
Coordinator for the
11th Naval District.
NO. 20-R
The course was Washington, D.C.
priceless." J. J.
JENKINS, San
Diego, Calif.

ì"
i
3''-
NRI.
Manythanks to
hold FCC
I
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
License, am master NO POSTAGE STAMP NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES
control engineer
with KXIB-TV."R.L.
WOOD, Fargo, N.O.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY
"I am a Senior En-
gineering Aida.
Without NRI I NATIONAL RADIO INSTITUTE
would still bework-

a
hag in a factory at
lower standard of
3939 Wisconsin Avenue
living." CON
.. RAD, Reseda, Calif.
D. F.
Washington, D.C. 20016
 ilu
GET FAST START ELECTRONICS "BITE SIZE" TEXTS HOBBY? CAREER?
WITH NEW COMES ALIVE WITH PROGRAM YOUR MAIL CARD NOW
ACHIEVEMENT KIT NRI TRAINING KITS TRAINING TO NRI
Delivered to your door- Nothing is as effective as Certainly, lesson texts are Whateaer your need .
everything you need to learning by doing ... and necessary. NRI's pro- whatever your education
make a significant start NRI pioneered the "home grammed texts are as . there's an NRI train-
in the Electronics field of lab" technique of train- simple, direct and well il- ing plan to fit your re-
your choice. An outstand- ing. NRI invites compari lustrated as 50 years of quirements. Choose from
ing, logical way to intro- son with training equip- teaching experience can three major courses or
duce you to home -study ment offered by any other make them. They are select one of seven spe-
training. It includes your school. Begin NOW this carefully programmed cial courses in particular
first set of lesson texts and exciting program of prac- with NRI training kits to Electronics subjects.
all the "classroom tools" tical learning. Make the make the things you read Check the postage -free
you need. No other school skills of the finest Elec- about come alive. You ex- card below, fill in and
has anything like the new tronic Technicians your perience all the excite- mail. National Radio In-
NRI Achievement Kit. own. Mail card below. ment of original discovery. stitute, Washington, D.C.

DISCOVER THE EASE AND EXCITEMENT OF

LEARNING ELECTRONICS THE NRI WAY
4 SEE OTHER SIDE
National Radio Institute, Electronics Div. 1 PICK THE
Washington, D.C. 20016 13-015 TRAINING
Please send me your catalog. have checked the field(s) of most interest to
me. (No salesman will call.)
I
PLAN OF
YOUR CHOICE
TV-Radio Servicing Basic Electronics
Industrial Electronics
AND MAIL
Electronics for Automation
D Complete Communications D Aviation Communications
CARD FOR
FCC License Marine Communications FREE CATALOG
D Math for Electronics D Mobile Communications

Name Age

Address
OUR 50TH YEAR OF
City State Zip Code
LEADERSHIP IN
Accredited Member National Home Study Council ELECTRONICS TRAINING